AnyMedia® Access System (30 channel) Installation - Alcatel

Transcription

See notice on first page
AnyMedia ® Access System
(30 channel)
Installation Manual for DC-Powered
Racks
for ETSI V5 and LAG 1900 Shelves
363-211-603
CC109576140
Issue 1
July 2005
Lucent Technologies - Proprietary
This document contains proprietary information of Lucent Technologies and
is not to be disclosed or used except in accordance with applicable agreements.
Copyright © 2005 Lucent Technologies
Unpublished and Not for Publication
All Rights Reserved
This material is protected by the copyright and trade secret laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be reproduced, distributed,
or altered in any fashion by any entity (either internal or external to Lucent Technologies), except in accordance with applicable agreements,
contracts or licensing, without the express written consent of Lucent Technologies and the business management owner of the material.
Trademarks
All trademarks and service marks specified herein are owned by their respective companies.
Notice
Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However,
information is subject to change.
Safety
Always observe the Safety Instructions given in Chapter 1 when operating the system.
Ordering information
The order number of this document is 363-211-603 (Issue 1).
Technical support
Please contact your Lucent Technologies Local Customer Support Team (LCS) for technical questions about the information in this document.
Information product support
To comment on this information product online, go to http://www.lucent-info.com/comments or email your comments to [email protected].
Contents
About this information product
BOOKMARK1::About this information product
Purpose
xxvii
Reason for reissue
xxvii
Safety information
xxvii
Intended audience
xxvii
How to use this information product
xxvii
Conventions used
xxviii
BOOKMARK2::Purpose
BOOKMARK3::Reason for reissue
BOOKMARK4::Safety information
BOOKMARK5::Intended audience
BOOKMARK6::How to use this information product
BOOKMARK7::Conventions used
Related documentation
xxix
Technical support
xxx
How to order
xxxi
How to comment
xxxi
BOOKMARK8::Related documentation
BOOKMARK9::Technical support
BOOKMARK10::How to order
BOOKMARK11::How to comment
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Safety
BOOKMARK12::1 Safety
Overview
1-1
Structure of hazard statements
1-2
General safety information
1-4
Appearance of the safety instructions
1-8
Electrostatic discharge considerations
1-10
Necessary conditions for an EMC-compliant installation
1-13
DC power connections
1-14
BOOKMARK13::Overview
BOOKMARK14::Structure of hazard statements
BOOKMARK15::General safety information
BOOKMARK16::Appearance of the safety instructions
BOOKMARK17::Electrostatic discharge considerations
BOOKMARK18::Necessary conditions for an EMC-compliant installation
BOOKMARK19::DC power connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
C O N T E N T S
i i i
Laser safety guidelines
1-15
General installation warnings
1-24
General wiring warnings
1-27
Warnings for taking the power supply into operation
1-32
Warnings for transport and storage
1-36
BOOKMARK20::Laser safety guidelines
BOOKMARK21::General installation warnings
BOOKMARK22::General wiring warnings
BOOKMARK23::Warnings for taking the power supply into operation
BOOKMARK24::Warnings for transport and storage
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
General information
BOOKMARK25::2 General information
Overview
2-1
Standard rack deliveries and optional kits
2-3
ETSI V5 Shelf
2-8
LAG 1900 Shelf
2-9
BOOKMARK27::Standard rack deliveries and optional kits
BOOKMARK28::ETSI V5 Shelf
BOOKMARK29::LAG 1900 Shelf
Functions and concepts
2-10
Technical data
2-12
Tools and measuring/testing instruments
2-13
BOOKMARK30::Functions and concepts
BOOKMARK31::Technical data
BOOKMARK32::Tools and measuring/testing instruments
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Mechanical installation
BOOKMARK33::3 Mechanical installation
Overview
3-1
Rack installation and grounding
BOOKMARK35::Rack installation and grounding
Overview
3-2
How to remove rack door and side panel
3-3
Standard floor mounting
3-5
Floor mounting for earthquake group 4
3-8
BOOKMARK37::How to remove rack door and side panel
BOOKMARK38::Standard floor mounting
BOOKMARK39::Floor mounting for earthquake group 4
Wall mounting
3-11
Ceiling mounting
3-14
Mounting racks side-by-side
3-17
Mounting racks back-to-back
3-21
Optical cable duct mounting
3-25
Grounding
3-27
BOOKMARK40::Wall mounting
BOOKMARK41::Ceiling mounting
BOOKMARK42::Mounting racks side-by-side
BOOKMARK43::Mounting racks back-to-back
BOOKMARK44::Optical cable duct mounting
BOOKMARK45::Grounding
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C O N T E N T S
i v
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Shelf installation
BOOKMARK46::Shelf installation
Mounting the ETSI V5 Shelves into the rack
3-30
Mounting the LAG 1900 Shelves into the rack
3-33
Connecting the internal cables to the shelves
3-36
BOOKMARK47::Mounting the ETSI V5 Shelves into the rack
BOOKMARK48::Mounting the LAG 1900 Shelves into the rack
BOOKMARK49::Connecting the internal cables to the shelves
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Parts descriptions of connector fields connectors and
internal cables
BOOKMARK50::4 Parts descriptions of connector fields connectors and internal cables
Overview
4-1
Subrack for fuse and connection panel (RFCP) - Applicable for
J1C293B-1
BOOKMARK52::Subrack for fuse and connection panel (RFCP) - Applicable for J1C293B-1
Overview
4-3
Power connections
4-5
Ringing connections
4-7
Fan Filter and Clock Distribution Unit (FFCU)
4-8
BOOKMARK54::Power connections
BOOKMARK55::Ringing connections
BOOKMARK56::Fan Filter and Clock Distribution Unit (FFCU)
Rack connection panel for alarming
BOOKMARK57::Rack connection panel for alarming
4-10
Rack connection panel (RCP) - Applicable for J1C301B-1
BOOKMARK58::Rack connection panel (RCP) - Applicable for J1C301B-1
Overview
4-14
Power and grounding connections
4-15
Ringing connections
4-18
Passive Clock Distribution panel (PCD520)
4-20
Alarm Connection Panel (ACP520)
4-24
BOOKMARK60::Power and grounding connections
BOOKMARK61::Ringing connections
BOOKMARK62::Passive Clock Distribution panel (PCD520)
BOOKMARK63::Alarm Connection Panel (ACP520)
ETSI V5 Shelf connector field
BOOKMARK64::ETSI V5 Shelf connector field
Overview
4-27
Power connectors (A1/B1)
4-30
E1 connectors (D1/E1/F1/G1)
4-32
TAP connector (C1)
4-41
LAN connector (J2)
4-44
RTU connector (H2)
4-45
BOOKMARK66::Power connectors (A1/B1)
BOOKMARK67::E1 connectors (D1/E1/F1/G1)
BOOKMARK68::TAP connector (C1)
BOOKMARK69::LAN connector (J2)
BOOKMARK70::RTU connector (H2)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
C O N T E N T S
v
Alarm connectors (F2/J3)
4-47
Station clock connector (D2)
4-50
Ringing connector (J1)
4-52
BOOKMARK71::Alarm connectors (F2/J3)
BOOKMARK72::Station clock connector (D2)
BOOKMARK73::Ringing connector (J1)
LAG 1900 Shelf connector field
BOOKMARK74::LAG 1900 Shelf connector field
Overview
4-53
Power connectors (J111/J112)
4-56
E1 connectors (J101/J102)
4-58
TAP connector (J103)
4-62
LAN connector (J104)
4-66
RTU connector (J106)
4-68
Alarm connectors (J107/J108)
4-70
Clock connectors (J109/J110)
4-73
4-76
Fan connector (P114)
4-78
BOOKMARK76::Power connectors (J111/J112)
BOOKMARK77::E1 connectors (J101/J102)
BOOKMARK78::TAP connector (J103)
BOOKMARK79::LAN connector (J104)
BOOKMARK80::RTU connector (J106)
BOOKMARK81::Alarm connectors (J107/J108)
BOOKMARK82::Clock connectors (J109/J110)
BOOKMARK83::Ringing connector (J113)
BOOKMARK84::Fan connector (P114)
Circuit pack and application pack connectors
BOOKMARK85::Circuit pack and application pack connectors
Overview
4-79
CIU pack
4-80
AFME3 and AFMDS3 packs
4-83
AFME1 pack
4-88
AFMO pack
4-94
IPFM pack (for LAG 1900 Shelf only)
4-99
BOOKMARK87::CIU pack
BOOKMARK88::AFME3 and AFMDS3 packs
BOOKMARK89::AFME1 pack
BOOKMARK90::AFMO pack
BOOKMARK91::IPFM pack (for LAG 1900 Shelf only)
SHDSL application pack (LPS510)
4-103
Optical application pack (OAP)
4-108
VSIM application pack (for LAG Shelf only)
4-110
LPZ600 application pack (POTS VoIP)
4-112
Other application packs
4-115
BOOKMARK92::SHDSL application pack (LPS510)
BOOKMARK93::Optical application pack (OAP)
BOOKMARK94::VSIM application pack (for LAG Shelf only)
BOOKMARK95::LPZ600 application pack (POTS VoIP)
BOOKMARK96::Other application packs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C O N T E N T S
v i
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Internal cabling
BOOKMARK97::Internal cabling
Overview
4-130
Internal connections for J1C293B-1
4-131
4-133
BOOKMARK99::Internal connections for J1C293B-1
BOOKMARK100::Internal connections for J1C301B-1
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Cabling procedures
BOOKMARK101::5 Cabling procedures
Overview
5-1
External Cables
5-4
Recommended range of order for cabling
5-7
Installing E3/DS3 cables for AFME3/AFMDS3 packs - Overview
5-9
BOOKMARK103::External Cables
BOOKMARK104::Recommended range of order for cabling
BOOKMARK105::Installing E3/DS3 cables for AFME3/AFMDS3 packs - Overview
Installing E3/DS3 feeder cables for simplex mode without
daisy-chaining
5-12
Installing E3/DS3 feeder cables for simplex mode with daisy-chaining
5-15
Installing E3/DS3 feeder cables for duplex mode without
daisy-chaining
5-19
Installing E3/DS3 feeder cables for duplex mode with daisy-chaining
5-24
Installing the E1 cables to the AFME1 - Overview
5-32
Installing the E1 cables from the AFME1 to the E1 cross-connect
5-35
Installing the E1 cables for the SHDSL AP LPS510
5-38
Installing a/b-cables
5-42
Installing ADSL cables - Overview
5-44
Installing ADSL cables
5-49
Installing the E1 feeder cables
5-51
Installing fiber cables for AFMO packs - Overview
5-54
Installing fiber cables for simplex mode without daisy-chaining
5-59
Installing fiber cables for simplex mode with daisy-chaining
5-64
Installing fiber cables for duplex mode without daisy-chaining
5-69
Installing fiber cables for duplex mode with daisy-chaining
5-74
BOOKMARK106::Installing E3/DS3 feeder cables for simplex mode without daisy-chaining
BOOKMARK107::Installing E3/DS3 feeder cables for simplex mode with daisy-chaining
BOOKMARK108::Installing E3/DS3 feeder cables for duplex mode without daisy-chaining
BOOKMARK109::Installing E3/DS3 feeder cables for duplex mode with daisy-chaining
BOOKMARK110::Installing the E1 cables to the AFME1 - Overview
BOOKMARK111::Installing the E1 cables from the AFME1 to the E1 cross-connect
BOOKMARK112::Installing the E1 cables for the SHDSL AP LPS510
BOOKMARK113::Installing a/b-cables
BOOKMARK114::Installing ADSL cables - Overview
BOOKMARK115::Installing ADSL cables
BOOKMARK116::Installing the E1 feeder cables
BOOKMARK117::Installing fiber cables for AFMO packs - Overview
BOOKMARK118::Installing fiber cables for simplex mode without daisy-chaining
BOOKMARK119::Installing fiber cables for simplex mode with daisy-chaining
BOOKMARK120::Installing fiber cables for duplex mode without daisy-chaining
BOOKMARK121::Installing fiber cables for duplex mode with daisy-chaining
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
C O N T E N T S
v i i
Fiber testing procedure
5-80
Installing IPFM uplink feeders
5-82
Installing OAM&P connections
5-86
Installing clock cables - J1C293B-1
5-87
5-92
Installing the test application paths for local testing - Overview
5-98
BOOKMARK122::Fiber testing procedure
BOOKMARK123::Installing IPFM uplink feeders
BOOKMARK124::Installing OAM&P connections
BOOKMARK125::Installing clock cables - J1C293B-1
BOOKMARK126::Installing clock cables - J1C301B-1
BOOKMARK127::Installing the test application paths for local testing - Overview
Installing TAP-B cabling via the MDF
5-100
Installing TAP-B cabling directly to TAP10x
5-106
Test installation procedure using the remote test head (RTU) Overview
5-109
Installing the physical connection between the RTU and the NB
subsystem.
5-113
Connection of the a/b cables to the MDF
5-115
Installing -48 V power feeder cables
5-116
Installing ringing cables - J1C293B-1
5-120
5-124
Testing the power and ringing feeding
5-130
Final installation activities
5-136
BOOKMARK128::Installing TAP-B cabling via the MDF
BOOKMARK129::Installing TAP-B cabling directly to TAP10x
BOOKMARK130::Test installation procedure using the remote test head (RTU) - Overview
BOOKMARK131::Installing the physical connection between the RTU and the NB subsystem.
BOOKMARK132::Connection of the a/b cables to the MDF
BOOKMARK133::Installing -48 V power feeder cables
BOOKMARK134::Installing ringing cables - J1C293B-1
BOOKMARK135::Installing ringing cables - J1C301B-1
BOOKMARK136::Testing the power and ringing feeding
BOOKMARK137::Final installation activities
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
Maintenance
BOOKMARK138::6 Maintenance
6-1
Overview
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A
Supplemental Information
A-1
Overview
A-1
BOOKMARK140::A Supplemental Information
Connectors and cables
BOOKMARK142::Connectors and cables
Color-Coding for cables
A-3
Connector types
A-9
BOOKMARK143::Color-Coding for cables
BOOKMARK144::Connector types
New installation concept
BOOKMARK145::New installation concept
Overview
A-13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C O N T E N T S
v i i i
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cross-connection between AP connector - EC connectors
A-15
Installation and wiring of the module container
A-16
Installation sequence module container with 32-pair cable
A-17
Replacement of the modules
A-22
Replacement of the module container
A-25
a/b Wiring for module container on subscriber side
A-28
Converting a subscriber loop from NB only to ADSL+ NB
A-33
BOOKMARK147::Cross-connection between AP connector - EC connectors
BOOKMARK148::Installation and wiring of the module container
BOOKMARK149::Installation sequence module container with 32-pair cable
BOOKMARK150::Replacement of the modules
BOOKMARK151::Replacement of the module container
BOOKMARK152::a/b Wiring for module container on subscriber side
BOOKMARK153::Converting a subscriber loop from NB only to ADSL+ NB
OAM&P connections
BOOKMARK154::OAM&P connections
Overview
A-34
Serial local connection for narrowband applications
A-36
LAN connection for narrowband applications
A-37
Serial local connection for ATM xDSL applications
A-40
LAN connection for ATM xDSL applications
A-41
Using the BB ATM Operations Channel to transport narrowband
OAM&P information
A-43
LAN connection for IP applications
A-46
BOOKMARK156::Serial local connection for narrowband applications
BOOKMARK157::LAN connection for narrowband applications
BOOKMARK158::Serial local connection for ATM xDSL applications
BOOKMARK159::LAN connection for ATM xDSL applications
BOOKMARK160::Using the BB ATM Operations Channel to transport narrowband OAM&P information
BOOKMARK161::LAN connection for IP applications
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL
Glossary
GL-1
BOOKMARK162::Glossary
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN
Index
IN-1
BOOKMARK163::Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
C O N T E N T S
i x
List of tables
2
General information
2-1
Variants of DC-powered racks
2-3
2-2
Optional kits
2-7
2-3
Technical data
2-12
2-4
Tools and testing instruments
2-13
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
internal cables
4-1
Pinout overview
4-10
4-2
Pin assignment for ETSI V5 Shelf 1
4-11
4-3
4-12
4-4
4-13
4-5
ACP pinout overview
4-24
4-6
SCP connectors (ETSI V5 Shelf)
4-27
4-7
Pin assignment (Power connectors, J111/J112)
4-30
4-8
Internal power cables (ETSI V5 Shelf)
4-30
4-9
Pin assignment (D1 connector, E1 downstream)
4-32
4-10
Pin assignment (E1 connector, E1 downstream)
4-34
4-11
Pin assignment (F1 connector, E1 upstream)
4-35
4-12
Pin assignment (G1 connector, E1 upstream)
4-37
4-13
Pin assignment (TAP connector, C1)
4-41
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
T A B L E S
x i
4-14
Available TAP cables (ETSI V5 Shelf)
4-43
4-15
Pin assignment (LAN connector, J2)
4-44
4-16
Pin assignment (RTU connector, H2)
4-45
4-17
Serial RTU cable (ETSI V5 Shelf)
4-46
4-18
Pin assignment (Alarm output connector, F2)
4-47
4-19
Pin assignment (Alarm input connector, J3)
4-48
4-20
Alarm cables (ETSI V5 Shelf)
4-48
4-21
Pin assignment (Station clock connector, D2)
4-50
4-22
Station clock cables (ETSI V5 Shelf)
4-51
4-23
Pin assignment (Ringing connector, J1)
4-52
4-24
Available ringing cables (ETSI V5 Shelf)
4-52
4-25
Connectors of the LAG 1900 Shelf connector field
4-53
4-26
4-56
4-27
Internal power cables (LAG 1900 Shelf)
4-57
4-28
Pin assignment (E1 connector downstream, J101)
4-58
4-29
Pin assignment (E1 connector upstream, J102)
4-59
4-30
Pin assignment (TAP connector, J103)
4-62
4-31
Available TAP cables (LAG 1900 Shelf)
4-64
4-32
4-66
4-33
Available LAN cable (LAG 1900 Shelf)
4-67
4-34
Pin assignment (RTU connector, J106)
4-68
4-35
Available RTU cable (LAG 1900 Shelf)
4-69
4-36
Pin assignment (Alarm output connector, J107)
4-70
4-37
4-71
4-38
Available alarm cables (LAG 1900 Shelf)
4-72
4-39
Pin assignment (Clock connector, J109)
4-73
4-40
4-74
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T A B L E S
x i i
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-41
4-76
4-42
Pin assignment (Fan connector, P114)
4-78
4-43
Pin assignment (CIT connector, CIU)
4-81
4-44
Available CIU cables
4-82
4-45
Pin assignment (Serial RS-232C connector, AFME3/AFMDS3)
4-83
4-46
Pin assignment (10Base-T LAN connector, AFME3/AFMDS3)
4-84
4-47
Cables for management
4-87
4-48
Pin assignment (Serial RS-232C connector, AFME1)
4-88
4-49
Pin assignment (10Base-T LAN connector, AFME1)
4-89
4-50
Pin assignment (E1 connector, AFME1)
4-90
4-51
4-92
4-52
Pin assignment (Serial RS-232C connector, AFMO)
4-94
4-53
Pin assignment (10Base-T LAN connector, AFMO)
4-95
4-54
4-97
4-55
Pin assignment (Serial RS-232C connector, IPFM)
4-99
4-56
Pin assignment (10Base-T LAN connector, IPFM)
4-100
4-57
4-101
4-58
4-102
4-59
Available LPS510 cables
4-107
4-60
Optical parameters (OAP)
4-108
4-61
Available a/b cables
4-129
4-62
Connections within the rack
4-131
4-63
4-133
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Cabling procedures
5-1
5-2
Orderable external cables and splitters/combiners for E3/DS3
cabling
5-10
External orderable cables for AFME1 cabling
5-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
T A B L E S
x i i i
5-3
Length of E1 cables for the SHDSL AP LPS510
5-38
5-4
External orderable cables: Cables for a/b-cabling
5-42
5-5
Combinations for POTS/ISDN and ADSL APs
5-49
5-6
E1 feeder cables
5-51
5-7
E1 feeders
5-53
5-8
Single mode fiber jumpers (SC/SC-type connectors)
5-55
5-9
Optical SC-type attenuators
5-57
5-10
Pin assignment electrical cable
5-83
5-11
CIU jumper setting for 120 Ω and 75 Ω clock cables
5-88
5-12
Requirements for clock input cable
5-88
5-13
Pin assignment
5-89
5-14
Position of dummy load connector
5-90
5-15
Available clock cables (LAG 1900)
5-92
5-16
Requirements for clock input cables
5-93
5-17
Pin assignment of the external 120 Ω clock cable
5-94
5-18
Position of the clock termination module
5-94
5-19
TAP-B connections for ETSI V5 shelves
5-100
5-20
TAP-B connections for LAG 1900 Shelves
5-101
5-21
TAP-B connector designation
5-101
5-22
Interconnecting the test application paths via the MDF
5-105
5-23
5-106
5-24
TAP-B connections (internal test access, direct)
5-106
5-25
5-109
5-26
TAP-B connections
5-109
5-27
5-110
5-28
Serial RTU cable for remote test access
5-110
5-29
Fuse values for circuit breakers
5-116
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T A B L E S
x i v
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-30
Ringing cables
5-120
5-31
Ringing cables (LAG 1900)
5-124
5-32
Status LEDs on fan units
5-133
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A
A-1
Color-coding abbreviations
A-3
A-2
Color coding for the 1x32 pair a/b cables
A-4
A-3
Color coding for the P1 connector 2×32 pair a/b cable Tip/Ring
1-32
A-6
Color coding for the P2 connector 2×32 pair a/b cable Tip/Ring
33-64
A-7
RS-232C cable: AnyMedia, connector CIT on CIU to PC GSI,
COM1/COM2
A-36
A-6
LAN connector designation
A-37
A-7
LAN cables
A-37
A-8
Requirements for manufacturing LAN cables
A-37
A-9
RS-232C cable: Connector CONSOLE on AFM packs to PC
GSI, COM1/COM2
A-40
A-4
A-5
A-10 External Ethernet cable: 10BASE-T on AFM pack to PC GSI
directly (crossover wiring for LAN point-to-point connection)
A-41
A-11 External Ethernet cable: 10BASE-T on AFM pack to customer’s
10BaseT LAN equipment (straight-through)
A-42
A-12 Required connections
A-44
A-13 Pin assignment of Y-assembly
A-45
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
T A B L E S
x v
List of figures
2
General information
2-1
Rack layout J1C293B-1 L1
2-4
2-2
Rack layout J1C301B-1
2-6
2-3
Schematic of an AnyMedia ® ETSI V5 Shelf
2-8
2-4
Schematic of an AnyMedia ® LAG 1900 Shelf
2-9
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
3-1
Rack door
3-3
3-2
Bottom plate layout (Standard)
3-5
3-3
Floor mounting
3-5
3-4
Drilling jig
3-6
3-5
Bottom plate layout (earthquake group 4)
3-8
3-6
Floor mounting (earthquake group 4)
3-8
3-7
Drilling jig (earthquake group 4)
3-9
3-8
Mounting points layout (wall mounting)
3-11
3-9
Wall mounting
3-11
3-10
Mounting points layout (ceiling mounting)
3-14
3-11
Ceiling mounting
3-14
3-12
Rack Side-by-Side
3-18
3-13
Rack Back-to-Back
3-22
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
F I G U R E S
x v i i
3-14
Optical cable duct
3-25
3-15
Grounding points
3-28
3-16
Shelf mounting (ETSI V5)
3-31
3-17
Shelf mounting (LAG 1900)
3-34
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
internal cables
4-1
Subrack for Fuse and Connection Panel
4-3
4-2
Power cabling
4-5
4-3
Routing of the power cables
4-6
4-4
Ringing distribution
4-7
4-5
4-8
4-6
FFCU (cable routing)
4-9
4-7
4-10
4-8
Rack Connection Panel
4-14
4-9
Power cabling
4-15
4-10
Routing of the power cables
4-16
4-11
Achieving meshed-IBN configuration
4-17
4-12
Ringing distribution
4-18
4-13
4-20
4-14
External timing reference distribution for station clock
4-21
4-15
External timing reference distribution for duplex office clock
4-21
4-16
Routing of the clock cables
4-23
4-17
4-24
4-18
ACP cabling
4-25
4-19
Routing of the alarm cables
4-26
4-20
Shelf Connection Panel (ETSI V5 Shelf)
4-27
4-21
Cable connections of the SCP (ETSI V5 Shelf)
4-28
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F I G U R E S
x v i i i
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-22
Cable routing to the SCP (ETSI V5 Shelf)
4-29
4-23
4-30
4-24
D1 connector (E1 downstream)
4-32
4-25
E1 connector (E1 downstream)
4-34
4-26
F1 connector (E1 upstream)
4-35
4-27
G1 connector (E1 upstream)
4-37
4-28
E1 cable (120 Ω)
4-38
4-29
E1 cable (75 Ω)
4-38
4-30
120 Ω configuration (default - view on the printed circuit board)
4-39
4-31
75 Ω configuration - view on the printed circuit board
4-39
4-32
TAP connector (C1)
4-41
4-33
TAP cable
4-43
4-34
LAN connector (J2)
4-44
4-35
RTU connector (H2)
4-45
4-36
RTU cable
4-46
4-37
Alarm output connector (F2)
4-47
4-38
Alarm input connector (J3)
4-48
4-39
4-50
4-40
4-52
4-41
4-53
4-42
Cable routing of the LAG 1900 Shelf connector field
4-55
4-43
4-56
4-44
Power cable
4-56
4-45
E1 connector downstream (J101)
4-58
4-46
E1 connector upstream (J102)
4-59
4-47
E1 cable
4-60
4-48
4-62
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
F I G U R E S
x i x
4-49
TAP cable
4-64
4-50
4-66
4-51
LAN cable
4-67
4-52
4-68
4-53
RTU cable
4-69
4-54
Alarm output connector (J107)
4-70
4-55
Alarm input connector (J108)
4-71
4-56
Alarm output cable
4-71
4-57
Alarm input cable
4-71
4-58
Clock connector (J109)
4-73
4-59
Clock connector (J110)
4-74
4-60
Station clock cable
4-74
4-61
Office clock cable
4-74
4-62
Plugged ringing jumpers
4-76
4-63
4-76
4-64
Internal ringing cable
4-77
4-65
4-78
4-66
CHAN/MON DROP connector
4-80
4-67
CIT connector (CIU)
4-81
4-68
CIU cabling
4-82
4-69
Serial RS-232C connector (AFME3/AFMDS3)
4-83
4-70
10Base-T LAN connector (AFME3/AFMDS3)
4-84
4-71
E3/DS3 connectors (AFME3/AFMDS3)
4-85
4-72
AFME3/AFMDS3 cabling
4-86
4-73
Serial RS-232C connector (AFME1)
4-88
4-74
10Base-T LAN connector (AFME1)
4-89
4-75
E1 connector (AFME1)
4-90
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F I G U R E S
x x
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-76
AFME1 cabling
4-92
4-77
Serial RS-232C connector (AFMO)
4-94
4-78
10Base-T LAN connector (AFMO)
4-95
4-79
Optical ports (AFMO)
4-96
4-80
AFMO cabling
4-97
4-81
Serial RS-232C connector (IPFM)
4-99
4-82
10Base-T LAN connector (IPFM)
4-100
4-83
100Base-T LAN connector (IPFM)
4-101
4-84
IPFM cabling
4-102
4-85
Pin assignment (SHDSL AP cable connector, 8 ports)
4-104
4-86
Pin assignment (E1 cable connector, LPS510)
4-105
4-87
LPS510 cabling
4-106
4-88
OAP faceplate
4-108
4-89
LPV417 cabling
4-111
4-90
Pin assignment (POTS connector, LPZ600)
4-113
4-91
LPZ600 cabling
4-114
4-92
Application pack faceplate
4-115
4-93
Pin assignment (POTS AP cable connector, 32 ports)
4-116
4-94
POTS AP cable (64 ports)
4-117
4-95
Pin assignment (POTS AP cable connector P1, 64 ports)
4-117
4-96
Pin assignment (POTS AP cable connector P2, 64 ports)
4-118
4-97
Pin assignment (TAP cable connector)
4-120
4-98
Pin assignment (ISDN AP cable connector)
4-121
4-99
Pin assignment (ADSL16p AP cable connector)
4-122
4-100 Pin assignment (ADSL16i AP cable connector)
4-123
4-101 Pin assignment (ADSL32p AP cable connector)
4-124
4-102 Pin assignment (ADSL32i AP cable connector)
4-125
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
F I G U R E S
x x i
4-103 Pin assignment (SHDSL16 AP cable connector)
4-126
4-104 Pin assignment (HDSL AP cable connector)
4-127
4-105 Pin assignment (P32A32 AP cable connector)
4-128
4-106 Connection points in the RFCP
4-131
4-107 Connection points in the RCP
4-133
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Cabling procedures
5-1
Cable routing of the CP and AP cables
5-6
5-2
E3/DS3 distribution panel cross-connections
5-14
5-3
Daisy-chaining principle for AFME3/DS3 in simplex mode
5-16
5-4
Labeling of cables and splitters/combiners for duplex E3/DS3
cabling without daisychaining
5-19
5-5
Splitter/combiner cabling (AFM side)
5-20
5-6
Splitter/combiner cabling (all ports connected)
5-21
5-7
Arrangement of the two splitters/combiners
5-21
5-8
E3/DS3 distribution panel cross-connections
5-23
5-9
E3/DS3 daisy-chaining principle for duplex mode
5-25
5-10
Labeling of cables and splitters/combiners for duplex E3/DS3
cabling with daisy-chaining
5-26
5-11
Splitter/combiner cabling (AFM side, towards previous row)
5-27
5-12
Splitter/combiner cabling (all ports connected, previous shelf)
5-28
5-13
Arrangement of splitters/combiners in the cable trough
5-29
5-14
Splitter/combiner cabling (AFM side, next row)
5-30
5-15
Splitter/combiner cabling (all ports connected, next shelf)
5-30
5-16
AFME1 cabling principle
5-33
5-17
Pinning for the AFME1 cabling
5-34
5-18
E1 cabling principle for the SHDSL AP LPS510
5-39
5-19
ADSL/POTS cabling and rerouting principle if the complete
splitter is on the ADSL AP
5-46
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F I G U R E S
x x i i
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-20
ADSL/POTS cabling principle for separate splitters shared on
the ADSL AP and the POTS AP
5-47
ADSL/POTS cabling principle for external splitter shelf with
free routing capability
5-48
5-22
Optical attenuator
5-57
5-23
Cross couple connector 995A
5-58
5-24
Cabling principle for simplex AFM mode without
daisy-chaining
5-60
5-25
Optical distribution panel cross-connections
5-62
5-26
Cabling principle for simplex AFM mode with daisy-chaining
5-65
5-27
Cabling principle for duplex AFM mode without daisy-chaining
5-70
5-28
Optical distribution panel cross-connections
5-72
5-29
Cabling principle for duplex AFM mode with daisy-chaining
5-75
5-30
Metal radius clip
5-84
5-31
Metal radius clip and fiber
5-84
5-32
Mounted radius clip on fiber
5-84
5-33
CIU jumper setting
5-87
5-34
Dummy load connector
5-90
5-35
Clock termination module
5-94
5-36
Timing reference distribution to/from the PCDs
5-95
5-37
Routing of the clock cables
5-96
5-38
Cabling for integrated testing with TAP10x via the MDF
(example )
5-102
5-39
Direct cabling for integrated testing with TAP10x (example)
5-107
5-40
Cabling for remote testing (example for the ETSI V5 Shelf)
5-112
5-41
Ringing cables for J1C293B-1 L3
5-121
5-42
Ringing connectors on the RFU
5-123
5-43
Ringing cables for J1C301B-1
5-126
5-44
Routing of the ringing cables
5-127
5-21
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
F I G U R E S
x x i i i
5-45
Power connection points on RFCP (rack type J1C293B-1)
5-130
5-46
Ringing connection points on RFCP (rack type J1C293B-1 L3)
5-130
5-47
Power connection points on RCP (rack type J1C301B-1)
5-131
5-48
Ringing connection points on RCP (rack type J1C301B-1)
5-132
.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A
A-1
2×32 pairs a/b cable
A-6
A-2
Insertion and removal of an application pack connector with
ejector
A-10
A-3
D-Type connectors
A-11
A-4
Molex Connectors
A-11
A-5
Optical ports of the AFMO
A-12
A-6
995A cross-couple connector
A-12
A-7
Small module containers
A-14
A-8
Pin assignment of EC connectors (32-pair) rear side
A-15
A-9
Insulation of system cable
A-17
A-10 Wiring diagram
A-28
A-11 Module container
A-29
A-12 Module pin assignment for POTS APs LPZ1XY
A-29
A-13 Module pin assignment for ISDN AP LPU112 (2B1Q)
A-30
A-14 Module pin assignment for SHDSL AP LPS510
A-30
A-15 Module pin assignment for HDSL AP LPS503/LPS504 (2B1Q)
A-30
A-16 Module pin assignment for ADSL AP LPA416
A-31
A-17 Module pin assignment for ADSL AP LPA417
A-31
A-18 Module pin assignment for LPA432 (ADSL - lite)
A-31
A-19 Module pin assignment for LPA432
A-32
A-20 Module pin assignment for LPA434
A-32
A-21 Module pin assignment for SHDSL16 AP LPS702
A-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F I G U R E S
x x i v
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
A-22 Serial connection of the GSI-NB
A-36
A-23 LAN connectors on the shelves
A-38
A-24 Physical connection for the BB ATM Operations Channel
(example)
A-43
A-25 Y-assembly for cabling in duplex mode
A-45
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
F I G U R E S
x x v
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This manual provides installation and cabling instructions for
AnyMedia ® Access Systems in a DC-powered rack for ETSI V5 and
LAG 1900 Shelves.
Reason for reissue
This is the first issue of this information product.
Safety information
This information product contains hazard statements for your safety.
Hazard statements are given at points where safety consequences to
personnel, equipment, and operation may exist. Failure to follow these
statements may result in serious consequences.
Intended audience
This manual is intended for users who wish to install, configure and
cable a DC powered rack and shelves including all accessories.
Working on the complex equipment and systems described in this
manual requires special training of the personnel.
How to use this
information product
This manual is divided into the following sections with a brief
description of the contents of each major part/chapter/appendix:
About this information product describes the purpose, intended
audience, reason for reissue, and organization of this document. This
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
,
xxvii
section references related documentation and explains how to order,
make comments about or recommend changes to this document.
•
Chapter 1, Safety
This chapter provides all relevant information and safety
guidelines to safeguard against personal injury. Furthermore, this
chapter may be useful to prevent material damage to the
equipment.
•
Chapter 2, General information
This chapter provides general information about the configuration
options, the shelf types, the functions and concepts used, e.g. for
powering, ringing and clock distribution and it provides a list of
required tools and equipment that may be required for
installation.
•
Chapter 3, Mechanical installation
This chapter provides information needed to install the
mechanical parts of the rack in different ways (e.g. standard floor
mounting or wall-mounting), and it includes mounting the
shelves, and other needed accessories.
•
Chapter 4, Parts descriptions of connector fields connectors and
cables
This chapter describes parts that are relevant for the installation
of the rack, e.g. all connector fields and connectors in the rack
and the internal cables used.
•
Chapter 5, Cabling procedures
This chapter provides all information needed for a complete
system cabling.
•
Maintenance
This chapter provides information about maintenance activities
that may be required.
•
Supplemental information
This chapter provides additional information that may be of
interest for the installation e.g. color coding of the cables,
connector types, the NIC installation concept, and OAM&P
connections.
Glossary provides definitions for telecommunication acronyms and
terms.
Index supplies users with specific subjects and corresponding page
numbers to find necessary information.
Conventions used
The following conventions are used throughout the manual:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxviii
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
,
Numbering
The chapters of this document are numbered consecutively. The page
numbering restarts at “1” in each chapter. To facilitate identifying
pages in different chapters, the page numbers are prefixed with the
chapter number. For example, page 2-3 is the third page in chapter 2.
Cross-references
Cross-reference conventions are identical with those used for
numbering, i.e. the first number in a reference to a particular page
refers to the corresponding chapter.
Keyword blocks
This document contains so-called keyword blocks to facilitate the
location of specific text passages. The keyword blocks are placed to
the left of the main text and indicate the contents of a paragraph or
group of paragraphs.
Abbreviations
Abbreviations used in this document can be found in the “Glossary”
unless it can be assumed that the reader is familiar with the
abbreviation.
Related documentation
The following table lists the documents included in the AnyMedia ®
Access documentation set.
Document title
Comcode
CIC Ordering
Number
Applications and Planning Guide (APOG), Overview
109562744
363-211-585
Applications and Planning Guide (APOG), Narrowband and
ATM xDSL services
109562751
363-211-586
Applications and Planning Guide (APOG), IP-based
services
109562769
363-211-587
Data Sheet Book
109218651
363-211-251
Ordering Guide
109097782
363-211-144
Commands and Procedures for narrowband services with
TDM COMDAC
109105635
363-211-119
Commands and Procedures for ATM xDSL services
109024737
363-211-133
Commands and Procedures for IP-based services
109562736
363-211-555
Installation Manual for the DC-powered racks for ETSI V5
and LAG 1900 Shelves
363-211-603
AnyMedia ® LAG 4300 System, Installation Manual
109461939
363-211-256
Installation Manual for the Mainshelf and DC-powered
racks
109024752
363-211-207
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
,
xxix
Document title
Comcode
CIC Ordering
Number
Installation Manual for AC-powered racks
109024745
363-211-206
ONU Installation Manual for Indoor Applications
108626367
363-211-150
Customer Documentation on CD-ROM
108298787
363-211-114
These documents and drawings can be ordered at or downloaded from
the Customer Information Center (CIC) at http://www.cic.lucent.com/,
or via your Local Customer Support.
Technical support
Lucent Technologies provides the following Technical Support
Services:
•
Remote Technical Support (RTS) – remote technical support to
troubleshoot and resolve system problems.
•
On-site Technical Support (OTS) – on-site assistance with
operational issues and remedial maintenance.
•
Repair and Replacement (R&R) – technical support services for
device repair/return or parts replacement.
•
Lucent Online Customer Support – online access to information
and services that can help resolve technical support requests.
NOTE: Technical Support Services are available 24 hours a day, 7
days a week.
When additional technical assistance is needed, use the appropriate
contact information in the table below.
Customer location
Initial Lucent Technologies contact
location
Inside the United
States and Canada
Technical Support Services can be reached at
Outside the United
States and Canada
Technical Support Services can be reached at
Web-Site
1-866-LUCENT8 (866-582-3688).
+1-630-224-4672.
For additional information regarding
Worldwide Services, refer to the Lucent
Technologies web-site at
http://www.lucent.com/products
– Click on Browse Catalog
– Click on Worldwide Services Products
– Select the desired service
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxx
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
,
How to order
How to comment
This information product can be ordered with the order number
363-211-603 at the Customer Information Center (CIC), see
http://www.cic.lucent.com/.
To comment on this information product, go to the Online Comment
Form (http://www.lucent-info.com/comments/enus/) or email your
comments to the Comments Hotline ([email protected]).
As customer satisfaction is extremely important to Lucent
Technologies, every attempt is made to encourage feedback from
customers about our information products. Thank you for your
feedback.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
,
xxxi
1
Safety
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This chapter contains safety instructions, shows the appearance of
safety instructions and provides information on electrostatic discharge.
Contents
1-2
1-4
1-8
1-10
Necessary conditions for an EMC-compliant
installation
1-13
1-14
1-15
1-24
1-27
Warnings for taking the power supply into operation
1-32
1-36
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
1-1
Safety
Structure
of hazard statements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
General structure
Signal words
Hazard statements describe the safety risks relevant while performing
tasks on Lucent Technologies products during deployment and/or use.
Failure to avoid the hazards may have serious consequences.
Hazard statements include the following structural elements:
Item Structure element
Purpose
1
Personal injury symbol
Indicates the potential for personal
injury (optional)
2
Hazard type symbol
Indicates hazard type (optional)
3
Signal word
Indicates the severity of the hazard
4
Hazard type
Describes the source of the risk of
damage or injury
5
Damage statement
Consequences if protective measures
fail
6
Avoidance message
Protective measures to take to avoid
the hazard
7
Identifier
The reference ID of the hazard
statement (optional)
The signal words identify the hazard severity levels as follows:
Signal word
Meaning
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation (high
risk) which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-2
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Safety
Signal word
Meaning
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation (medium
risk) which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
CAUTION
When used with the personal injury symbol:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation (low
risk) which, if not avoided, may result in personal
injury.
When used without the personal injury symbol:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation (low
risk) which, if not avoided, may result in property
damage, such as service interruption or damage to
equipment or other materials.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
1-3
Safety
General
safety information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
This section lists the safety information needed to install and cable the
AnyMedia ® Access System.
Make sure that you read this section carefully and that you understand
all the safety information in this section. The safety information in
this section includes:
•
Important general safety instructions
•
Appearance and classification of safety instructions
•
Understanding electrostatic discharge (ESD) and avoiding
damage from ESD
•
Necessary conditions for an electromagnetic-compliant
installation (EMC, electromagnetic compatibility)
•
•
Lightwave safety
•
Important installation and wiring safety instructions
•
Important general safety instructions for taking the power supply
into operation
•
Important general safety instructions for transporting and storage.
The chapter must be read and understood by the responsible trained
personnel/operator before mounting/commissioning, operation and
maintenance/repair. The valid version of this document must always
be kept close to the equipment/unit.
NOTE: If you do not understand any of the safety information in this
section, please see your manager immediately. You should also talk
with your manager if you feel you do not understand any procedures
in this manual, or if you feel you need additional training before
performing any of these procedures.
Not only the general instructions in this chapter on safety must be
observed, but also the specific safety instructions in the individual
chapters.
Only trained service personnel should perform the procedures in this
document. These procedures allow exposure to high electrical energy
and/or current that may result in electric shock and/or injury to
untrained personnel during servicing, maintenance, and installation of
this system.
All safety instructions have a uniform appearance. This appearance is
described in detail in “Appearance of the safety instructions” (1-8).
NOTE: The AnyMedia ® Access System must be supplied with Safety
Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) of –48 V and the positive terminal of this
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-4
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Safety
source must be correctly connected to the protective earth. Never
connect to supply voltage of –60 V, which will destroy the equipment.
General notes on safety
This system has been developed in line with the present
state-of-the-art and fulfils the current national and international safety
requirements. It is provided with a high degree of operational safety
resulting from many years of development experience and continuous
stringent quality checks in our company.
The system is safe in normal operation. There are, however, some
potential sources of danger that cannot be completely eliminated. In
particular, these arise during
General safety
requirements
•
opening of housings or equipment covers
•
manipulation of any kind within the equipment, even if it has
been disconnected from the power supply
•
possible contact with
–
live parts
–
laser light
–
hot surfaces
–
sharp edges, or
–
devices sensitive to electrostatic discharge.
In order to keep the technically unavoidable residual risk to a
minimum, it is imperative to observe the following rules:
•
Installation, configuration and disassembly must be carried out
only by expert personnel and with reference to the respective
documentation.
Due to the complexity of the unit/system, the personnel requires
special training.
•
The unit/system must be operated by expert and authorized users
only.
The user must operate the unit/system only after having read and
understood the chapter on safety and the parts of the
documentation relevant to operation. For complex systems,
additional training is recommended. Any obligatory training for
operating and service personnel must be carried out and
documented.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
1-5
Safety
•
Any conversions or changes to the system or parts of the system
(including the software) must be carried out by qualified Lucent
Technologies personnel or by expert personnel authorized by
Lucent Technologies.
All changes carried out by other persons lead to a complete
exemption from liability.
No components/spare parts must be used other than those
recommended by the manufacturer and those listed in the
procurement documents.
•
The unit/system must not be operated unless it is in perfect
working order.
Any faults and errors that might affect safety must be reported
immediately by the user to a person in responsibility.
•
The equipment must be supplied with Safety Extra-Low Voltage
(SELV) of –48 V and the positive terminal of this source must be
correctly connected to the protective earth.
Never connect to –60 V.
•
The unit/system must be operated only with the connections and
under the environmental conditions as described in the
documentation.
•
The removal or disabling of safety facilities, the clearing of faults
and errors, and the maintenance of the equipment must be
carried out by specially qualified personnel only.
The respective parts of the documentation must be strictly
observed.
The documentation must also be consulted during the selection of
measuring and test equipment.
•
Transport, storage and operation of the unit/system must be
under the permissible conditions only.
See accompanying documentation and information on the
unit/system.
•
Calibrations, special tests after repairs and regular safety checks
must be carried out, documented and archived.
•
Only use tested and virus-free diskettes.
•
Do not place the shelves on an unstable cart, stand, or table.
The product may fall causing serious damage to the equipment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-6
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Safety
•
Never push objects of any kind into this product through slots as
they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that
could result in a risk of fire or electrical shock. Never spill liquid
of any kind on the product.
•
The AnyMedia ® Access System is fed by more than one power
feeder (multiple power feeding) from the external power source.
Switching off one of the power feeders will not necessarily
remove the power to the equipment. For deenergizing power
completely the circuit breaker to the DC power distribution
network must be switched off.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
1-7
Safety
Appearance
of the safety instructions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
All safety instructions have a uniform appearance. They include a
signal word that classifies the danger and a text block that contains
descriptions of the type and cause of the danger, the consequences of
ignoring the safety instruction and the measures that can be taken to
minimize the danger. In some safety instructions, a warning symbol is
placed underneath the signal word.
Example:
CAUTION
Destruction of components due to a supply voltage
of incorrect polarity or a supply voltage which is too
high
The AnyMedia ® Access System operates at a nominal voltage of
−48 V DC. The permissible tolerance range is −40.5 V to −57 V
DC.
Ensure that the supply voltage has the correct range and polarity
before connecting the voltage (about –54 V for battery backed
DC distribution network). Ensure that fuses and circuit breakers
will be replaced with the same type and rating of fuse if required.
Never connect the AnyMedia ® Access System to −60 V DC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-8
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Warning symbols
Safety
The following warning symbols are used:
Symbol
Common application
General warning about a danger
Warning about a dangerous electrical voltage
Warning about laser radiation
Warning about explosion
Warning about battery acid
Warning about devices sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD)
The safety instructions for the classes “Danger”, “Warning” and
“Caution” always have a warning symbol, the “Important” and
“Notice” safety instructions can, but do not always have a warning
symbol.
Special safety instructions
The aspects of “handling of components sensitive to electrostatic
discharge (ESD)” and “laser safety” are of vital importance for
equipment in the AnyMedia ® Access System. The key safety
instructions for these subjects are summarized in “Electrostatic
discharge considerations” (1-10) and in “Laser safety guidelines”
(1-15).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
1-9
Safety
Electrostatic
discharge considerations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General notes on ESD
Electrostatic discharge (ESD), for example caused by touching with
the hand, can destroy semiconductor components. The correct
operation of the complete system is then no longer assured.
All semiconductor components are basically sensitive to electrostatic
discharge (ESD). The electrostatic discharge can also affect the
components indirectly via contacts or conductor tracks.
Circuit packs containing components that are especially sensitive to
electrostatic discharge are identified by warning labels bearing the
barred-hand symbol.
Warning symbol:
CAUTION
ESD hazard
Warning about devices sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD).
Electronic components can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.
To avoid electrostatic discharge conductively connected wrist
straps connect to the rack ESD bonding point should be used.
Each rack has an ESD earth socket and an ESD sticker on the side
rails on both sides of the rack. It is mounted so that it is always
accessible for installation, normal operation and maintenance activity.
An ESD bonding point for an ESD wrist strap is also provided in the
connector field of the shelves.
CAUTION
ESD hazard
An electrostatic discharge wrist strap, with a resistance between
250 kΩ and 1.5 MΩ, should be worn when handling AnyMedia ®
Access System circuit packs to prevent possible damage to the
circuit packs. Before using the wrist strap, check the wrist strap
for shorts, opens, and proper resistance value. Do not use a wrist
strap that does not pass these checks.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-10
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Precautions
ESD wrist strap
Safety
The following list of precautions should be observed when handling
circuit packs to prevent damage by electrostatic discharge (ESD):
•
Always observe the ESD instructions.
•
Assume all circuit packs contain solid state electronic
components that can be damaged by ESD.
•
Work in an area which is protected against electrostatic
discharge. Use conducting floor and bench mats which are
conductively connected to the rack ESD bonding point.
•
Wear conductively connected wrist straps and connect them to
the rack ESD bonding point.
•
Wear working garments made of 100% cotton to avoid
electrostatic discharge.
•
Conductively connect all test equipment and trolleys to the rack
ESD bonding point.
•
Handle all circuit packs by the faceplate or latch and by the top
and bottom outermost edges. Never touch the components,
conductors, or connector pins.
•
Observe warning labels on bags and cartons. Whenever possible,
do not remove circuit packs from antistatic packaging until ready
to insert them into slots.
•
If possible, open all circuit packs at a static-safe work position,
using properly grounded wrist straps and static-dissipating table
mats. If a static-dissipating table mat is used, be sure that it is
clean to ensure a good discharge path.
•
Always store and transport circuit packs in static-safe packaging.
Shielding is not required unless specified.
•
Ensure that the rack is grounded.
•
Keep all static-generating materials such as food wrappers,
plastics, and foam packaging away from all circuit packs. On
removal from the shelf, immediately put circuit packs into
static-safe packages.
•
Whenever possible, maintain relative humidity above 20 percent.
To reduce the possibility of ESD damage, the shelves and the racks
are equipped with a grounding jack to enable personnel to ground
themselves using wrist straps with a minimum resistance of 250 kΩ
while handling circuit packs or working on a shelf/shelves. The jacks
are located on the left and right of the rack and are accessible from
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
1-11
Safety
the front. When grounding jacks are not provided, an alligator clip
adapter enables connection to rack’s frame ground (FRMGND).
To
Ground
Connection
e12:/7W-21610.dia/fig_20.cdr
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-12
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Safety
Necessary
conditions for an EMC-compliant installation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Working environment
All the equipment of the AnyMedia ® Access System is designed only
to work in meshed bonding network (mesh-BN) or meshed isolated
bonding network (mesh-IBN) environments which comply with
ETS 300 253. The conditions include the following:
•
the framework (FRMGND) of the shelves and the rack are
connected to each other and have to be connected to the
protective earth (PE) and to the bonding wire,
•
FRMGND and the –48 V return path (–48VRTN) have to be
connected together for mesh-BN environment,
•
in mesh-BN environment the return path (tip wire, TRG) of the
ringing voltage has to be connected to the protective earth at the
ringing source side.
The framework must be correctly connected to the protective earth
before the start of work.
The CE-marked racks/shelves need the EMC-proof connecting
material, such as shielded cables and metallic or conductive D-sub
connector hoods, to meet the CE Directives.
The housing of all connectors will be connected with frame ground
(FRMGND). Every shielding is connected to FRMGND.
Cables
All cables except the a/b-cables of the application packs (AP), the
power cables and the ringing cables must be shielded and must be
equipped with EMC-tight connectors.
All E1-cables and the cables for station clock cabling must be
shielded. The E1 cables must have an impedance of 120 Ohms
(twisted pair). The station clock may also use 75 Ohms (coaxial)
cable.
All E3/DS3 coaxial cables must have an impedance of 75 Ohms. Only
cables with right-angled connectors should be connected to the AFM
pack, otherwise the doors of the rack cannot be closed.
For connecting a PC-GSI via the CONSOLE connector (RS-232C) to
the AFM pack for ATM xDSL applications, a 9-pin D-sub connector
with angled housing should be connected, otherwise the doors of the
shelves cannot be closed.
All a/b-cables, E1-, E3/DS3, xDSL-cables and the alarming cabling
should not leave the building premises unless connected to
telecommunication devices providing primary protection (for example
protector blocks with gas discharge tubes) as applicable.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
1-13
Safety
DC
power connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DC power requirements
Ringing
The equipment must be supplied with Safety Extra-Low Voltage
(SELV) of –48 V and the positive terminal of this source must be
correctly earthed according to EN 300 253. For mesh-BN
configurations, –48VRTN is also connected to frame ground in the
rack.
The ringing return path (tip wire, TRG) of the customer’s ringing
generator must be connected externally to the protective earth (and is
therefore connected to the –48 V return path (–48VRTN) of the
customer’s external –48 V (battery backed ringing only).
For mesh-BN configurations, both the –48 V return path (–48VRTN)
and the return path (TRG) of the ringing generator are internally
connected to the metalwork of the rack (potential FRMGND). These
connections via cables/studs are not visible. For mesh-IBN
configurations, the return path (TRG) is connected to ground at the
source but not at the rack.
WARNING
Electric shock hazard
The AnyMedia ® Access System can be fed by ringing voltages of
57 V DC maximum superimposed by 105 V AC maximum. Touching
live ringing cables will shock or cause serious injury or death. This
applies to the cabling from the external ringing source up to the
shelves.
Take care when servicing in this area. Follow all safety warnings
and local regulation practices.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-14
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Safety
Laser
safety guidelines
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General laser information
The AnyMedia ® Access System is equipped with a laser source on the
optical application pack (OAP), the optical controller pack in the
Subshelves (OCP) and on the optical AFM (AFMO). Fibers are routed
to these packs.
Lightwave digital transmission system and associated optical test sets
use semiconductor laser transmitters. The lasers emit lightwaves into
lightguide cables, at or near infrared wavelengths that are invisible to
the human eye (wavelengths between 800 nm and 1600 nm).
Light energy emitted by laser and high-radiance LEDs may cause eye
damage if absorbed by the eye’s retina. When a beam of light enters
the eye, the eye magnifies and focuses the energy increasing the
damage and may cause a retinal burn. The damage mechanism at the
wavelengths used in telecommunications is thermal in origin, that is,
damage caused by heating. Therefore, a specific amount of energy is
required for a definite time to heat an area of retinal tissue.
A conventional laser produces a small beam of light, and because the
beam is small the power density is very high. Lasers used in
lightwave systems have a larger beam divergence, typically 10 to 20
degrees. Inadvertently viewing an unterminated fiber or damaged fiber
with the unaided eye at distances greater than 150 mm (6 inches) will
normally not cause eye injury. However, damage may occur if an
optical instrument such as a microscope, magnifying glass or eye
loupe is used to view the energized fiber end.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
1-15
Safety
CAUTION
Laser hazard
Lightwave digital transmission systems and associated optical test sets
operate with invisible laser radiation. Laser radiation can cause
damage to the skin and considerable injuries to the eyes.This applies
particularly to the connections of the optical packs. Although, at
present, the transmitting power levels for Class 1 lasers are below
those known to cause injury to the eye at distances greater than
250 mm (≈ 10 inches) direct exposure should always be avoided.
Don’t look into the end of an exposed fiber or optical connector
of a pack as long as the optical source is switched on. Never
view any unterminated optical connector with optical microscope
or magnifying glasses as long as the laser source is switched on.
Always test with an optical power meter or infrared detectors
that the fiber is deenergized and ensure that the laser source can
not be activated during inspection with the microscope.
Never view any unterminated optical connector with optical
instruments other than special indirect image-converting devices
such as the FIND-R-SCOPE of FJW Optical Systems, Inc., since
viewing optics tend to collimate the energy from an optical
connector and, hence, increase the potential risk of injury.
Always observe the laser warning instructions in “Laser safety”
(1-17).
In its normal operating mode, a lightwave system is totally enclosed
and presents no risk of eye injury. It is a Laser Class 1/I product
under the IEC schemes, for different laser classes, see “Classification
of lasers” (1-18).
The optical packs of the AnyMedia ® Access System do not have an
Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) feature compliant with ITU-T
G.958 and IEC 60825. The internal laser source is on as soon as the
optical packs are powered. This must be considered especially before
checking the fiber with an optical microscope.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-16
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Safety
WARNING
Laser hazard
The optical packs do not have an Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)
feature compliant with ITU-T G.958 and IEC 60825. The internal
laser source is on as soon as the optical packs are powered. This
must be considered especially before checking the fiber with an
optical microscope.
microscope or magnifying glasses as long as the laser source is
switched on. Always test with an optical power meter or infrared
detectors that the fiber is deenergized and ensure that the laser
source can not be activated during inspection with the
microscope.
Laser safety
CAUTION
Laser hazard
Although, at present, the transmitting power levels for Laser Class 1
are below those known to cause injury to the eye at distances greater
than 250 mm (≈ 10 inches) direct exposure should always be
avoided.
Always observe the laser warning instructions (see instructions
below).
In its normal operating mode, a lightwave system is totally enclosed
and presents no risk of eye injury. It is a Laser Class 1/I product
under the IEC schemes.
The lightguide cables that interconnect various components of a
lightwave system can be disconnected or break, and may expose
people to lightwave emission. Also, certain measures and service
procedures may expose the technician to emission from the laser
circuit pack during installation and servicing.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
1-17
Safety
Observe the following instructions to avoid exposing yourself and
others to risk:
Classification of lasers
•
Don’t look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector
as long as the optical source is still switched on. Even for
Class 1 lasers viewing with the unaided eye at distances greater
than 250 mm (≈ 10 inches) will normally not cause eye injury.
•
Under no circumstances lightwave/lightguide operations shall be
performed by a technician before satisfactorily completing an
approved training course. Only authorized, trained personnel shall
be permitted to carry out service, maintenance and restoration
activities.
•
All unauthorized personnel shall be excluded from the immediate
area of lightwave transmission systems during installation and
service.
•
Read the relevant descriptions in the manuals before taking
equipment into operation or carrying out any installation and
maintenance work on the optical packs, and follow the
instructions. Ignoring the instructions can result in exposure to
dangerous radiation.
•
If you are not sure that the fiber is connected to a Laser Class I
product ensure that the optical source is switched off before
disconnecting optical fiber connectors.
•
Under no circumstances shall any personnel scan a fiber with an
optical test set without verifying that all lightwave sources on the
fiber are turned off or that the test set is specially approved for
this test.
•
In the event of doubt, check that the optical source is switched
off by measuring with an optical power meter or using infrared
detectors.
•
If the fiber will be disconnected from the optical pack always put
the protective cap on the optical connectors of the fiber and the
optical pack.
The laser classes are defined in standards such as EC 60825 (or
EN 60825) and its supplements. A maximum laser radiation is defined
for each laser class according to the wavelength. The maximum laser
radiation depends on the type of laser diode used. This results in
different laser classes for the various optical circuit packs.
These standards require manufacturers to classify their laser products
as belonging to one of the major classes, classes 1, 2, 3A, and 3B.
Manufacturers of lasers and laser products in the U.S. are regulated by
the Food and Drug Administration’s Center for Devices and
Radiological Health FDA/CDRH) under 21 CFR 1040. Classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-18
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Safety
schemes are similar to the IEC with categories such as class I, II, lla,
IlIa or lllb. In both cases, laser products are classified according to the
accessible emission levels and their potential for causing injury.
Laser classes to IEC 60825 and DIN/EN 60825.
Laser class
Wavelength
Max. laser radiation
Class 1
1300 nm
8.85 mW
Class 1
1550 nm
10 mW
Class 3A
1300 nm
31 mW
Class 3A
1550 nm
50 mW
Class k x 3A
1300 nm
81 mW
Class k x 3A
1550 nm
50 mW
Class 3B
1300 nm
0.5 mW
Class 3B
1550 nm
0.5 mW
Optical transmission systems are identified by yellow laser warning
labels on which only the laser class is indicated (see the labels
below).
Lightwave systems are generally classified as class 1/I, because,
under normal operating conditions, all energized laser transmitting
circuit packs are terminated on optical fibers which enclose the laser
energy with the fiber sheath forming a protective housing. Also,
covers are typically in place over the circuit pack shelves.
The label shown below is used to identify systems belonging to laser
class 1 in normal operation.
LASER PRODUCT
CLASS 1
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
Appropriate labels are also available for the remaining laser classes
(k x 3A, 3B); each label indicates the laser class, wavelength and
maximum laser radiation. These labels are affixed in a clearly visible
position on the equipment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
1-19
Safety
The AnyMedia ® Access System equipped with optical packs is
completely classified as a Laser Class 1 product.
The following laser warning symbols can be affixed to the optical
packs. The optical connectors from which laser radiation can be
emitted can be identified by a laser warning symbol near the
connector:
Due to lack of space, laser warning labels cannot be affixed to the
potential source of laser radiation, that is, directly to the optical
connectors.
Handling fibers
Splicing
Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or optical connector of a
pack as long as the optical source is switched on. Always observe the
laser warning instructions.
Cutting and splicing fibers must be followed and performed by trained
personnel only. Read and understand all instructions of the manual of
the splicing and cutting equipment.
Before splicing verify the fiber is disconnected from the optical pack
or the laser source.
To protect the fiber connectors and couplers from contamination when
not in use, make sure that their protective covers/cups are in place.
WARNING
Injury to eyes caused by broken-off fiber ends
When splicing optical fibers, fiber ends can easily break off and get in
your eyes. This can cause eye damage.
Make sure that no broken-off fiber ends get in your eyes. If
required use safety goggles for fiber splicing. Place broken-off
fiber ends in a sealed container immediately after you cut them
off.
After cutting/splicing, every splice has to be checked. Follow the
instructions of the manual of the splicing and cutting equipment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-20
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Routing and connecting
Safety
During installation of fibers the optical connectors of fibers and the
connectors on the optical packs must be equipped with a protective
cap until the connectors are coupled.
The fibers should be guided to the optical packs using the special
protective spiral wrap of the pigtail.
For connecting fibers to optical packs/modules with the ALS feature
connect the outgoing fiber at first and then the incoming fiber.
If the fiber is routed from bottom to an optical connector take care if
the fiber has to be disconnected so that the fiber will not hang out of
the shelf and can be bent or broken.
Optical cable break
There is a risk to cause microdefects in the fiber or a risk of a cable
break if the bending radius of optical fiber cables is less than about
30 mm. Microdefects can increase the fiber attenuation and reduce
the long term stability. Ensure that the bending radius is not less than
30 mm.
Always use the special protective spiral wrap delivered with the fiber
pigtails to the optical packs. For the office fiber cable the allowed
bending radius depending on the cable used must be obeyed.
Cleaning optical
connectors and couplings
Cleaning optical connectors is required only if problems have
occurred which indicate that these connectors have an impurity (for
example deviation of attenuation values beyond the permitted
maximum).
For installation in dirty environments the fibers should always be
checked for impurities before they are connected.
If equipped also the fiber attenuators or lightguide buildouts (LBO)
have to be checked.
Use isopropanol for cleaning. Let the connector/coupling face air-dry
or use purified compressed air (the isopropanol must evaporate
completely!).
Checking fiber connectors
Before starting to clean the optical connectors, ensure that the optical
source is switched off. Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or
optical connector of a pack as long as the optical source is switched
on. Always observe the laser warning instructions.
To check for impurities (for example fluff, dust particles, ...), use a
microscope with an enlargement factor of 40, so that the connector
face can be inspected.
Cleaning SC-type
connectors
On the SC-type connectors the ferrule has to be cleaned with optical
lint-free tissues or with a wipe moistened with isopropyl alcohol and
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
1-21
Safety
blow-dry with canned compressed air. The end and the sides of the
ferrule should be cleaned.
Cleaning LBOs
The Base of the LBO can be cleaned by placing a pipe cleaner inside
the Base and gently rotating. If the pipe cleaner is moistened with
isopropyl alcohol the Base must blow-dry with canned compressed air.
The Cap of the LBO can only be cleaned by holding canned
compressed air nozzle about 7 cm (3 inches) from the Cap ends.
Never use a pipe cleaner to clean the Cap.
Checking optical couplers
Visually check the coupling for residual impurities by holding it to the
light (the geometry of the coupling does not allow the coupling to be
checked under the microscope). After cleaning with a pipe cleaner do
not connect the optical connectors/couplings without checking them
for impurities.
Handling the optical packs
laser source is on as soon as the optical packs are powered. This must
be considered especially before checking the fiber with an optical
microscope.
WARNING
Laser hazard
laser source is on as soon as the optical packs are powered. This
must be considered especially before checking the fiber with an
optical microscope.
microscope or magnifying glasses as long as the laser source is
switched on. Always test with an optical power meter or infrared
detectors that the fiber is deenergized and ensure that the laser
source can not be activated during inspection with the
microscope.
For receiving and transmitting on the OAP a single-mode fiber is used
carrying two wavelengths of 1310 nm and 1500 nm.
Important! Connecting the output and input of optical packs
with a transmit power in excess of -3 dBm over short distances
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-22
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Safety
can cause the destruction of the detector diodes, as the input
power is then too high. The use of an optical attenuator or a line
buildout of approximately 10 to 20 dB can be required if
connections over short distances for test purposes are established.
For receiving and transmitting on the AFMO two single-mode fibers
are used. To loop the AFMO to itself a 15 dB attenuator is required,
direct looping is not allowed.
In normal operation the optical packs are classified as belonging to
Laser Class 1. The lightguide cables can be disconnected or break,
and may expose people to lightwave emission. Therefore:
•
Disconnect the fiber from the OAP and remove the OAP from
the shelf before working on the optical fiber or connectors inside
the pack.
•
Never look into an unterminated optical fiber or connector
directly without first checking that the laser has been turned off.
•
Inadvertently viewing an unterminated fiber or damaged fiber
with the unaided eye at distances greater than 250 mm
(≈ 10 inches) will normally not cause eye injury with Laser
Class 1 laser sources.
•
If the OAP or the AFMO are powered the internal laser of the
packs will work. If the fiber is connected to the OAP and the
yellow CLF LED lights the fiber is broken or not connected, or
the OCP in the ONU Subshelf does not work.
Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or optical connector of
packs as long as the optical source is switched on. Always observe the
laser warning instructions.
Before splicing verify the fiber is disconnected from the optical circuit
pack. After cutting/splicing, every splice has to be checked. Follow
the instructions of the manual of the splicing and cutting equipment.
During installation of fibers the optical connectors must be equipped
with a protective cap until the connectors are coupled.
For connecting fibers connect the outgoing fiber at first and then the
incoming fiber.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
1-23
Safety
General
installation warnings
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
Risk of injury due to untrained personnel
Installation and maintenance procedures must be followed and
performed by trained personnel only.
Do not allow non-service personnel to access electrical wiring.
Read and understand all instructions and warning labels. Follow
all warnings and instructions marked on the product and in the
manuals.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unsecured rack
An unpacked rack, including doors, without shelves weighs up to 50
kg and can cause considerable injuries if it is knocked over or
dropped. This can also cause serious damage to the rack and the
shelves.
Use a sturdy vehicle for transport and secure the rack against
dropping. At least two persons are required for lifting the rack.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unsecured shelf.
A fully-equipped LAG 1900 shelf weighs 43,6 kg (incl. shelf + fan +
cables) and a fully equipped ETSI V5 shelf weights 48kg (incl shelf +
fan + cables) and can cause considerable injuries if it is knocked over
or dropped. This can also cause serious damage to the shelf.
At least two persons are required for lifting the shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-24
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Safety
WARNING
Ineffectiveness of laser warning labels if removed or
concealed
Warning labels on the optical components warn of the dangers of
invisible laser radiation. Removed, concealed or illegible labels can
lead to incorrect action and thus cause serious injuries to the eyes of
operating staff.
Ensure that the laser warning labels are not removed or
concealed and always clearly legible.
WARNING
Risk of fire or electrical shock
Objects of any kind pushed through openings in the shelves may touch
dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk
of fire or electrical shock.
You must therefore ensure that
•
objects of any kind are never pushed into the shelves
•
liquid of any kind is never spilled on the shelves.
CAUTION
Risk of reduced component reliability due to
overheating
Inadequate removal of heat can cause reduced component reliability
and the system to operate outside its functionality specifications.
You must therefore ensure that
•
the included fan units are operating
•
the air intake area at the lower front of the rack is not obstructed
•
the fan units are maintained properly
•
the doors of the rack are closed when in operation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
1-25
Safety
CAUTION
ESD hazard
Hold packs only at the edges or on the insertion and removal
facilities. Always observe the ESD instructions (see “Electrostatic
discharge considerations” (1-10)).
CAUTION
Condensation causes malfunctioning
Condensation can occur in the AnyMedia ® Access System, especially
during transport on moving from the outside to closed rooms; this can
cause malfunctioning of the packs.
Ensure that packs and shelves have reached room temperature
and are dry before taking them into operation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-26
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Safety
General
wiring warnings
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
Risk of injury due to untrained personnel
Installation and maintenance procedures must be followed and
performed by trained personnel only.
Do not allow non-service personnel to access electrical wiring.
Read and understand all instructions and warning labels. Follow
all warnings and instructions marked on the product and in the
manuals.
WARNING
shelves.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to touching uninsulated cables
Never touch uninsulated telecommunication wires or terminals unless
the telecommunication line has been disconnected at the Z, E1,
E3/DS3, xDSL test or alarm interface. Never touch uninsulated wiring
or terminals carrying direct current or ringing current or leave this
wiring exposed.
Protect and tape those wires and terminals to avoid risk of fire,
electrical shock, and injury to service personnel.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
1-27
Safety
WARNING
Risk of injury due to installation of cables during a
storm or in wet locations
Never install telecommunication wiring during a lightning storm.
Never install telecommunication connections in wet locations.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to disconnected ground
The installation must have an independent rack ground connection to
the building ground/protective earth for indoor applications.
Grounding circuit continuity is vital for safe operation of the
AnyMedia ® Access System. The framework must be correctly
connected to the protective earth before the start of work.
Never operate the AnyMedia ® Access System or a single shelf
with a disconnected ground.
CAUTION
Destruction of components due to installed cables
without protection
All a/b-cables, E1-, E3/DS3, xDSL-cables and the alarming
cabling should not leave the building premises unless connected
to telecommunication devices providing primary protection (for
example protector blocks with gas discharge tubes) as applicable.
CAUTION
Laser hazard
The AnyMedia ® Access System can operate with invisible laser
radiation. Laser radiation can cause considerable injuries to the eyes.
Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or optical connector
of a pack as long as the optical source is switched on. This
applies particularly to the connections of the optical packs.
Always observe the laser warning instructions in “Laser safety”
(1-17).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-28
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Safety
CAUTION
Destruction of the detector diodes caused by
excessive input power
Connecting the output and input of optical packs with a transmit
power in excess of -3 dBm over short distances can cause the
destruction of the detector diodes, as the input power is then too high.
Use an optical attenuator of approx. 15 dB when establishing
connections over short distances for the AFMO pack.
CAUTION
high
–48 V DC. The permissible tolerance range is −40.5 V to −57 V
DC.
before connecting the voltage. The AnyMedia ® Access System
should be operated only from the type of power source indicated
on the marking label. Ensure that fuses will be replaced with the
same type and rating of fuse. Never connect the AnyMedia ®
Access System to −60 V DC.
CAUTION
Risk of injury if only one −48 V DC power feeder is
disconnected
The AnyMedia ® Access System may be equipped with two −48 V DC
input power feeders. Switching off one power feeder will not
de-energize the AnyMedia ® Access System.
Switch off both power feeders when removing power from the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
1-29
Safety
CAUTION
Destruction of packs in the event of a short circuit
A short circuit in the AnyMedia ® Access System can cause
destruction of electronic components and thus malfunctioning of the
complete system.
You must therefore not use objects such as a screwdriver in the
pack area. Never push objects of any kind into this product
through slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or
cause a short circuit.
CAUTION
ESD hazard
CAUTION
Fiber micro defects and/or cable break with a bending
radius less than 30 mm
There is a risk of causing micro defects in the single fiber or a risk of
a cable break if the bending radius of optical fiber cables is less than
about 30 mm. Micro defects can increase the fiber attenuation and
reduce the long term stability.
Ensure that the bending radius for the single fiber is not less
than 30 mm. Always use the special protective spiral wrap if the
fiber pigtails to the optical packs is equipped with. For the office
fiber cable the allowed bending radius depending on the cable
used must be observed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-30
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Safety
CAUTION
Destruction of components by incorrect handling
Proper function of the AnyMedia ® Access System is only possible by
the use of the correct circuit packs.
Before replacing a circuit pack, check the identification code to
ensure that the proper pack is being used.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
1-31
Safety
Warnings
for taking the power supply into operation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
shelves.
WARNING
Destruction of components due to long power and
ringing cables without filtering
Overvoltages can appear if long cables are used for external ringing
and powering. Power filter units are used to provide filtering and
power redundancy.
All ringing cables from external ringing sources where the cable
length exceeds 3 m shall be filtered to pass the resistibility test
according ITU-T K.41. For ringing the use of the ringing filter
unit is recommended.
CAUTION
PFUs in service are at an elevated temperature
When adding a PFU be careful not to touch other PFUs being in
service. They may be at an elevated temperature.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-32
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Warnings for taking the power supply into
operation
Safety
CAUTION
high
−48 V DC. The permissible tolerance range is −40.5 V to −57 V
DC.
before connecting the voltage (about –54 V for battery backed
DC distribution network). Ensure that fuses and circuit breakers
will be replaced with the same type and rating of fuse if required.
Never connect the AnyMedia ® Access System to −60 V DC.
CAUTION
Risk of injury if not all the −48 V DC power feeders
are disconnected
The AnyMedia ® Access System may be equipped with more than one
−48 V DC input power feeders. Switching off or disconnecting some
of the power feeders will not de-energize all shelves in the
Switch off all circuit breakers providing connection to DC power
distribution network when removing power from the AnyMedia ®
Access System.
CAUTION
ESD hazard
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
1-33
operation
Safety
CAUTION
Risk of fire in the event of a short circuit
A short circuit can cause a fire in the AnyMedia ® Access System.
Protect all supply lines with line circuit-breakers matched to the
load of the shelf equipment.
CAUTION
Destruction of packs in the event of a short circuit
A short circuit in the AnyMedia ® Access System can cause
destruction of electronic components and malfunctioning.
You must therefore not use objects such as a screwdriver in the
pack area. Never push objects of any kind into this product
through slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or
cause a short circuit.
CAUTION
Destruction of components by incorrect handling
The power should be turned off before inserting or removing a pack,
unless otherwise specified.
Before replacing a pack, check the identification code to ensure
that the proper pack is being used.
CAUTION
during transport on moving from outside to closed rooms; this can
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-34
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
operation
Safety
CAUTION
Damage to packs under extreme environmental conditions
Extreme environmental conditions can damage packs and cause
malfunctioning.
Ensure that the temperature limits shown in the figure below
according to ETS 300 019-1-3, climatic class 3.1E are complied
with during indoor operation in locations as telecommunication
centers. Icing, condensation and influence by animals or mould
growth is not allowed. Always keep the packs in the Lucent
original packaging until the packs have to be installed.
Air temperature [oC]
+60
+50
+40
29
+30
+20
Permissible range
Absolute
humidity [g/m3]
+10
0
-10
1.0
-20
-30
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
Relative
humidity [%]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
1-35
Safety
Warnings
for transport and storage
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unsecured rack
An unpacked rack, including doors, without shelves weighs up to 50
kg and can cause considerable injuries if it is knocked over or
dropped. This can also cause serious damage to the rack and the
shelves.
Use a sturdy vehicle for transport and secure the rack against
dropping. At least two persons are required for lifting the rack.
Do not store packaged rack on top of one another.
CAUTION
ESD hazard
Packs must therefore always be kept in antistatic covers. Use the
original packaging if possible. Always observe the ESD
instructions (see “Electrostatic discharge considerations” (1-10)).
CAUTION
Adverse effect on operation due to incorrect packaging
Dampness and soiling can cause corrosion or tracking paths. This can
cause malfunctioning of the system components. Shocks can cause
damage.
Protect the system components against dampness, soiling and
shocks. Use the original packaging if possible.
CAUTION
during transport on moving from outside to closed rooms; this can
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-36
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Safety
CAUTION
Damage to the system or to the packs under extreme
environmental conditions during transport
malfunctioning.
Ensure that the limits shown in the figure below according to
ETS 300 019-1-2, climatic class 2.3 are complied with during
transport. Always keep the system or the packs in the Lucent
original packaging until the system or the packs have to be
installed.
+70
+60
+50
60
+40
+30
+20
Absolute
humidity [g/m3]
Permissible range
+10
0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0.1
-50
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
Relative
humidity [%]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
1-37
Safety
CAUTION
Damage to the system or to the packs under extreme
environmental conditions during storage
malfunctioning.
Ensure that the limits shown in the figure below according to
ETS 300 019-1-3, climatic class 1.2 are complied with during
storage. Always keep the system or the packs in the Lucent
original packaging until the system or the packs have to be
installed.
+70
+60
+50
+40
29
+30
+20
Absolute
humidity [g/m3]
Permissible range
+10
0
-10
-20
0.5
-30
-40
-50
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
Relative
humidity [%]
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-38
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
2
General information
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
The DC-powered rack for the AnyMedia® Access System is available
in two basic variants, that depend on the shelf types to be equipped.
This chapter provides an overview of the DC-powered racks including
the following items:
•
Basic information on these racks, including the orderable rack
types, the standard rack delivery and optional kits for special
purposes
•
A short description of the AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf and the
AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf and mandatory equipment.
Also discussed is the basic concept realization of the following
functions:
•
Grounding
•
Powering
•
Ringing
•
Clock distribution.
Then, some technical data are provided that may be relevant for
installation, and finally a list of tools and measuring instruments is
shown that may be required during installation..
Contents
2-3
ETSI V5 Shelf
2-8
LAG 1900 Shelf
2-9
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
2-1
Overview
General information
2-10
Technical data
2-12
2-13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-2
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
General information
Standard
rack deliveries and optional kits
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Table 2-1
Variants of DC-powered racks
Rack type
J1C293B-1
J1C301B-1
Depending on the shelf types to be mounted, the DC-powered racks
are available in the following variants:
Description
Used for mounting of up
to three...
L1
ETSI rack without door, side and rear
panels and without RFUs
AnyMedia® ETSI V5
Shelves
L2
ETSI rack with door, side and rear
panels, but without RFUs
L3
panels, and with 3 RFUs
L1
ETSI rack without door, side and rear
panels
L2
panels
AnyMedia® LAG 1900
Shelves
These rack types are based on the same mechanical ETSI-based rack
constructionl. They are designed to accomodate top and bottom cable
access and include the internal cabling for three shelves.
Standard rack delivery for
J1C293B-1
The standard rack delivery for the rack J1C293B-1 includes the
following components:
•
ETSI rack (2200 mm high)
•
Subrack for fuse panel and connection panel (RFCP) with
–
Fan filter and clock distribution unit (FFCU)
–
–
Rack fuse panel (RFP)
–
T-rail for mounting RFUs
•
Internal cabling, including the cabling for 3 AnyMedia® ETSI V5
Shelves
•
Kit for standard floor anchoring
•
Kit for side and rear panels’ locking.
J1C293B-1 L3 includes three RFUs and the internal ringing cabling
to the shelves.
Note that shelves, baffles and fans are not included in the standard
delivery.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
2-3
Rack J1C293B-1 L1 (front
view)
General information
The following figure shows the front view of the rack, the sequence
of shelf mounting (from bottom to top) in the rack and roughly the
mounting positions of baffles, shelves and fans.
Figure 2-1 Rack layout J1C293B-1 L1
RFP
Rack connection
panel for alarming
RFCP
FFCU
T-rail for RFUs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-4
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
General information
Legend:
FFC
Fan filter and clock distribution
RCP
Rack connection panel
RFP
Rack fuse panel
RFU
Ringing filter unit
Shelves, baffles and fans are not included in the standard delivery.
Standard rack delivery for
J1C301B-1
The standard rack delivery for the rack J1C301B-1 includes the
following components:
•
ETSI rack (2200 mm high)
•
Rack connection panel RCP with
–
One Passive Clock Distribution panel (PCD520)
–
Alarm connection panel (ACP520)
–
Power termination blocks
•
Internal cabling, including the cabling for 3 AnyMedia® LAG
1900 Shelves
•
Kit for standard floor anchoring
•
Kit for side and rear panels’ locking.
Note that shelves, baffles and fans are not included in the standard
delivery.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
2-5
Rack layout J1C301B-1
General information
The following figure shows the rack layout and the shelf numbering
within the rack.
Figure 2-2 Rack layout J1C301B-1
Power/Ringing
termination blocks
Circuit breaker blocks
PCD
RCP
ACP
Fan 3
Shelf 3
Baffle 3
Fan 2
Shelf 2
Baffle 2
Fan 1
Shelf 1
Baffle 1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-6
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Optional kits
General information
Additionally the following kits are available, in order to meet special
purposes. If not specified otherwise, they may be used for all of the
described rack types.
Table 2-2
Optional kits
Additional
orderable items
Applicable for
Ordering
Identification
Number
Kit, Earthquake
Anchor
all rack types
ED7C877-70 G7
Kit, Wall Fastening
ED7C877-70 G8
Kit, Ceiling
Fastening
ED7C877-70 G9
Kit, Cable Tray
Fastening
ED7C877-70 G10
Kit, Assembly Back
to Back
ED7C877-70 G11
Kit, Assembly Side
by Side
ED7C877-70 G12
Kit, Optical Cable
Duct
ED7C877-70 G13
Kit, Door Alarm
Feature
J1C293B-1
J1C293B-1 L20
Kit for external
ringing
J1C301B-1
849015888
Kit for office clock
(duplex)
849015896
Kit for station clock
(simplex)
849015904
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
2-7
General information
ETSI
V5 Shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ETSI V5 Shelf schematic
Figure 2-3 Schematic of an AnyMedia ® ETSI V5 Shelf
FAULT
AP-2
AP-3
AP-4
SC
AP-5
AP-6
K1
RING1
RING0
GPC
E1 UP
ALARM OUT
AP-7
ALARM IN
RTU
J3
H2
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
16
AP-8
Application pack
AFM or NB-AP
F2
AFM or application pack
D2
Application pack
Application pack
AP-1
E1 UP
Application pack
ALTPWR
A2
1 01 02 03 04 05 06
CIU
K
LAN
Application pack
Application pack
J1
E1 DOWN
Application pack
J
H1
E1 DOWN
CIU
COM-1 COM-2
H
G1
Application pack
COMDAC
2
G
F1
TAP
COMDAC
1
F
E1
Application pack
IO_E1
4
E
D1
- 48B
IO_E1
3
D
C1
- 48A
IO_E1
2
C
B1
OAP
IO_E1
1
J1
F3T315 mA
B
A1
J2
Application pack
IO_E1P
1
F2
A
PFU
IO_HDLC
2
Application pack
IO_HDLC
1
F1
PFU
Application pack
Fan unit and air outlet
HDLC-1 HDLC-2 IO_E1P IO_E1-1 IO_E1-2IO_E1-3IO_E1-4
AP-9 AP-10 AP-11 AP-12 AP-13 AP-14 AP-15 AP-16
Cable trough and air inlet (baffle)
Mandatory equipment per
shelf
In certain cases AnyMedia ® ETSI V5 Shelves mandatorily require
some additional equipment per shelf:
•
The use of a fan unit per shelf is always required with the
exception of shelves that are equipped with some POTS packs
only with an expected traffic rate of less than 0.25 Erlang.
•
The Power Filter Unit (PFU501) is mandatory.
•
In the case that resistibility test according ITU-T K.20 has to be
applied, the use of a PFU in the shelf and a RFU per shelf in the
RFCP of the rack is mandatory.
•
one baffle per shelf.
For details refer to the Ordering Guide (363-211-144).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-8
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
General information
LAG
1900 Shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LAG 1900 Shelf schematic
For the installation of the LAG 1900 Shelf in the DC-powered rack,
the ETSI-based version of the shelf (J1C301AB-1 L2) is required.
Figure 2-4 Schematic of an AnyMedia ® LAG 1900 Shelf
Mandatory equipment per
shelf
AnyMedia ® LAG 1900 Shelves mandatorily require some additional
equipment :
•
Two power filter units (PFU503) in the shelf
•
One fan per shelf
•
One baffle per shelf.
For details refer to the Ordering Guide (363-211-144).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
2-9
General information
Functions
and concepts
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Grounding
This section discusses some functions and concepts which may impact
the installation activities. These are:
•
Grounding
•
Powering
•
Ringing
•
Clock distribution.
Actually the AnyMedia® Access System is designed to work in
mesh-BN environments according to ETS 300 253. The rack metal
work must always be connected to the bonding ring conductor/green
wire as described in Chapter 3, “Mechanical installation”.
But, if an adaptation to mesh-IBN environment is required, the rack
J1C301B-1 can easily be modified as described in “Grounding meshed BN - meshed IBN” (4-16). The rack J1C293B-1 cannot be
modified.
Powering
Centralized powering is used for the shelves in the DC-powered racks.
For centralized powering an external - 48 V source is connected to the
two feeders of the AnyMedia® Access System. The external - 48 V
source supplies the shelves, and the fan units.
For centralized powering Power Filter Units (PFUs) are mandatory.
•
In the AnyMedia® ETSI V5 Shelf one Power Filter Unit
(PFU501) is required in the upper row.
•
In the AnyMedia® LAG 1900 Shelf two PFUs (PFU503) must be
equipped in the upper row.
The - 48 V voltage is primary fused by the AnyMedia® Access
System with tip-free circuit breakers
•
with a nominal value of 25 A for the ETSI V5 Shelf
•
with a nominal value of 30 A for the LAG 1900 Shelf
Only one power input of the shelf is connected to one circuit breaker.
Ringing (ETSI V5 Shelf)
For the ETSI V5 Shelf, the ringing voltage (if required) always comes
from an external ringing source (centralized ringing). The use of
Ringing Filter Units (RFU100) is recommended.
If external ringing voltage is required in the shelves, use rack type
J1C293B-L3 which includes 3 RFUs and the internal cables from the
RFUs to the shelves. The RFUs are mounted at the Subrack for Fuse
Panel and Connection Panel (RFCP) on a T-rail.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-10
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Ringing (LAG 1900 Shelf)
General information
For the LAG 1900 Shelf external (centralized) or local ringing can be
used.
For centralized ringing supply the ringing voltage comes from an
external ringing source. If the length of the external unshielded
ringing cable exceeds three meters (shielded 10 m) a ringing filter unit
(RFU503) has to be installed in the LAG 1900 Shelf.
If centralized ringing will be used, the optional kit for external ringing
is required.
For local ringing supply two ringing generator units (RGUs) of the
same type have to be equipped in the upper row of the LAG 1900
Shelf. The RGUs may be battery-backed (RGU500) or earth-backed
(RGU510).
Clock distribution (ETSI V5
Shelf)
Simplex station clock can be connected to the AnyMedia® Access
Systems in the rack. The clock can be terminated via a balanced input
(120 Ω) or via an unbalanced coax input (75 Ω). In case of balanced
input (120 Ω) the clock will be connected to a Fan Filter and Clock
distribution Unit (FFCU) and distributed to the ETSI V5 Shelves. If
unbalanced coax input (75 Ω) will be used instead, the clock is
directly fed to the clock connector in the connector field of the
shelves.
Clock distribution (LAG
1900 Shelf)
Duplex redundant external office clock sources or simplex station
clock can be fed to the rack and distributed to the LAG 1900 Shelves.
The clock can be terminated via a balanced input (120 Ω) or via an
unbalanced coax input (75 Ω).
If simplex station clock will be used, the optional kit for station clock
is required. For duplex office clock, use the optional kit for office
clock (which also includes a second PCD520) instead.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
2-11
General information
Technical
data
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Rack weight and
dimensions
Table 2-3
The following technical data apply to the DC-powered rack for ETSI
V5 and LAG 1900 Shelves:
Technical data
Specification (valid for both rack types)
Dimensions
(HxWxD)
Weight
Minimum (without any shelf)
Maximum (with three equipped
shelves)
Power supply
Range
Nominal value
Operating temperature
Range
Recommendation
Heat dissipation
Values
2200 mm x 600 mm x 300 mm
Min 50 kg
Max. 250 kg
-40.5 V to -57 V DC
-48 V DC
-5°C to +45°C
+25°C
500 W to 3600 W
(configuration dependent)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-12
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
General information
Tools
and measuring/testing instruments
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Tools
Table 2-4
The tools and testing instruments required for the installation and to
perform some measurements and tests on the AnyMedia ® Access
System depend on the particular installation. The following table
provides an overview of the tools that may be required.
Use for
Tools
Remarks
Basic
ESD wrist strap
Wire cutters (up to 25 mm2) and strippers, diagonal cutting
pliers, coated-wire stripping tweezer, multi-purpose knife,
extension cable 5 m
Torque wrench (0-70 inch-lbs; 7 Nm)
Hand tool kit: screwdrivers sets for standard slotted, Pozidrive
and Phillips, wrenches sets (open-end, hexagon pin/balend),
universal and pointed pliers, flat and round file with handle, nut
drivers, level (350 mm) and back square, roll tape/folding rule (2
m) etc.
Large tool kit: hammers, claw bar, etc.
8 inch/20 cm long flathead screwdrivers (slotted 4 mm and
Phillips No. 1)
Waterproof fine line marker
Floor drilling equipment: roto-hammer or percussion drill with
sintered carbide/stone drills, 18-mm masonry bits
Wire-wrap tools: gun, bits for 20, 22, 24, and 26 gauges and for
0.8, 0.6, 0.5 and 0.4 mm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
2-13
Table 2-4
General information
(continued)
Use for
Tools
Remarks
Diverse other
tools, (only if
required)
Lifting equipment: hoists, dolly trucks, straps, etc.
Crimp tool for various connectors of ID type (D-sub)
Modular plug termination tool (RJ45 connector)
Cable crimpers for 0.5 to 6 mm2 and for 6 to 50 mm2 (e.g. for
Molex connectors (No.: 11-01-197) and for the ground lugs (e.g.
T&B TBM55)) if required
Heat shrink gun
Soldering iron (about 20 W) or soldering station with
temperature control, solder tin and holder for soldering iron
7/16 open-end torque wrench with 20 in-lbs / 2 Nm capability
for coaxial cable
Wire replacement/insertion tool for Molex/Faston connector pins
Adhesive cleaning tape (for example 15475-68701 from
Hewlett-Packard), isopropyl alcohol without additives (may be
obtained locally), pipe cleaner with soft bristles (for coupling
cleaning) or
fiber cleaning kit (for example kit 15475A from
Hewlett-Packard)
Purified compressed air (for example spray can)
Only if
required and
depending on
fiber and
fiber test
equipment
used
Mounting tool for cage nuts (Id-No.: 01.130.985.9) from Knuerr
AG
Test equipment
(only if required)
DMM (Digital Multimeter) Tek DM254 or Fluke 8060A or
equivalent (the accuracy of an equivalent meter should be 0.05
percent on the DC scale), test leads with a diameter of 2 mm for
the probe tips are required
Only if
required
Fluke LAN test set or Sniffer LAN test set (SW) with Dolch
PAC 64 (additionally, only for LAN testing)
Optical microscope, enlargement >40 up to 200, (for example
type M10 from Wild or the FIND-R-SCOPE from FJW Optical
Systems, Inc.)
Fiber test
equipment (only if
required)
Fiber test equipment/optical power meter (1310/1550 nm); for
example: Reflectometer Wavetek MTS5100 (optical time domain
reflectometer),
Only if
required
Wavetek OLP-6 or OLP-15B (optical power meter for fiber
receiver);
Wavetek OLS-6 or OLS-15 (optical light source for fiber
transmission)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-14
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
3
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
The purpose of this chapter is to provide the information needed to
install all mechanical parts of an AnyMedia ® Access System in a
DC-powered rack and show the different mounting options. The list of
required tools can be found at “Tools and measuring/testing
instruments” (2-13).
Contents
3-2
3-3
3-5
3-8
Wall mounting
3-11
Ceiling mounting
3-14
3-17
3-21
3-25
Grounding
3-27
Shelf installation
3-30
Mounting the ETSI V5 Shelves into the rack
3-30
Mounting the LAG 1900 Shelves into the rack
3-33
Connecting the internal cables to the shelves
3-36
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
3-1
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Use the following procedures for standard floor mounting, or for
special mounting, e.g. for earthquake zones or for wall mounting,
ceiling mounting or side-by-side or back to back mounting and for
grounding (applicable for both rack types).
Contents
3-3
3-5
3-8
Wall mounting
3-11
Ceiling mounting
3-14
3-17
3-21
3-25
Grounding
3-27
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-2
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
How
to remove rack door and side panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Remove a rack door
The following procedures may require the removal of the rack door or
a side panel. The next lines describe how to perform these procedures.
Removing a rack door does not require any tools.
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Open the door.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Remove the grounding lug on the bottom of the rack door.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
In the top left of the rack a hook with a spring is visible.
Hold the door tight with one hand when pulling down the hook.
Figure 3-1 Rack door
............................................................................................................................................................
4
Carry the door to a save place where it does not disturb the
installation actions.
E
ND OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
3-3
Remove a side panel
Removing the side panels requires a 3 mm socket wrench.
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Loosen the 6 hexagon sockets.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Firstly remove the hexagon sockets in the bottom row, than the screws
in the middle row and finally remove the hexagon sockets at the top
of the side panel.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Carry the side panel to a save place where it does not disturb the
installation actions.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-4
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Standard
floor mounting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Floor space preparation
Schematics
Use this procedure for standard floor mounting with the standard kit
for floor anchoring that is shipped with the rack.
Installation work for indoor applications can begin before the arrival
of the racks. Check the equipment room according to the drawing and
general recommendations. Check the room for dust before the
equipment arrives. Assure a clean installation area (if necessary in
consultation with the customer).
The following figure shows the plate layout of the ETSI-based rack.
300
191
473,8 - for standard
572,2 - for earthquake zone 4
66,25
All dimensions are in millimeters
10
12
Left panel
Rear panel
Right panel
42,75
Figure 3-2 Bottom plate layout (Standard)
Door
600
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
3-5
Figure 3-3 Floor mounting
adjustable feet
anchors
Figure 3-4 Drilling jig
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-6
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Mounting
Complete the following steps to mount an ETSI-based rack on
the floor:
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Drill the four necessary holes (10 mm) in the floor by using the
drilling jig.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Remove grounding lug from the door.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Remove the rack door as described in “How to remove rack door and
side panel” (3-3).
It´s recommended to keep the door unmounted until the cabling has
been completed.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
Put the rack frame in place.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Put the anchor through the anchor hole.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Balance the rack frame in an upright position using the adjustable
feet.
............................................................................................................................................................
7
Tighten the screws in the anchor until the plate washer is flat against
the rack frame.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
3-7
Floor
mounting for earthquake group 4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Use this procedure for earthquake zone group 4 floor mounting with
the earthquake anchor kit for floor anchoring as listed in “Optional
kits ” (2-7). This kit is not included in the standard rack delivery. It
must be ordered separately.
Schematics
The following figure shows the plate layout of the ETSI-based rack.
300
191
473,8 - for standard
572,2 - for earthquake zone 4
66,25
All dimensions are in millimeters
10
12
Left panel
Rear panel
Right panel
42,75
Figure 3-5 Bottom plate layout (earthquake group 4)
Door
600
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-8
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Figure 3-6 Floor mounting (earthquake group 4)
adjustable feet
with anchor
Figure 3-7 Drilling jig (earthquake group 4)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
3-9
Mounting
Important! For earthquake group 4 installation a special
mounting kit as listed in “Optional kits ” (2-7) is required. It
must be ordered separately.
the floor:
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Drill the four necessary holes (12 mm) in the floor by using the
drilling jig.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Remove the rack door and side panels as described in “How to
remove rack door and side panel” (3-3).
been completed.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Put the anchors through the adjustable feet.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
feet.
............................................................................................................................................................
7
Tighten the screws in until the plate washer is flat against the rack
frame.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-10
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Wall
mounting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Schematics
Use this procedure for wall mounting with the kit for wall fastening
as listed “Optional kits ” (2-7). This kit is not included in the
standard rack delivery. It must be ordered separately.
The following figure shows the mounting layout of the ETSI-based
rack.
Figure 3-8 Mounting points layout (wall mounting)
17 cm
39 cm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
3-11
Wall mounting
Figure 3-9 Wall mounting
angles
mounting bolt
adjustable feet
Mounting
Important! For wall installation a special mounting kit as listed
in “Optional kits ” (2-7) is required. It must be ordered
separately.
the wall:
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Fix the angles on the top of the shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-12
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Wall mounting
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Drill the two necessary holes (8 mm) in the wall.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Push the anchors in the holes.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
............................................................................................................................................................
5
been completed.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
............................................................................................................................................................
7
feet.
............................................................................................................................................................
8
Screw the mounting bolts in the anchor until the plate washer is flat
on the wall.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
3-13
Ceiling
mounting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Schematics
Use this procedure for ceiling mounting with the kit for ceiling
fastening as listed in “Optional kits ” (2-7). This kit is not included in
the standard rack delivery. It must be ordered separately.
rack.
Figure 3-10 Mounting points layout (ceiling mounting)
attachment screws
18,5 - 25 cm
39 cm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-14
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Ceiling mounting
Figure 3-11 Ceiling mounting
angles
mounting bolt
Mounting
Important! For ceiling installation a special mounting kit as
listed in “Optional kits ” (2-7) is required. It must be ordered
separately.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
3-15
Ceiling mounting
the ceiling:
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Fix the angles on the top of the shelf. Leave the attachment screws
loose.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Drill the two necessary holes (8 mm) in the ceiling.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Push the anchors in the holes.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
............................................................................................................................................................
5
been completed.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
............................................................................................................................................................
7
feet.
............................................................................................................................................................
8
Screw the mounting bolts in the anchor until the plate washer is flat
on the ceiling.
............................................................................................................................................................
9
Tighten the attachment screws.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-16
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Mounting
racks side-by-side
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Assumption
The assembly side by side kit as listed in “Optional kits ” (2-7) is
used to mount rack frames together side-by-side. This kit is not
included in the standard rack delivery. It must be ordered separately.
The side panels have to be removed first.
If racks are mounted side-by-side it is not necessarily required to
mount them on the floor additionally. But if they are intended to be
mounted in both ways, it is assumed that the holes for the floor
mounting are drilled before mounting the racks side-by-side.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
3-17
Layout line-up
rack.
Figure 3-12 Rack Side-by-Side (1 of 2)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-18
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Figure 3-12 Rack Side-by-Side (2 of 2)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
3-19
Mounting
Important! For side-by-side installation a special mounting kit as
listed in “Optional kits ” (2-7) is required. It must be ordered
separately.
Complete the following steps to line-up ETSI-based racks:
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Remove grounding lugs from the door and side panels.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Remove the side panels on the rack sides (if applicable) that will be
connected to each other and remove the rack door as described in
“How to remove rack door and side panel” (3-3).
been completed.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
............................................................................................................................................................
4
feet.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Connect the two racks at the top and bottom via angles as shown in
the figure above in detail B. Do not fix it tightly yet.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Fasten the 6 angles as shown in the figure above in detail A.
............................................................................................................................................................
7
When all parts are assembled screw together tightly.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-20
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Mounting
racks back-to-back
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
The assembly back to back kit as listed in “Optional kits ” (2-7) is
used to mount rack frames together back to back. This kit is not
included in the standard rack delivery. It must be ordered separately.
The side panels have to be removed first.
Note: Back-to-back configuration is possible only with back panels
(rear-covers) installed for both racks.
Assumption
If racks are mounted back-to-back it is not necessarily required to
mount them on the floor additionally. But if they are intended to be
mounted in both ways, it is assumed that the holes for the floor
mounting are drilled before mounting the racks back-to-back.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
3-21
Layout back-to-back
rack.
Figure 3-13 Rack Back-to-Back (1 of 2)
bracket
hexagon bolt
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-22
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Figure 3-13 Rack Back-to-Back (2 of 2)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
3-23
Mounting
Important! For back-to-back installation a special mounting kit
as listed in “Optional kits ” (2-7) is required. It must be ordered
separately.
Back-to-back configuration is possible only with back panels
installed for both racks.
Complete the following steps to mount ETSI-based racks
back-to-back:
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Remove grounding lugs from side panels and doors.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Remove the side panels and rack doors as described in “How to
remove rack door and side panel” (3-3).
............................................................................................................................................................
3
............................................................................................................................................................
4
feet.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Loosen the hexagon bolts which carry the side panels.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Fasten the bracket of the mounting kit with the loosen hexagon bolt as
shown in the figure above in detail A.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-24
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Optical
cable duct mounting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Use this procedure for mounting the optical cabel duct. The usage of
an optical cable duct is recommended always when fiber cables have
to be installed in the rack.
The optical cable duct is not included in the standard rack delivery. It
must be ordered separately. The right side panel has to be removed
first.
Schematics
The cabel duct should be mounted in case of using optical fibers.
Figure 3-14 Optical cable duct
Optical cable duct
Mounting procedure
Important! The optical cable duct as listed in “Optional kits ”
(2-7) must be ordered separately.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
3-25
Complete the following steps for mounting the cable duct:
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Remove grounding lug of the right side panel.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Remove the right side panel as described in “How to remove rack
door and side panel” (3-3).
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Fix the cable duct with cable ties.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-26
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Grounding
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Use this procedure for grounding the rack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
3-27
Grounding
Schematic
The rack metalwork must be connected via the grounding lug to the
bonding ring conductor. There are several possible grounding points
all over the rack.
Figure 3-15 Grounding points
from/to office ground
Grounding procedure
Important! All racks must be connected with a
(customer-provided) grounding wire via the grounding lugs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-28
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Grounding
attached to the rack to the bonding ring conductor. Terminate or
crimp this rack ground wire to the ground wire (or ground ring,
bonding wire) in the building. In all cases comply with local
grounding practices.
Requirements for the grounding cable:
•
≥ 25 mm2/≤ 2 AWG in a meshed BN environment, or > 6
mm2/< 8 AWG in a mesh IBN environment (not applicable
for J1C293B-1)
•
Stranded wire
•
Bare copper or transparent isolation or green/yellow
isolation
•
as short as possible
•
Comply with local requirements.
Complete the following steps for grounding an ETSI-based rack:
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Depending on the grounding method use the best bonding point on the
rack.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Turn the screw until the grounding cable is tightened.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
3-29
Shelf installation
Mounting
the ETSI V5 Shelves into the rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This section describes the mounting of up to three AnyMedia ® ETSI
V5 Shelves including fans and baffles into a rack. Independent of
whether you install one, two, or three shelves, always start with shelf
1 which has to be located in the lowest position.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-30
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Shelf installation
Mounting the ETSI V5 Shelves into the
rack
Schematic
Figure 3-16 Shelf mounting (ETSI V5)
RFP
Rack connection
panel for alarming
RFCP
FFCU
T-rail for RFUs
73
71
62
54
52
50
49
47
38
30
28
26
25
23
14
6
4
2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
3-31
Shelf installation
Mounting the ETSI V5 Shelves into the
rack
Legend:
Note that the numbering of the holes starts from the bottom of the rack.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to mount the shelves:
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Unpack the shelves and check the installation materials.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Mount the cage nuts in the front rack frame using the numbering as
depicted in the figure above.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Mount the heat baffles into the rack frame using the numbering as
............................................................................................................................................................
4
In order to avoid bending shelf contacts, etc. mount the shelves
always with a second person.
Raise the shelf to the desired position and insert the screws in the
respective lower holes to secure the shelf.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Screw the remaining screws in and tighten all.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Mount the fans on the front rack frame using the numbering as
............................................................................................................................................................
7
Insert the PFU in the most right slot in the upper row of each shelf.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-32
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Shelf installation
Mounting
the LAG 1900 Shelves into the rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This section describes the mounting of the AnyMedia ® LAG 1900
Shelves, which include the fans, into a rack. Independent of whether
you install one, two, or three shelves, always start with shelf 1 which
has to be located in the lowest position.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
3-33
Shelf installation
Mounting the LAG 1900 Shelves into the
rack
Schematic
Figure 3-17 Shelf mounting (LAG 1900)
Power/Ringing
termination blocks
PCD
RCP
ACP
Fan 3
13
22
Shelf 3
30
Baffle 3
33
Fan 2
34
38
47
Shelf 2
55
Baffle 2
58
Fan 1
59
63
Shelf 1
72
80
Baffle 1
83
84
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-34
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Shelf installation
Mounting the LAG 1900 Shelves into the
rack
Legend:
Note that the numbering of the holes starts from top of the rack.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to mount the shelves:
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Unpack the shelves and check the installation materials.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Mount the cage nuts in the front rack frame using the numbering as
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Mount the heat baffles into the rack frame using the numbering as
............................................................................................................................................................
4
In order to avoid bending shelf contacts, etc. mount the shelves
always with a second person.
Raise the shelf to the desired position and insert the screws in the
respective lower holes to secure the shelf.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Screw the remaining screws in and tighten all.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Insert the two PFUs in the most right slots in the upper row of each
shelf.
............................................................................................................................................................
7
If external ringing is used and an RFU is required, insert an RFU in
the slot to the left of the PFU.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
3-35
Shelf installation
Connecting
the internal cables to the shelves
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Internal cables are used to provide connection between the Rack
Connection Panel (RCP) or the Subrack for Fuse and Connection
Panel (RFCP) in the upper part of the rack and the individual shelves
/fans for:
•
Powering
•
External ringing
•
External clock distribution
•
Alarms
•
Fans.
All internal cables (except the ringing and clock distribution cables for
rack type J1C301B-1) are factory assembled. At delivery they are
connected to the correct connectors at the rack connection panel (or
the rack fuse connection panel), routed through the rack and attached
to the rack near the positions where they have to be connected later.
The cables are labeled with
•
The name of the destination connector in the shelf (e.g. J3)
•
The cable specification (e.g. ED7C818-35 GR21A)
•
The number of the destination shelf (e.g. shelf 3).
A cover plate closes the front of the connector field on the LAG 1900
Shelves. It has to be removed in order to get access to the connectors
below.
Important! Note that the shelf numbering starts with shelf 1 at
the bottom of the rack and ends up with shelf 3 in the highest
position.
Procedure
1
............................................................................................................................................................
For LAG 1900 Shelves remove the two screws from the cover plate
that closes the front of the connector field and then remove the cover
plate.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Locate all free cable ends in the rack and connect them to the correct
destination connector in the correct shelf as labeled on the cable.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-36
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4
Parts descriptions of connector
fields connectors and internal
cables
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
The purpose of this chapter is to describe parts that are relevant for
the installation of the rack, e.g. all connector fields and connectors in
the rack and the internal cabling.
The external cables and the requirements for those cables which have
to be manufactured are given during the applicable cabling procedures
in Chapter 5, “Cabling procedures”.
Contents
Subrack for fuse and connection panel (RFCP) Applicable for J1C293B-1
4-3
Power connections
4-5
Ringing connections
4-7
4-8
4-10
Rack connection panel (RCP) - Applicable for
J1C301B-1
4-14
4-15
Ringing connections
4-18
4-20
4-24
4-27
4-30
4-32
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-1
Overview
internal cables
TAP connector (C1)
4-41
LAN connector (J2)
4-44
RTU connector (H2)
4-45
4-47
4-50
4-52
4-53
4-56
4-58
4-62
4-66
4-68
4-70
4-73
4-76
4-78
4-79
CIU pack
4-80
4-83
AFME1 pack
4-88
AFMO pack
4-94
4-99
4-103
4-103
4-108
4-108
4-110
4-112
4-115
Internal cabling
4-130
4-130
Overview
4-130
4-130
4-131
4-131
4-133
4-133
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-2
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
Subrack for fuse and connection panel (RFCP) - Applicable for
J1C293B-1
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This section provides information about the cabling of the Subrack for
Fuse and Connection Panel (RFCP) which is mounted in rack type
J1C293B-1, applicable for AnyMedia ® ETSI V5 Shelves.
The following parts are described below in more detail:
Front view
•
•
•
Rack Fuse Panel (RFP)
The figure below shows the front view of the Subrack for Fuse and
Connection Panel (RFCP).
Figure 4-1 Subrack for Fuse and Connection Panel
FFCU
for alarming
RFP
T-Rail for RFU
Contents
Power connections
4-5
Ringing connections
4-7
4-8
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-3
Subrack for fuse and connection panel
(RFCP) - Applicable for J1C293B-1
Overview
internal cables
4-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-4
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
Power
connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The AnyMedia ® Access System in the DC-powered rack supports
redundant power supply. This can be realized by connecting two
external power sources (–48V) to the power termination blocks of the
RFCP.
The voltages must lie within the following range: –40.5 VDC ... –57
VDC.
Power cable connections
The figure below shows the external power connections which must
be done for establishing a redundant power supply and the already
pre-installed internal power cables.
Figure 4-2 Power cabling
from central office
(feeder A)
from central office
(feeder B)
Pre-installed
internal cables
to V5 Shelf 1
(connector A1)
to V5 Shelf 1
(connector B1)
to V5 Shelf 2
(connector A1)
to V5 Shelf 3
(connector A1)
to V5 Shelf 2
(connector B1)
to V5 Shelf 3
(connector B1)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-5
Power connections
Routing of the power
cables
internal cables
The power cables must be routed as shown in the figure below.
Figure 4-3 Routing of the power cables
Feed A
-
+
Feed B
+
-
Pre-installed
internal cables
Power cable information
Information related to the internally pre-installed power cables is
given in section “Power connectors (A1/B1)” (4-30).
Requirements for the external power cables are provided in “Installing
-48 V power feeder cables” (5-116).
Grounding
The AnyMedia ® Access System in the DC-powered rack for ETSI V5
Shelves is designed to work in meshed-BN environments according to
ETS 300 253.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-6
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
Ringing
connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Two options of the DC-powered rack for ETSI V5 Shelves are
orderable:
•
without Ringing Filter Units (RFUs): J1C293B-1
•
equipped with three RFUs: J1C293B-1, L3.
For the AnyMedia ® ETSI V5 Shelves the ringing voltage always
comes from an external ringing source (centralized ringing). The
Ringing Filter Units (RFUs) have to be used if unshielded power
cable length exceeds 3 m or if the shielded power cable length
exceeds 10 m.
If no narrowband services are required, no ringing connections are
necessary.
Cable connections
The figure below shows rack type J1C293B-1, L3 with the already
pre-installed grounding wires as well as the internal ringing cables to
the V5 Shelves. The external ringing connections to the customeŕs
ringing source must be done during installation.
Figure 4-4 Ringing distribution
Grounding wires
Fuse T1A
J11
Input
RFU1
J21
Output
Fuse T1A
J11
Input
RFU2
J21
Output
Fuse T1A
J11
Input
RFU3
J21
Output
RNG
Connected to
V5 Shelf 1, J1
Connected to
V5 Shelf 2, J1
Cable information
Connected to
V5 Shelf 3, J1
Terminals for customer's
ringing voltage
Information related to the internally pre-installed ringing cables is
given in section “Ringing connector (J1)” (4-52).
Requirements for the external ringing cables are provided in
“Installing ringing cables - J1C293B-1” (5-120).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-7
internal cables
Fan
Filter and Clock Distribution Unit (FFCU)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
External clock source can be connected to the Fan Filter and Clock
Distribution Unit (FFCU) and distributed to the ETSI V5 Shelves. The
clock is terminated via a termination connector for clock distribution
(balanced, 120 Ω).
Optionally an external clock terminated with 75 Ω may be used. In
this case the FFCU is bypassed and the clock is connected directly to
connector D2 on the shelf connection panel.
The figure below shows the combined Fan Filter and Clock
Distribution Unit (FFCU).
Figure 4-5 Fan Filter and Clock Distribution Unit (FFCU)
-48V inputs for the FFCU
(from circuit breakers F4 and
F10 on the rack connection
panel for alarming)
External clock (Input)
Clock to ETSI V5 Shelf 1, D2
-48V output to fan unit 3, J1
Termination connector
Fan Filter Field (FFF)
Connectors
Clock Distribution Field (CDF)
The FFCU is divided into two logical parts: the Clock Distribution
Field (CDF) and the Fan Filter Field (FFF).
The FFCU provides the following interfaces:
•
For clock distribution (via 9-pin male SUB-D connector on the
CDF)
–
Connector (1) for input of external clock, twisted pair
Supply clock signal from customers external clock source to
the rack.
–
Three connectors (2, 3, 4) for distributing clock signals to
the ETSI V5 Shelves 1 to 3.
–
Connector (5) for termination (dummy load).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-8
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Fan Filter and Clock Distribution Unit
(FFCU)
internal cables
Dummy load connector or clock cable to the next
•
Cable routing
For power distribution to the FFF:
–
Connector J4
Powering the FFCU.
–
Fan unit cable connectors J1 to J3
Powering each of the 3 fan units by a cable assembly
routing from the fan unit connectors J1 to the -48 OUT
connectors J1 to J3 of the FFF.
The cables are routed as shown in the figure below.
Figure 4-6 FFCU (cable routing)
To external clock source
Cable information
Information related to the internally pre-installed station clock cables
is given in section “Station clock connector (D2)” (4-50).
Requirements for the external station clock cables are provided in
“Installing clock cables - J1C293B-1” (5-87).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-9
internal cables
Rack
connection panel for alarming
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The rack connection panel for alarming provides 161 wire wrap pins
which are divided in seven sections (A to G). Always two sections
contain the alarms of one ETSI V5 Shelf.
Figure 4-7 Rack connection panel for alarming
Cable connections
The table below shows the different sections on the rack connection
panel for alarming and their connections.
Table 4-1
Pinout overview
Section
Description
Connected to
A
Alarm in (Shelf 1)
ETSI V5 Shelf 1
B
Alarm out (Shelf 1)
C
Alarm in (Shelf 2)
D
Alarm out (Shelf 2)
E
Alarm in (Shelf 3)
F
Alarm out (Shelf 3)
G
ETSI V5 Shelf 2
ETSI V5 Shelf 3
pins free
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-10
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Table 4-2
internal cables
Cable
RCP pin
Color
Signal
Connection
on Shelf 1,
Connector-Pin
Alarm input
A2
BL-W
alarm input 1
J3-1
ED7C818-35
GR12B
A3
W-BL
alarm input 2
J3-2
A4
O-W
alarm input 3
J3-3
A5
W-O
alarm input 4
J3-4
A6
G-W
alarm input 5
J3-5
A7
W-G
alarm input 6
J3-6
A8
BR-W
alarm input 7
J3-7
A9
W-BR
alarm input 8
J3-8
A10
S-W
-48RTN (GND, to A12)
J3-9
Alarm output
B2
BL-W
critical alarm 0 (common)
F2-1
ED7C818-35
GR7C
B3
W-BL
critical alarm 1 (break)
F2-2
B4
O-W
critical alarm 2 (make)
F2-3
B5
W-O
major alarm 0 (common)
F2-4
B6
G-W
major alarm 1 (break)
F2-5
B7
W-G
major alarm 2 (make)
F2-6
B8
BR-W
minor alarm 0 (common)
F2-7
B9
W-BR
minor alarm 1 (break)
F2-8
B10
S-W
minor alarm 2 (make)
F2-9
Fan 1 alarms
B13
W-G
fan alarm common (to B12)
Fan 1, J1-6
ED7C818-35
G21C
B14
W-BL
fan alarm inverted
Fan 1, J1-1
B15
W-O
fan alarm (to A7)
Fan 1, J1-2
A10
BK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-11
Table 4-3
internal cables
Cable
RCP pin
Color
Signal
Connection
on Shelf 2,
Connector-Pin
Alarm input
C2
BL-W
alarm input 1
J3-1
ED7C818-35
GR12A
C3
W-BL
alarm input 2
J3-2
C4
O-W
alarm input 3
J3-3
C5
W-O
alarm input 4
J3-4
C6
G-W
alarm input 5
J3-5
C7
W-G
alarm input 6
J3-6
C8
BR-W
alarm input 7
J3-7
C9
W-BR
alarm input 8
J3-8
C10
S-W
-48RTN (GND, to C12)
J3-9
Alarm output
D2
BL-W
F2-1
ED7C818-35
GR7B
D3
W-BL
F2-2
D4
O-W
F2-3
D5
W-O
F2-4
D6
G-W
F2-5
D7
W-G
F2-6
D8
BR-W
F2-7
D9
W-BR
F2-8
D10
S-W
F2-9
Fan 2 alarms
D13
W-G
fan alarm common (to D12)
Fan 2, J1-6
ED7C818-35
G21B
D14
W-BL
fan alarm inverted
Fan 2, J1-1
D15
W-O
fan alarm (to C7)
Fan 2, J1-2
C10
BK
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-12
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Table 4-4
internal cables
Cable
RCP pin
Color
Signal
Connection
on Shelf 3,
Connector-Pin
Alarm input
E2
BL-W
alarm input 1
J3-1
ED7C818-35
GR12
E3
W-BL
alarm input 2
J3-2
E4
O-W
alarm input 3
J3-3
E5
W-O
alarm input 4
J3-4
E6
G-W
alarm input 5
J3-5
E7
W-G
alarm input 6
J3-6
E8
BR-W
alarm input 7
J3-7
E9
W-BR
alarm input 8
J3-8
E10
S-W
-48RTN (GND, to E12)
J3-9
Alarm output
F2
BL-W
F2-1
ED7C818-35
GR7A
F3
W-BL
F2-2
F4
O-W
F2-3
F5
W-O
F2-4
F6
G-W
F2-5
F7
W-G
F2-6
F8
BR-W
F2-7
F9
W-BR
F2-8
F10
S-W
F2-9
Fan 3 alarms
F13
W-G
fan alarm common (to F12)
Fan 3, J1-6
ED7C818-35
G21A
F14
W-BL
fan alarm inverted
Fan 3, J1-1
F15
W-O
fan alarm (to F7)
Fan 3, J1-2
E10
BK
Cable information
Information related to the alarm cables is given in section “Alarm
connectors (F2/J3)” (4-47).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-13
internal cables
Rack connection panel (RCP) - Applicable for J1C301B-1
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This section provides information about the cabling of the Rack
Connection Panel (RCP) which is mounted in rack type J1C301B-1,
applicable for AnyMedia ® LAG 1900 Shelves.
The following parts are described below in more detail:
Front view
•
Power and ringing termination blocks
•
Passive Clock Distribution (PCD520) panel
•
Alarm Connection Panel (ACP520).
The figure below shows the front view of the RCP.
Figure 4-8 Rack Connection Panel
PCD520
PCD520
ACP520
Power/Ringing termination blocks
optional
(not equipped at delivery)
Contents
4-15
Ringing connections
4-18
4-20
4-24
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-14
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Rack connection panel (RCP) - Applicable
for J1C301B-1
internal cables
Power
and grounding connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The AnyMedia ® Access System in the DC-powered rack supports
redundant power supply. This can be realized by connecting two
external power sources (–48V) to the power termination blocks of the
RCP.
The voltages must lie within the following range: –40.5 VDC ...
–57 VDC.
Depending on the local specifications the AnyMedia ® Access System
in the DC-powered rack for LAG 1900 Shelves can be used for
Power cable connections
•
Meshed Bonding Network (meshed-BN). This is the default
configuration.
•
Meshed Isolated Bonding Network (meshed-IBN).
The figure below shows all power connections which must be done
for establishing a redundant power supply and the already
pre-installed internal power cables.
Figure 4-9 Power cabling
from central office
(feeder B)
from central office
(feeder A)
+
Pre-installed
internal
cables
+
to LAG shelf 1
(connector J111)
to LAG shelf 2
(connector J111)
to LAG shelf 3
(connector J111)
to LAG shelf 3
(connector J112)
to LAG shelf 2
(connector J112)
to LAG shelf 1
(connector J112)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-15
for J1C301B-1
Routing of the power
cables
internal cables
The power cables must be routed as shown in the figure below.
Figure 4-10 Routing of the power cables
Feed A
-
+
Pre-installed
internal cabling
Feed B
+
-
Grounding - meshed BN ->
meshed IBN
The AnyMedia ® Access System in the DC-powered rack for LAG
1900 Shelves is designed to work in meshed-BN or meshed-IBN
environments according to ETS 300 253.
During mechanical installation the rack must be grounded with the
office ground as described in “Grounding” (3-27). All the other parts
(RCP, shelves, ...) are grounded as a result of the physical mounting
(physical/electrical connection of device and rack frame).
At delivery the AnyMedia ® Access System in the DC-powered rack
for LAG 1900 Shelves is prepared for meshed BN environments. If a
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-16
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
for J1C301B-1
internal cables
meshed-IBN application is required, this can be achieved by removing
six M5 screws as shown in the figure below.
Figure 4-11 Achieving meshed-IBN configuration
These M5 screws must be removed
to achieve the meshed-IBN application
Power cable information
Information related to the internally used power cables is given in
sections “Power connectors (J111/J112)” (4-56). Requirements for the
external power cables and on the fuses are provided in “Installing -48
V power feeder cables” (5-116).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-17
for J1C301B-1
internal cables
Ringing
connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
For the LAG 1900 Shelves external or local ringing voltage can be
used. For local ringing the shelves have to be equipped with a
Ringing Generator Unit (RGU). If external ringing is used, no RGUs
are required within LAG 1900 Shelves. Instead, the optional ringing
kit is required and the connector termination blocks, jumpers, and
internal and external ringing cables have to be installed.
The external ringing voltage has to be connected to the first ringing
termination block and will be bridged from there to the other
termination blocks. Each termination block serves one LAG 1900
Shelf.
If the LAG 1900 Shelves have to be fed by different external ringing
sources, do not connect the jumpers and feed the ringing source to
each termination block separately.
Cable connections
The figure below shows the power/ringing termination blocks with the
ringing blocks installed and all ringing connections which must be
done.
Figure 4-12 Ringing distribution
ringing termination blocks
(left)
(middle) (right)
to/from external
ringing source
jumpers
Ring
jumpers
Tip
to LAG shelf 1
connector P113
to LAG shelf 3
connector P113
to LAG shelf 2
connector P113
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-18
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
for J1C301B-1
Ringing connections
Cable information
internal cables
Information related to the internal ringing cables is given in sections
“Ringing connector (J113)” (4-76) . Requirements for the external
ringing cables are provided in “Installing ringing cables - J1C301B-1”
(5-124).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-19
for J1C301B-1
internal cables
Passive
Clock Distribution panel (PCD520)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
At delivery the RCP is equipped with one Passive Clock Distribution
panel (PCD520). External simplex station clock can be connected to
this PCD and distributed to the LAG 1900 Shelves. The clock can be
terminated via a balanced input (120 Ω) or via an unbalanced coax
input (75 Ω). The kit for station clock (ordering no. 849015904) is
required for internal cabling.
Optionally the shelves may be fed with external duplex office clock.
In this case use the kit for office clock (ordering no. 849015896)
which also includes a second PCD and the internal clock cables.
Figure 4-13 Passive Clock Distribution panel (PCD520)
Connectors
The PCD520 provides the following interfaces:
•
1x clock IN, twisted pair (9-pin male SUB-D connector)
Used for connecting an external clock source via a twisted pair
cable. In that case the impedance selection switch must be set to
“BAL”.
•
1x clock IN, coax (BNC connector)
Used for connecting an external clock source via a coax cable. In
that case the impedance selection switch must be set to “UNB”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-20
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
for J1C301B-1
External timing reference
distribution
internal cables
•
4x clock OUT (9-pin male SUB-D connectors)
Used for distributing clock signals to the LAG 1900 Shelves.
•
1x clock termination (9-pin male SUB-D connector)
Must be connected to a clock termination module if all four OUT
connectors (OUT 1 ... OUT 4) are used. For details refer to
“Installing clock cables - J1C301B-1” (5-92).
The J109 connectors of the LAG 1900 Shelves are connected to a
PCD520 output connector each. The clock is fed to both COMDACs.
The active COMDAC selects one of the clock signals.
Figure 4-14 External timing reference distribution for station
clock
to LAG shelf 3
(connector J109)
to LAG shelf 2
(connector J109)
to LAG shelf 1
(connector J109)
Twisted pair
(BAL)
from external
clock source 1
(either Twisted pair
or Coax)
Coax (UNB)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-21
for J1C301B-1
internal cables
Figure 4-15 External timing reference distribution for duplex
office clock
to LAG shelf 3
(connector J109)
to LAG shelf 3
(connector J110)
to LAG shelf 2
(connector J109)
to LAG shelf 1
(connector J110)
to LAG shelf 1
(connector J109)
to LAG shelf 2
(connector J110)
from external
clock source 1
Twisted pair
(BAL)
Twisted pair
(BAL)
from external
clock source 2
(either Twisted pair or Coax)
Coax (UNB)
Coax (UNB)
The J109 connectors and in case of duplex office clock the J110
connectors of the LAG 1900 Shelves are connected to a PCD520
output connector each. The clock is fed to both COMDACs. The
active COMDAC selects one of the clock signals.
Cable routing
The clock cables must be routed as shown in the following figure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-22
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
for J1C301B-1
internal cables
Note that the figure shows the RCP with two PCDs equipped, not the
standard delivery.
Figure 4-16 Routing of the clock cables
to external clock source(s)
Internal
clock cables
Cable information
Information related to the clock cables is given in “Installing clock
cables - J1C301B-1” (5-92).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-23
for J1C301B-1
internal cables
Alarm
Connection Panel (ACP520)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The Alarm Connection Panel (ACP520) provides 96 wire wrap pins
which are divided in six sections (A to F). Always two sections
contain the alarms of one LAG 1900 Shelf.
Figure 4-17 Alarm Connection Panel (ACP520)
Cable connections
The table below shows the different ACP sections and their
connections.
Table 4-5
ACP pinout overview
Section
Description
Connected to
A
Alarm in (Shelf 1)
LAG Shelf 1 (connector J108)
B
Alarm out (Shelf 1)
C
Alarm in (Shelf 2)
D
Alarm out (Shelf 2)
E
Alarm in (Shelf 3)
F
Alarm out (Shelf 3)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-24
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
for J1C301B-1
internal cables
Figure 4-18 ACP cabling
to LAG shelf 2
(connector J108)
to LAG shelf 1
(connector J107)
to LAG shelf 2
(connector J107)
to LAG shelf 3
(connector J108)
to LAG shelf 1
(connector J108)
to LAG shelf 3
(connector J107)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-25
for J1C301B-1
Cable routing
internal cables
The alarm cables are routed as shown in the figure below.
Figure 4-19 Routing of the alarm cables
Cable fixing
Cable information
Information related to the alarm cables is given in section “Alarm
connectors (J107/J108)” (4-70) .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-26
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Connector field
This section provides information about the pin assignment of all
connectors located on the Shelf Connection Panel (SCP) of the ETSI
V5 Shelf and the appendant cabling.
The figure below shows the connector arrangement on the SCP of the
ETSI V5 Shelf.
Figure 4-20 Shelf Connection Panel (ETSI V5 Shelf)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A1
B1
C1
D1
E1
F1
G1
H
J
J1
(Ringing)
(-48VA)
(-48VB)
J2
(DS1 down)
D2
F2
H2
(LAN)
J3
(Clock)
(Alarm out)
(RTU)
(Alarm in)
(TAP)
Connector designations
(DS1 up)
The table below lists all connectors of the SCP and their meaning.
Table 4-6
Designation Connector type
Meaning
A1
Power connector A
2-pin male
(–48VA and –48VRTN)
B1
2-pin male
Power connector B
(–48VB and –48VRTN)
C1
37-pin male SUB-D
TAP connector
D1
25-pin male SUB-D
E1 connector downstream
(8 downstream E1 feeder
pairs)
E1
25-pin male SUB-D
pairs)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-27
Overview
internal cables
Table 4-6
(continued)
Meaning
F1
E1 connector upstream
25-pin male SUB-D
(8 upstream E1 feeder pairs)
G1
25-pin male SUB-D
J1
2-pin male
Ringing connector
J2
9-pin female SUB-D
LAN connector
J3
9-pin female SUB-D
Alarm input connector
(Miscellaneous Alarm Inputs)
F2
9-pin male SUB-D
Alarm output connector
(Office alarm closure output International)
D2
9-pin male SUB-D
Station clock connector
H2
9-pin female SUB-D
RTU connector
(RTU/ATU link)
Cable connections
The figure below gives an overview about the cabling of the ETSI V5
Shelf.
Figure 4-21 Cable connections of the SCP (ETSI V5 Shelf)
to power
termination
block B
(RFCP, -48VB)
to power
termination
block A
(RFCP, -48VA)
to test
equipment
to DDF
(E1 downstream)
to DDF
(E1 upstream)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A1
B1
C1
D1
E1
F1
G1
to 10BaseT LAN
equipment, e.g. NAM
to RFU
(RFCP)
H
J
J1
J2
D2
to CDP
F2
H2
J3
to ACP
to RTU
to ACP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-28
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Overview
Cable routing
internal cables
All cables which shall be connected to the SCP of the ETSI V5 Shelf
must be routed through the right cut-out of the shelf as shown in the
figure below.
Figure 4-22 Cable routing to the SCP (ETSI V5 Shelf)
The following cables must be routed in the vertical cable ducts of the
rack to the SCP:
•
Power cables
•
Alarm cables
•
Clock cable
•
Ringing cable
•
Fan cable.
Contents
4-30
4-32
TAP connector (C1)
4-41
LAN connector (J2)
4-44
RTU connector (H2)
4-45
4-47
4-50
4-52
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-29
internal cables
Power
connectors (A1/B1)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Connector data
The internal power cables coming from the fuses on the RFCP must
be connected to these interfaces.
The power interfaces (A1/B1) are realized as 2-pin connectors (male).
Figure 4-23 Power connectors (A1/B1)
Front view
(contact side)
-48V
A1
A2
A3
-48RTNE
(Common)
Table 4-7
Point on
connector
Internal pre-installed power
cables
Power connector A
A1
Power connector B
B1
A1
–48VA
–48VB
A2
not connected
not connected
A3
–48RTNE (Common)
–48RTNE (Common)
External return of -48V
The following table lists the internal pre-installed shielded power
cables to the power connectors A1/B1 in the ETSI V5 Shelves.
Table 4-8
Length
Equipment code
Connector A1
Shelf 3
ED7C818-35 Gr11J
Shelf 2
ED7C818-35 Gr11K
Shelf 1
ED7C818-35 Gr11L
Connector B1
Shelf 3
ED7C818-35 Gr11F
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-30
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
Table 4-8
Length
Equipment code
Shelf 2
ED7C818-35 Gr11G
Shelf 1
ED7C818-35 Gr11H
(continued)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-31
internal cables
E1
connectors (D1/E1/F1/G1)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Connector data
E1 cables (120 Ω or 75 Ω if required) from the Digital Distribution
Frame (DDF) can be connected to these interfaces. The connectors D1
and E1 must be used for E1 downstream (E1 input), the connectors
F1 and G1 for E1 upstream (E1 output). The line impedances (75 Ω
or 120 Ω) of the IO_E1 packs can be set via jumpers (see section
“Jumper setting” (4-39)).
The E1 interfaces (D1/E1/F1/G1) are realized as 25-pin SUB-D
connectors (male).
Figure 4-24 D1 connector (E1 downstream)
D1
E1 downstream
14
1
1DS1D1T
15
1DS1D1R
1DS1D2T
2
16
3
nc
1DS1D2R
17
4
1DS1D3T
18
5
1DS1D3R
1DS1D4R
19
6
nc
20
7
2DS1D1T
nc
21
8
2DS1D1R
22
9
nc
23
10
2DS1D3T
24
11
2DS1D3R
12
nc
13
GRD
nc
E1_1 port2
nc
1DS1D4T
E1_1 port4
2DS1D2T
E1_2 port2
2DS1D2R
nc
2DS1D4T
E1_2 port4
2DS1D4R
25
E1_1 port1
E1_1 port3
E1_2 port1
E1_2 port3
nc = not connected
Table 4-9
Point on
connector
Signal name
Meaning
1
1DS1D1T
E1_1, port 1, Tip
2
1DS1D1R
E1_1, port 1, Ring
3
not connected
4
1DS1D3T
E1_1, port 3, Tip
5
1DS1D3R
E1_1, port 3, Ring
6
not connected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-32
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
Table 4-9
Point on
connector
(continued)
Signal name
Meaning
7
2DS1D1T
E1_2, port 1, Tip
8
2DS1D1R
E1_2, port 1, Ring
9
not connected
10
2DS1D3T
E1_2, port 3, Tip
11
2DS1D3R
E1_2, port 3, Ring
12
not connected
13
GRD
14
not connected
15
1DS1D2T
E1_1, port 2, Tip
16
1DS1D2R
E1_1, port 2, Ring
17
not connected
18
1DS1D4T
E1_1, port 4, Tip
19
1DS1D4R
E1_1, port 4, Ring
20
not connected
21
2DS1D2T
E1_2, port 2, Tip
22
2DS1D2R
E1_2, port 2, Ring
23
not connected
24
2DS1D4T
E1_2, port 4, Tip
25
2DS1D4R
E1_2, port 4, Ring
Ground
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-33
internal cables
Figure 4-25 E1 connector (E1 downstream)
E1
E1 downstream
14
1
3DS1D1T
15
3DS1D1R
3DS1D2T
2
16
3
nc
3DS1D2R
17
4
3DS1D3T
18
5
3DS1D3R
3DS1D4R
19
6
nc
20
7
4DS1D1T
nc
21
8
4DS1D1R
22
9
nc
23
4DS1D3T
nc
10
24
11
4DS1D3R
4DS1D4T
12
nc
13
GRD
nc
E1_3 port2
nc
3DS1D4T
E1_3 port4
4DS1D2T
E1_4 port2
4DS1D2R
E1_4 port4
4DS1D4R
25
E1_3 port1
E1_3 port3
E1_4 port1
E1_4 port3
nc = not connected
Table 4-10
Point on
connector
Signal name
Meaning
1
3DS1D1T
E1_3, port 1, Tip
2
3DS1D1R
E1_3, port 1, Ring
3
not connected
4
3DS1D3T
E1_3, port 3, Tip
5
3DS1D3R
E1_3, port 3, Ring
6
not connected
7
4DS1D1T
E1_4, port 1, Tip
8
4DS1D1R
E1_4, port 1, Ring
9
not connected
10
4DS1D3T
E1_4, port 3, Tip
11
4DS1D3R
E1_4, port 3, Ring
12
not connected
13
GRD
14
not connected
15
3DS1D2T
Ground
E1_3, port 2, Tip
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-34
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
Table 4-10
(continued)
Point on
connector
Signal name
Meaning
16
3DS1D2R
E1_3, port 2, Ring
17
not connected
18
3DS1D4T
E1_3, port 4, Tip
19
3DS1D4R
E1_3, port 4, Ring
20
not connected
21
4DS1D2T
E1_4, port 2, Tip
22
4DS1D2R
E1_4, port 2, Ring
23
not connected
24
4DS1D4T
E1_4, port 4, Tip
25
4DS1D4R
E1_4, port 4, Ring
Figure 4-26 F1 connector (E1 upstream)
F1
E1 upstream
14
1
1DS1U1T
nc
15
2
1DS1U1R
1DS1U2T
16
3
nc
1DS1U2R
17
4
1DS1U3T
18
5
1DS1U3R
1DS1U4R
19
6
nc
20
7
2DS1U1T
nc
21
8
2DS1U1R
22
9
nc
23
2DS1U3T
nc
10
24
11
2DS1U3R
2DS1U4T
12
nc
13
GRD
E1_1 port2
nc
1DS1U4T
E1_1 port4
2DS1U2T
E1_2 port2
2DS1U2R
E1_2 port4
2DS1U4R
25
E1_1 port1
E1_1 port3
E1_2 port1
E1_2 port3
nc = not connected
Table 4-11
Point on
connector
1
Signal name
Meaning
1DS1U1T
E1_1, port 1, Tip
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-35
internal cables
Table 4-11
Point on
connector
(continued)
Signal name
Meaning
2
1DS1U1R
E1_1, port 1, Ring
3
not connected
4
1DS1U3T
E1_1, port 3, Tip
5
1DS1U3R
E1_1, port 3, Ring
6
not connected
7
2DS1U1T
E1_2, port 1, Tip
8
2DS1U1R
E1_2, port 1, Ring
9
not connected
10
2DS1U3T
E1_2, port 3, Tip
11
2DS1U3R
E1_2, port 3, Ring
12
not connected
13
GRD
14
not connected
15
1DS1U2T
E1_1, port 2, Tip
16
1DS1U2R
E1_1, port 2, Ring
17
not connected
18
1DS1U4T
E1_1, port 4, Tip
19
1DS1U4R
E1_1, port 4, Ring
20
not connected
21
2DS1U2T
E1_2, port 2, Tip
22
2DS1U2R
E1_2, port 2, Ring
23
not connected
24
2DS1U4T
E1_2, port 4, Tip
25
2DS1U4R
E1_2, port 4, Ring
Ground
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-36
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
Figure 4-27 G1 connector (E1 upstream)
G1
E1 upstream
14
1
3DS1U1T
15
3DS1U1R
3DS1U2T
2
16
3
nc
3DS1U2R
17
4
3DS1U3T
18
5
3DS1U3R
3DS1U4R
19
6
nc
20
7
4DS1U1T
nc
21
8
4DS1U1R
22
9
nc
23
4DS1U3T
nc
10
24
11
4DS1U3R
4DS1U4T
12
nc
13
GRD
nc
E1_3 port2
nc
3DS1U4T
E1_3 port4
4DS1U2T
E1_4 port2
4DS1U2R
E1_4 port4
4DS1U4R
25
E1_3 port1
E1_3 port3
E1_4 port1
E1_4 port3
nc = not connected
Table 4-12
Point on
connector
Signal name
Meaning
1
3DS1U1T
E1_3, port 1, Tip
2
3DS1U1R
E1_3, port 1, Ring
3
not connected
4
3DS1U3T
E1_3, port 3, Tip
5
3DS1U3R
E1_3, port 3, Ring
6
not connected
7
4DS1U1T
E1_4, port 1, Tip
8
4DS1U1R
E1_4, port 1, Ring
9
not connected
10
4DS1U3T
E1_4, port 3, Tip
11
4DS1U3R
E1_4, port 3, Ring
12
not connected
13
GRD
14
not connected
15
3DS1U2T
Ground
E1_3, port 2, Tip
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-37
internal cables
Table 4-12
Point on
connector
Cable specification
(continued)
Signal name
Meaning
16
3DS1U2R
E1_3, port 2, Ring
17
not connected
18
3DS1U4T
E1_3, port 4, Tip
19
3DS1U4R
E1_3, port 4, Ring
20
not connected
21
4DS1U2T
E1_4, port 2, Tip
22
4DS1U2R
E1_4, port 2, Ring
23
not connected
24
4DS1U4T
E1_4, port 4, Tip
25
4DS1U4R
E1_4, port 4, Ring
Figure 4-28 E1 cable (120 Ω)
Figure 4-29 E1 cable (75 Ω)
The E1 feeder cables are listed Table 5-6, “E1 feeder cables” (5-51).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-38
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
Jumper setting
The IO_E1 packs must be configured via jumpers to a line impedance
of 75 Ω (unbalanced) or 120 Ω (balanced). The next two figures show
the two possible configurations.
Figure 4-30 120 Ω configuration (default - view on the printed
circuit board)
View on IO_E1 components side
(faceplate to the right)
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-39
internal cables
Figure 4-31 75 Ω configuration - view on the printed circuit
board
View on IO_E1 components side
(faceplate to the right)
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-40
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
TAP
connector (C1)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Connector data
The TAP connector can be used for different test applications. It
provides internal and external metallic test access to the ports and
drops of the application packs.
The TAP interface (C1) is realized as a 37-pin SUB-D connector
(male).
Figure 4-32 TAP connector (C1)
Front view
(contact side)
nc
20
nc
21
nc
22
nc
nc
nc
nc
nc
23
24
25
26
27
28
nc
29
nc
30
nc
31
TAPB_EQ_T1
32
TAPB_EQ_T2
33
TAPB_FAC_T2
34
TAPB_FAC_E
TAPB_EQ_E
nc
2
nc
3
nc
4
nc
5
nc
6
nc
7
nc
8
nc
9
nc
TAPB_FAC_T1
1
35
36
37
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
nc
nc
nc
nc
TAPB_SEIZE
TAPB_EQ_R1
TAPB_EQ_R2
TAPB_FAC_R2
TAPB_FAC_R1
TAPB_FAC_M
TAPB_EQ_M
nc = not connected
Table 4-13
Point on
connector
Signal name
1 .. 12
not connected
Meaning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-41
TAP connector (C1)
internal cables
Table 4-13
Point on
connector
13
Signal name
Meaning
TAPB_SEIZE
TAPB_SEIZE
(continued)
(multiple testing)
14
TAPB_EQ_R1
TAPB_EQ_R1, Equipment,
(Ring1, b-wire)
15
TAPB_EQ_R2
(Ring2, b-wire)
16
TAPB_FAC_R2
TAPB_FAC_R2, Facility,
(Ring2, b-wire)
17
TAPB_FAC_R1
(Ring1, b-wire)
18
TAPB_FAC_M
TAPB_FAC_M, Facility
19
TAPB_EQ_M
TAPB_EQ_M, Equipment
20 .. 31
not connected
32
TAPB_EQ_T1
TAPB_EQ_T1, Equipment,
(Tip1, a-wire)
33
TAPB_EQ_T2
(Tip2, a-wire)
34
TAPB_FAC_T2
TAPB_FAC_T2, Facility,
(Tip2, a-wire)
35
TAPB_FAC_T1
(Tip1, a-wire)
36
TAPB_FAC_E
TAPB_FAC_E, Facility
37
TAPB_EQ_E
TAPB_EQ_E, Equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-42
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
TAP connector (C1)
internal cables
Cable specification
Figure 4-33 TAP cable
Cables available for order
The following table lists all TAP cables which can be ordered.
Table 4-14
Available TAP cables (ETSI V5 Shelf)
Length
Equipment code
50 ft (≈ 15.0 m)
ED7C818-36 Gr11
100 ft (≈ 30.5 m)
ED7C818-36 Gr1A1
200 ft (≈ 61.0 m)
ED7C818-36 Gr1B1
300 ft (≈ 91.5 m)
ED7C818-36 Gr1C1
4.6 ft (≈ 1.4 m)
ED7C818-36 Gr42
Notes:
1.
8-pair cable. Is routed via the MDF and the normal AP cable to the
TAP10X.
2.
2-pair cable. Connects directly to the TAP10X.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-43
internal cables
LAN
connector (J2)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Connector data
External 10Base-T LAN equipment can be connected to this interface
(router/hub or PC LAN card for the Graphical System Interface (GSI)
and/or the Navis ® AnyMedia ® Element Management System (NAM)
for example).
The LAN interface (J2) is realized as a 9-pin SUB-D connector
(female).
Figure 4-34 LAN connector (J2)
Front view
(contact side)
nc
nc
LAN_TDN
LAN_RDN
9
5
nc
8
4
nc
7
3
nc
6
2
LAN_TDP
1
LAN_RDP
nc = not connected
Table 4-15
Point on
connector
Cable specification
Signal name
Meaning
1
LAN_RDP
Receive-data positive
2
LAN_TDP
Transmit-data positive
3
not connected
4
not connected
5
not connected
6
LAN_RDN
Receive-data negative
7
LAN_TDN
Transmit-data negative
8
not connected
9
not connected
This LAN cable has to be manufactured by the installer. The
requirements are provided in “LAN connection for narrowband
applications” (A-37).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-44
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
RTU
connector (H2)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Connector data
A Remote Test Unit (RTU) can be connected to this interface.
The RTU interface (H2) is realized as a 9-pin SUB-D connector
(female).
Figure 4-35 RTU connector (H2)
Front view
(contact side)
nc
nc
nc
DSR
9
5
GRD
8
4
DTR
7
3
TxD
6
2
RxD
1
nc
nc = not connected
Table 4-16
Pin assignment (RTU connector, H2)
Point on
connector
Signal name
Meaning
1
not connected
2
RxD
Received Data
3
TxD
Transmitted Data
4
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
5
GRD
Ground
6
DSR
Data Set Ready
7
not connected
8
not connected
9
not connected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-45
RTU connector (H2)
internal cables
Cable specification
Figure 4-36 RTU cable
Cable available for order
Table 4-17
Serial RTU cable (ETSI V5 Shelf)
Length
Equipment code
8 ft (≈ 2.5 m)
ED7C867-31 Gr7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-46
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
Alarm
connectors (F2/J3)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Connector data
All the alarm inputs and outputs of the ETSI V5 shelves can be
connected via these interfaces to the Alarm Connection Panel (ACP)
enabling an individual customer-specific put through of the alarms.
The alarm output interface (F2) is realized as a 9-pin SUB-D
connector (male).
Figure 4-37 Alarm output connector (F2)
Front view
(contact side)
MJ2_NO
MN0_C
MN1_NC
MN2_NO
Table 4-18
6
1
CR0_C
7
2
CR1_NC
8
3
CR2_NO
9
4
MJ0_C
5
MJ1_NC
Pin assignment (Alarm output connector, F2)
Point on connector
Signal name
Meaning
1
CR0_C
Critical alarm (common)
2
CR1_NC
Critical alarm (break)
3
CR2_NO
Critical alarm (make)
4
MJ0_C
Major alarm (common)
5
MJ1_NC
Major alarm (break)
6
MJ2_NO
Major alarm (make)
7
MN0_C
Minor alarm (common)
8
MN1_NC
Minor alarm (break)
9
MN2_NO
Minor alarm (make)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-47
internal cables
The alarm input interface (J3) is realized as a 9-pin SUB-D connector
(female).
Figure 4-38 Alarm input connector (J3)
Front view
(contact side)
GRD
TLM8
TLM7
TLM6
9
5
TLM5
8
4
TLM4
7
3
TLM3
6
2
TLM2
1
TLM1
NOTE: The TLM alarm inputs can be provisioned individually.
Table 4-19
Point on connector
Internal pre-installed alarm
cabels
Signal name
Meaning
1
TLM1
Alarm input 1
2
TLM2
Alarm input 2
3
TLM3
Alarm input 3
4
TLM4
Alarm input 4
5
TLM5
Alarm input 5
6
TLM6
Alarm input 6
7
TLM7
Alarm input 7
8
TLM8
Alarm input 8
9
GRD
Ground
The following table lists all internal pre-installed alarm cables.
Table 4-20
Destination
Equipment code
Alarm output connector F2
Shelf 3, F2
ED7C818-35 Gr7A
Shelf 2, F2
ED7C818-35 Gr7B
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-48
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
Table 4-20
(continued)
Destination
Equipment code
Shelf 1, F2
ED7C818-35 Gr7C
Alarm input connector J3
Shelf 1, J3
ED7C818-35 Gr12
Shelf 2, J3
ED7C818-35 Gr12A
Shelf 3, J3
ED7C818-35 Gr12B
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-49
internal cables
Station
clock connector (D2)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Station clock signals coming from the Clock Distribution Panel (CDP)
which are terminated with 120 Ω can be connected to this interface.
Optionally an external 75 Ω cable may be connected directly to the
D2 connector (bypassing the CDP).
Connector data
The station clock interface (D2) is realized as a 9-pin SUB-D
connector (male).
Figure 4-39 Station clock connector (D2)
Front view
(contact side)
nc
GRD
SC_IN_R
nc
6
1
nc
7
2
nc
8
3
GRD
9
4
SC_IN_T
5
nc
nc = not connected
Table 4-21
Point on
connector
Pin assignment (Station clock connector, D2)
Signal name
Meaning
1
not connected
2
not connected
3
GRD
Ground
4
SC_IN_T
Station clock, Tip
5
not connected
6
not connected
7
GRD
Ground
8
SC_IN_R
Station clock, Ring
9
not connected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-50
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Internal pre-installed
station clock cables
internal cables
The following table lists the internal pre-installed station clock cables
to the station clock connector D2 in the ETSI V5 Shelves.
Table 4-22
Station clock cables (ETSI V5 Shelf)
Destination
Equipment code
Shelf 3, D2
ED7C818-35 Gr13
Shelf 2, D2
ED7C818-35 Gr13A
Shelf 1, D2
ED7C818-35 Gr13B
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-51
internal cables
Ringing
connector (J1)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Connector data
Ringing signals coming from the RFU can be connected to this
interface. Note that this applies only to rack variant J1C293B-1, L3
with RFUs equipped and pre-installed ringing cables.
The ringing interface (J1) is realized as a 2-pin connector (male).
Figure 4-40 Ringing connector (J1)
Front view
(contact side)
A1
RRG0
A2
A3
TRG0
Table 4-23
Point on
connector
Internal pre-installed
ringing cables
Signal name
Meaning
A1
RRG0
Ringing voltage
A2
not connected
A3
TRG0
Ringing return
The following table lists the internal pre-installed ringing cables (for
rack type J1C293B-1, L3) to the ringing connector J1 in the ETSI V5
Shelves.
Table 4-24
Available ringing cables (ETSI V5 Shelf)
Destination
Equipment code
Shelf 3, J1
ED7C818-35 Gr10C
Shelf 2, J1
ED7C818-35 Gr10D
Shelf 1, J1
ED7C818-35 Gr10E
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-52
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Connector field
This section provides information about the pin assignment of all
connectors located on the LAG 1900 Shelf connector field and the
appendant cabling.
A cover plate closes the front of the connector field. The figure below
shows the connector arrangement of the LAG 1900 Shelf connector
field which becomes visible when the cover plate has been removed.
Figure 4-41 LAG 1900 Shelf connector field
J111
-48 VA
J112
-48 VB
J101
J102
DS 1 down DS 1 up
P114
FAN
P113
Ringing
J103
TAP
J104
LAN
Connector designations
J107
Alarm out
J106
RTU
J108
Alarm in
J109
Clock 0
J110
Clock 1
The table below lists all connectors of the LAG 1900 Shelf connector
field and their meaning.
Table 4-25
Connectors of the LAG 1900 Shelf connector field
Meaning
J101
25-pin female SUB-D
pairs)
J102
25-pin female SUB-D
J103
37-pin female SUB-D
TAP connector
J104
9-pin female SUB-D
LAN connector
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-53
Overview
internal cables
Table 4-25
Connectors of the LAG 1900 Shelf connector
field (continued)
Meaning
J106
RTU connector
9-pin female SUB-D
(RTU/ATU link)
J107
9-pin female SUB-D
Alarm output connector
(Office alarm closure output International)
J108
9-pin female SUB-D
Alarm input connector
(Miscellaneous Alarm Inputs)
J109
9-pin female SUB-D
Clock 0 connector
(Office clock 0 input to both
COMDACs, station clock
input to CIU and COMDAC
0 system sync output)
J110
9-pin female SUB-D
Clock 1 connector
(Office clock 1 input to both
COMDACs)
J111
2-pin male
Power connector A
(–48VA and –48VRTN)
J112
2-pin male
Power connector B
(–48VB and –48VRTN)
P113
4-pin molex header
Ringing connector
(External ringing bus 0)
P114
10-pin molex header
Fan connector
(Fan alarm/control/power)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-54
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Overview
Cable routing
internal cables
All cables which shall be connected to the LAG 1900 Shelf connector
field must be routed through the right cut-out of the shelf as shown in
the figure below.
Figure 4-42 Cable routing of the LAG 1900 Shelf connector field
The following cables must be routed in the vertical cable ducts of the
rack to the RCP:
•
Power cables
•
Alarm cables
•
Clock cables
•
Ringing cable.
Contents
4-56
4-58
4-62
4-66
4-68
4-70
4-73
4-76
4-78
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-55
internal cables
Power
connectors (J111/J112)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Connector data
The internal power cables coming from the RCP (power termination
blocks) must be connected to these interfaces.
The power interfaces (J111/J112) are realized as 2-pin connectors
(male).
Figure 4-43 Power connectors (J111/J112)
Front view
(contact side)
-48V
A1
A2
-48RTNE
(Common)
A3
Table 4-26
Point on
connector
Power connector A
J111
Power connector B
J112
A1
–48VA
–48VB
A2
not connected
not connected
A3
–48RTNE (Common)
–48RTNE (Common)
Cable specification
Figure 4-44 Power cable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-56
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Pre-installed power cables
internal cables
The following table lists the internal pre-installed shielded power
cables to the power connectors J111/J112 in the LAG 1900 Shelves.
Table 4-27
Internal power cables (LAG 1900 Shelf)
Destination
Equipment code
Connector J112 (B)
Shelf 3, J112
ED7C874-31 Gr8
Shelf 2, J112
ED7C874-31 Gr8A
Shelf 1, J112
ED7C874-31 Gr8B
Connector J111 (A)
Shelf 1, J111
ED7C874-31 Gr8C
Shelf 2, J111
ED7C874-31 Gr8D
Shelf 3, J111
ED7C874-31 Gr8E
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-57
internal cables
E1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Connector data
E1 cables from the Digital Distribution Frame (DDF) can be
connected to these interfaces. Connector J101 must be used for E1
downstream (E1 input), connector J102 for E1 upstream (E1 output).
The E1 interfaces (J101/J102) are realized as 25-pin SUB-D
connectors (female).
Figure 4-45 E1 connector downstream (J101)
J101
E1 downstream
25
13
nc
24
nc
nc
12
23
11
nc
nc
22
10
nc
21
9
nc
20
8
2DS1D3R
19
7
2DS1D3T
18
6
2DS1D1R
17
5
2DS1D1T
16
4
1DS1D3R
15
3
1DS1D3T
14
2
1DS1D1R
1
1DS1D1T
nc
nc
2DS1D4R
E1_2 port4
2DS1D4T
2DS1D2R
E1_2 port2
2DS1D2T
1DS1D4R
E1_1 port4
1DS1D4T
1DS1D2R
E1_1 port2
1DS1D2T
E1_2 port3
E1_2 port1
E1_1 port3
E1_1 port1
nc = not connected
Table 4-28
Point on
connector
Pin assignment (E1 connector downstream, J101)
Signal name
Meaning
1
1DS1D1T
E1_1, port 1, Tip
2
1DS1D1R
E1_1, port 1, Ring
3
1DS1D3T
E1_1, port 3, Tip
4
1DS1D3R
E1_1, port 3, Ring
5
2DS1D1T
E1_2, port 1, Tip
6
2DS1D1R
E1_2, port 1, Ring
7
2DS1D3T
E1_2, port 3, Tip
8
2DS1D3R
E1_2, port 3, Ring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-58
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
Table 4-28
Pin assignment (E1 connector downstream,
J101) (continued)
Point on
connector
Signal name
9 .. 13
Meaning
not connected
14
1DS1D2T
E1_1, port 2, Tip
15
1DS1D2R
E1_1, port 2, Ring
16
1DS1D4T
E1_1, port 4, Tip
17
1DS1D4R
E1_1, port 4, Ring
18
2DS1D2T
E1_2, port 2, Tip
19
2DS1D2R
E1_2, port 2, Ring
20
2DS1D4T
E1_2, port 4, Tip
21
2DS1D4R
E1_2, port 4, Ring
22 .. 25
not connected
Figure 4-46 E1 connector upstream (J102)
J102
E1 upstream
25
13
nc
24
12
nc
23
11
nc
22
10
nc
21
9
nc
20
8
2DS1U3R
2DS1U4T
19
7
2DS1U3T
2DS1U2R
18
6
2DS1U1R
17
5
2DS1U1T
16
4
1DS1U3R
1DS1U4T
15
3
1DS1U3T
1DS1U2R
14
2
1DS1U1R
1
1DS1U1T
nc
nc
nc
nc
2DS1U4R
E1_2 port4
E1_2 port2
2DS1U2T
1DS1U4R
E1_1 port4
E1_1 port2
1DS1U2T
E1_2 port3
E1_2 port1
E1_1 port3
E1_1 port1
nc = not connected
Table 4-29
Point on
connector
1
Signal name
Meaning
1DS1U1T
E1_1, port 1, Tip
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-59
internal cables
Table 4-29
(continued)
Point on
connector
Signal name
Meaning
2
1DS1U1R
E1_1, port 1, Ring
3
1DS1U3T
E1_1, port 3, Tip
4
1DS1U3R
E1_1, port 3, Ring
5
2DS1U1T
E1_2, port 1, Tip
6
2DS1U1R
E1_2, port 1, Ring
7
2DS1U3T
E1_2, port 3, Tip
8
2DS1U3R
E1_2, port 3, Ring
9 .. 13
not connected
14
1DS1U2T
E1_1, port 2, Tip
15
1DS1U2R
E1_1, port 2, Ring
16
1DS1U4T
E1_1, port 4, Tip
17
1DS1U4R
E1_1, port 4, Ring
18
2DS1U2T
E1_2, port 2, Tip
19
2DS1U2R
E1_2, port 2, Ring
20
2DS1U4T
E1_2, port 4, Tip
21
2DS1U4R
E1_2, port 4, Ring
22 .. 25
not connected
Cable specification
Figure 4-47 E1 cable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-60
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
The E1 feeder cables are listed in Table 5-6, “E1 feeder cables” (5-51)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-61
internal cables
TAP
connector (J103)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The TAP connector can be used for different test applications. It
provides internal and external metallic test access to the ports and
drops of the application packs.
Connector data
The TAP interface (J103) is realized as a 37-pin SUB-D connector
(female).
Figure 4-48 TAP connector (J103)
Front view
(contact side)
TAPA_EQ_R1
TAPA_EQ_R2
TAPA_FAC_R2
TAPA_FAC_R1
TAPA_FAC_M
TAPA_EQ_M
TAPA_SEIZE
nc
nc
nc
nc
nc
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
TAPB_FAC_R2
TAPB_FAC_R1
TAPB_FAC_M
22
23
24
25
26
27
9
10
11
12
TAPB_SEIZE
TAPB_EQ_R2
21
3
13
TAPB_EQ_R1
20
14
15
16
17
18
19
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
TAPA_EQ_T1
TAPA_EQ_T2
TAPA_FAC_T2
TAPA_FAC_T1
TAPA_FAC_E
TAPA_EQ_E
nc
nc
nc
nc
nc
nc
TAPB_EQ_T1
TAPB_EQ_T2
TAPB_FAC_T2
TAPB_FAC_T1
TAPB_FAC_E
TAPB_EQ_E
TAPB_EQ_M
nc = not connected
Table 4-30
Point on
connector
1
Signal name
Meaning
TAPA_EQ_R1
TAPA_EQ_R1, Equipment,
(Ring1, b-wire)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-62
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
Table 4-30
Point on
connector
2
(continued)
Signal name
Meaning
TAPA_EQ_R2
TAPA_EQ_R2, Equipment,
(Ring2, b-wire)
3
TAPA_FAC_R2
TAPA_FAC_R2, Facility,
(Ring2, b-wire)
4
TAPA_FAC_R1
TAPA_FAC_R1, Facility,
(Ring1, b-wire)
5
TAPA_FAC_M
TAPA_FAC_M, Facility
6
TAPA_EQ_M
TAPA_EQ_M, Equipment
7
TAPA_SEIZE
TAPA_SEIZE
(multiple testing)
8 .. 12
not connected
13
TAPB_SEIZE
TAPB_SEIZE
(multiple testing)
14
TAPB_EQ_R1
(Ring1, b-wire)
15
TAPB_EQ_R2
(Ring2, b-wire)
16
TAPB_FAC_R2
(Ring2, b-wire)
17
TAPB_FAC_R1
(Ring1, b-wire)
18
TAPB_FAC_M
TAPB_FAC_M, Facility
19
TAPB_EQ_M
TAPB_EQ_M, Equipment
20
TAPA_EQ_T1
TAPA_EQ_T1, Equipment,
(Tip1, a-wire)
21
TAPA_EQ_T2
TAPA_EQ_T2, Equipment,
(Tip2, a-wire)
22
TAPA_FAC_T2
TAPA_FAC_T2, Facility,
(Tip2, a-wire)
23
TAPA_FAC_T1
TAPA_FAC_T1, Facility,
(Tip1, a-wire)
24
TAPA_FAC_E
TAPA_FAC_E, Facility
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-63
internal cables
Table 4-30
(continued)
Point on
connector
Signal name
Meaning
25
TAPA_EQ_E
TAPA_EQ_E, Equipment
26 ..31
not connected
32
TAPB_EQ_T1
(Tip1, a-wire)
33
TAPB_EQ_T2
(Tip2, a-wire)
34
TAPB_FAC_T2
(Tip2, a-wire)
35
TAPB_FAC_T1
(Tip1, a-wire)
36
TAPB_FAC_E
TAPB_FAC_E, Facility
37
TAPB_EQ_E
TAPB_EQ_E, Equipment
Cable specification
Figure 4-49 TAP cable
The following table lists all TAP cables which can be ordered.
Table 4-31
Length
Equipment code
4.6 ft (≈ 1.4 m)
ED7C874-31 Gr13
25 ft (≈ 7.5 m)
ED7C874-31 Gr2
50 ft (≈ 15.0 m)
ED7C874-31 Gr2A
1
2
2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-64
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
Table 4-31
(continued)
Length
Equipment code
100 ft (≈ 30.5 m)
ED7C874-31 Gr2B
2
200 ft (≈ 61.0 m)
ED7C874-31 Gr2C
2
300 ft (≈ 91.5 m)
ED7C874-31 Gr2D
2
Notes:
1.
2-pair cables. Connects directly to the TAP10X.
2.
8-pair cables. Routed via the MDF and the normal AP cable to the
TAP10X.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-65
internal cables
LAN
connector (J104)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Connector data
External 10Base-T LAN equipment can be connected to this interface
(router/hub or PC LAN card for the Graphical System Interface (GSI)
and/or the Navis ® AnyMedia ® Element Management System (NAM)
for example).
The LAN interface (J104) is realized as a 9-pin SUB-D connector
(female).
Figure 4-50 LAN connector (J104)
Front view
(contact side)
nc
nc
LAN_TDN
LAN_RDN
9
5
nc
8
4
nc
7
3
nc
6
2
LAN_TDP
1
LAN_RDP
nc = not connected
Table 4-32
Point on
connector
Signal name
Meaning
1
LAN_RDP
Receive-data positive
2
LAN_TDP
Transmit-data positive
3
not connected
4
not connected
5
not connected
6
LAN_RDN
Receive-data negative
7
LAN_TDN
Transmit-data negative
8
not connected
9
not connected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-66
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
Cable specification
Figure 4-51 LAN cable
Table 4-33
Available LAN cable (LAG 1900 Shelf)
Length
Equipment code
8 ft (≈ 2.5 m)
ED7C874-31 G3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-67
internal cables
RTU
connector (J106)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Connector data
A Remote Test Unit (RTU) can be connected to this interface.
The RTU interface (J106) is realized as a 9-pin SUB-D connector
(female).
Figure 4-52 RTU connector (J106)
Front view
(contact side)
nc
nc
nc
DSR
9
5
GRD
8
4
DTR
7
3
TxD
6
2
RxD
1
nc
nc = not connected
Table 4-34
Pin assignment (RTU connector, J106)
Point on
connector
Signal name
Meaning
1
not connected
2
RxD
Received Data
3
TxD
Transmitted Data
4
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
5
GRD
Ground
6
DSR
Data Set Ready
7
not connected
8
not connected
9
not connected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-68
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
Cable specification
Figure 4-53 RTU cable
Table 4-35
Available RTU cable (LAG 1900 Shelf)
Length
Equipment code
8 ft (≈ 2.5 m)
ED7C874-31 Gr4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-69
internal cables
Alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Connector data
All the alarm inputs and outputs of the LAG 1900 Shelves can be
connected via these interfaces to the Alarm Connection Panel (ACP)
enabling an individual customer-specific put through of the alarms.
The alarm interfaces (J107/J108) are realized as 9-pin SUB-D
Figure 4-54 Alarm output connector (J107)
Front view
(contact side)
MN2_NO
MN1_NC
MN0_C
MJ2_NO
Table 4-36
9
5
MJ1_NC
8
4
MJ0_C
7
3
CR2_NO
6
2
CR1_NC
1
CR0_C
Pin assignment (Alarm output connector, J107)
Point on connector
Signal name
Meaning
1
CR0_C
Critical alarm (common)
2
CR1_NC
Critical alarm (break)
3
CR2_NO
Critical alarm (make)
4
MJ0_C
Major alarm (common)
5
MJ1_NC
Major alarm (break)
6
MJ2_NO
Major alarm (make)
7
MN0_C
Minor alarm (common)
8
MN1_NC
Minor alarm (break)
9
MN2_NO
Minor alarm (make)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-70
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
Figure 4-55 Alarm input connector (J108)
Front view
(contact side)
TLM1
TLM2
TLM3
TLM4
TLM5
1
2
6
7
3
4
8
9
5
TLM6
TLM7
TLM8
GRD
NOTE: The TLM alarm inputs can be provisioned individually.
Table 4-37
Point on connector
Signal name
Meaning
1
TLM1
Alarm input 1
2
TLM2
Alarm input 2
3
TLM3
Alarm input 3
4
TLM4
Alarm input 4
5
TLM5
Alarm input 5
6
TLM6
Alarm input 6
7
TLM7
Alarm input 7
8
TLM8
Alarm input 8
9
GRD
Ground
Cable specification
Figure 4-56 Alarm output cable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-71
internal cables
Figure 4-57 Alarm input cable
Internal pre-installed alarm
cables
The following table lists all internal pre-installed alarm cables.
Table 4-38
Available alarm cables (LAG 1900 Shelf)
Destination
Equipment code
Alarm output connector J107
Shelf 3, J107
ED7C874-31 Gr5
Shelf 2, J107
ED7C874-31 Gr5A
Shelf 1, J107
ED7C874-31 Gr5B
Alarm input connector J108
Shelf 3, J108
ED7C874-31 Gr10
Shelf 2, J108
ED7C874-31 Gr10A
Shelf 1, J108
ED7C874-31 Gr10B
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-72
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
Clock
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Connector data
Office clock signals coming from the Passive Clock Distribution
(PCD520) panels can be connected to these interfaces. Station clock
signals can only be connected to connector J109.
The clock interfaces (J109/J110) are realized as 9-pin SUB-D
Figure 4-58 Clock connector (J109)
Front view
(contact side)
STACLKR
OFFCLK0R
nc
0CLKOUTR
9
5
STACLKT
8
4
OFFCLK0T
7
3
nc
6
2
0CLKOUTT
1
nc
nc = not connected
Table 4-39
Point on
connector
Signal name
Meaning
1
not connected
2
0CLKOUTT
3
not connected
4
OFFCLK0T
Office clock, Tip
5
STACLKT
Station clock, Tip
6
0CLKOUTR
Clock-out, Ring
7
not connected
8
OFFCLK0R
Office clock, Ring
9
STACLKR
Station clock, Ring
Clock-out, Tip
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-73
internal cables
Figure 4-59 Clock connector (J110)
Front view
(contact side)
nc
OFFCLK1R
nc
1CLKOUTR
9
5
nc
8
4
OFFCLK1T
7
3
nc
6
2
1CLKOUTT
1
nc
nc = not connected
Table 4-40
Point on
connector
Signal name
1
not connected
2
1CLKOUTT
3
not connected
4
OFFCLK1T
5
not connected
6
1CLKOUTR
7
not connected
8
OFFCLK1R
9
not connected
Meaning
Clock-out, Tip
Office clock, Tip
Clock-out, Ring
Office clock, Ring
Cable specification
Figure 4-60 Station clock cable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-74
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
Figure 4-61 Office clock cable
Internal clock cables
The clock cables are included in optionally orderable kits as specified
in “Installing clock cables - J1C301B-1” (5-92).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-75
internal cables
Ringing
connector (J113)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
For the LAG 1900 Shelf external or local ringing can be used.
External ringing signals coming from the RCP (ringing termination
blocks) can be connected to this interface. If external ringing voltage
is used and no RFUs are equipped in the shelf, two ringing jumpers
must be installed instead, in the RGU slots (see Figure 2-4,
“Schematic of an AnyMedia ® LAG 1900 Shelf” (2-9)) in positions
P301 and P302 as shown in the figure below.
Figure 4-62 Plugged ringing jumpers
Connector data
The ringing interface (J113) is realized as a 4-pin molex connector
(tin plated).
Figure 4-63 Ringing connector (J113)
RRGA
2
4
TRGA
1
3
Table 4-41
Point on
connector
Signal name
Meaning
1
TRGA
Ringing return
2
RRGA
Ringing voltage
3
not connected
4
not connected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-76
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
Cable specification
Figure 4-64 Internal ringing cable
Internal ringing cables
The internal ringing cables are included in the optional kit for external
ringing (849015888). For detailed information see “Installing ringing
cables - J1C301B-1” (5-124).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-77
internal cables
Fan
connector (P114)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Connector data
The fan unit must be plugged directly to this connector.
The fan interface (P114) is realized as a 10-pin molex connector (gold
plated).
Figure 4-65 Fan connector (P114)
nc
nc
nc
nc
nc
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
nc = not connected
nc
GRD
FANALM
-48V_0
-48V_1
Table 4-42
Pin assignment (Fan connector, P114)
Point on connector
Signal name
Meaning
1
–48V_0
Internal power bus 0
2
–48V_1
Internal power bus 1
3
GRD
Ground
4
FANALM
Fan alarm
5
not connected
6
not connected
7
not connected
8
not connected
9
not connected
10
not connected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-78
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This section provides information about the pin assignment of the
Circuit Pack (CP) and Application Pack (AP) connectors and the
appendant cabling.
Contents
CIU pack
4-80
4-83
AFME1 pack
4-88
AFMO pack
4-94
4-99
4-103
4-103
4-108
4-108
4-110
4-112
4-115
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-79
Circuit pack and application pack
connectors
internal cables
CIU
pack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
CHAN/MON DROP
connector
The CIU pack (DTP500) contains the following connectors:
•
CHAN/MON DROP connector
•
CIT connector.
The CHAN/MON interface is used for metallic test access to the port
hardware and for listening to an existing call.
The DROP interface is used for metallic test access to the subscriber
line.
Figure 4-66 CHAN/MON DROP connector
J-RGB1
CHAN/MON
J-TGB1
T1
Facility (FAC)
S1
ESDGRD
R1
J-RGB2
J-TGB2
T2
Equipment (EQ)
S2
ESDGRD
R2
DROP
S1/2
R1/2
Note for dual Bantam jack:
T1/2
outer: Screen (S1/2)
middle: R1/2 (ring wire FAC/EQ)
inner: T1/2 (tip wire FAC/EQ)
R1/2
T1/2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-80
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
connectors
CIU pack
CIT connector
internal cables
The CIT connector is used for connecting a PC GSI (PC with
Graphical System Interface (GSI)). It is realized as a 9-pin SUB-D
connector (female).
Figure 4-67 CIT connector (CIU)
Front view
(contact side)
nc
RxD
TxD
DTR
GRD
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
DSR
RTS
CTS
nc
nc = not connected
Table 4-43
Pin assignment (CIT connector, CIU)
Point on
connector
Signal name
Meaning
1
not connected
2
RxD
Received Data
3
TxD
Transmitted Data
4
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
5
GRD
Ground
6
DSR
Data Set Ready
7
RTS
Request To Send
8
CTS
Clear To Send
9
not connected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-81
connectors
CIU pack
Cabling
internal cables
The figure below shows the cable connections for the CIU pack.
Figure 4-68 CIU cabling
FAULT
ACTIVE
POW 1
POW 2
TC
MISC
ACO
LED TEST
to/from headphone
or
for metallic test access to the port hardware
for metallic test access to the subscriber line
CHAN/MON
DROP
to PC GSI
CIT
LED
Button
Required cables
Table 4-44
The following table lists the requirements for the CIU cables to the
CIT connector.
Available CIU cables
Cable type
Cable description
Equipment code
PC cable
Serial RS-232 cable with 9-pin SUB-D
(male)
commercially available
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-82
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
connectors
internal cables
AFME3
and AFMDS3 packs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Serial RS-232C connector
The AFME3 (LPA911) and AFMDS3 (LPA901) packs contain the
following connectors:
•
•
10Base-T LAN connector
•
Two sets of E3 (AFME3 pack) or DS3 (AFMDS3 pack)
connectors.
The serial RS-232C connector is used for connecting a PC GSI (PC
with Graphical System Interface (GSI)) running the GSI BB software
for ATM xDSL applications. It is realized as a 9-pin SUB-D connector
(female).
Figure 4-69 Serial RS-232C connector (AFME3/AFMDS3)
Front view
(contact side)
nc
RxD
TxD
DTR
GRD
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
DSR
RTS
CTS
nc
nc = not connected
Table 4-45
Pin assignment (Serial RS-232C connector,
AFME3/AFMDS3)
Point on
connector
Signal name
Meaning
1
not connected
2
RxD
Received Data
3
TxD
Transmitted Data
4
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
5
GRD
Ground
6
DSR
Data Set Ready
7
RTS
Request To Send
8
CTS
Clear To Send
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-83
connectors
internal cables
Table 4-45
AFME3/AFMDS3) (continued)
Point on
connector
Signal name
9
not connected
Meaning
The 10Base-T LAN connector is used for connecting a management
system (e.g. PC GSI or NAM) via Ethernet. It is realized as a 8-pin
RJ45 connector (female).
Figure 4-70 10Base-T LAN connector (AFME3/AFMDS3)
Front view
(contact side)
nc
nc
LAN_RDP/RX+
LAN_TDP/TX+
Table 4-46
Point on
connector
E3/DS3 connectors
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
nc
LAN_RDN/RXnc
LAN_TDN/TX-
Pin assignment (10Base-T LAN connector,
AFME3/AFMDS3)
Signal name
Meaning
1
LAN_TDP/TX+
Transmit Data Positive
2
LAN_TDN/TX–
Transmit Data Negative
3
LAN_RDP/RX+
Receive Data Positive
4
not connected
5
not connected
6
LAN_RDN/RX–
7
not connected
8
not connected
9
not connected
Receive Data Negative
The E3/DS3 connectors are used for connecting E3/DS3 signals. The
connectors TX1 and RX1 (upstream) must be connected via coax
cables to the ATM backbone. The connectors TX2 and RX2
(downstream) must be connected via coax cables to the next
daisy-chained AnyMedia ® Shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-84
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
connectors
internal cables
All E3/DS3 connectors are realized as BNC.
Figure 4-71 E3/DS3 connectors (AFME3/AFMDS3)
1
1
E3/DS3 (port 1)
TX-1
RX-1
E3/DS3 (port 2)
TX-2
RX-2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-85
connectors
Cabling
internal cables
The figure below shows the cable connections for the AFME3 and
AFMDS3 packs.
Figure 4-72 AFME3/AFMDS3 cabling
Serial port (RS-232C)
to PC GSI for ATM xDSL applications
(Serial interface)
LAN (10Base-T)
(Ethernet interface)
E3/DS3 port 1 (upstream)
E3/DS3 port 2 (downstream)
to/from ATM backbone
or
to/from previous AFME3/AFMDS3 pack
in the daisy chain (upstream)
to/from next AFME3/AFMDS3 pack
in the daisy chain (downstream)
1
1
TX-1
RX-1
TX-2
RX-2
to/from next AnyMedia shelf in the
daisy chain for local daisy chaining
or
back to the ATM backbone for remote
daisy-chaining
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-86
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
connectors
Cables
Table 4-47
internal cables
The following table lists the cables to the AFME3/AFMDS3 which
can be used for management purposes. The external E3/DS3 cables
are shown “Installing E3/DS3 cables for AFME3/AFMDS3 packs Overview” (5-9).
Cable type
Cable description
PC cable
Serial RS-232 cable with
9-pin SUB-D (male)
LAN cable
LAN inband management
cable to connect NB/BB
Ethernet port (10Base-T,
crossover wiring), 9-pin
SUB-D (male)/RJ45 (male)
LAN cable to HUB or PC
LAN cable RJ45 to RJ45
(straight through for HUB,
crossover for PC)
Length
Equipment code
commercially
available
4 ft (≈ 1.2 m)
ED7C829-32 Gr6 or
ED7C829-32 Gr6A1
commercially
available
Notes:
1.
Orderable item required if inband management for narrowband is supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-87
connectors
internal cables
AFME1
pack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The AFME1 pack (LPA941) contains the following connectors:
•
•
•
E1 connector.
NOTE: The AFME1 pack supports an impedance of 120 Ω for
symmetrical cabling (twisted pair). For 75 Ω cables converters have to
be used.
(female).
Figure 4-73 Serial RS-232C connector (AFME1)
Front view
(contact side)
nc
RxD
TxD
DTR
GRD
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
DSR
RTS
CTS
nc
nc = not connected
Table 4-48
AFME1)
Point on
connector
Signal name
Meaning
1
not connected
2
RxD
Received Data
3
TxD
Transmitted Data
4
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
5
GRD
Ground
6
DSR
Data Set Ready
7
RTS
Request To Send
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-88
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
connectors
AFME1 pack
internal cables
Table 4-48
AFME1) (continued)
Point on
connector
Signal name
Meaning
8
CTS
Clear To Send
9
not connected
Figure 4-74 10Base-T LAN connector (AFME1)
Front view
(contact side)
nc
nc
LAN_RDP/RX+
LAN_TDP/TX+
Table 4-49
Point on
connector
E1 connector
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
nc
LAN_RDN/RXnc
LAN_TDN/TX-
Pin assignment (10Base-T LAN connector, AFME1)
Signal name
Meaning
1
LAN_TDP/TX+
2
LAN_TDN/TX–
3
LAN_RDP/RX+
4
not connected
5
not connected
6
LAN_RDN/RX–
7
not connected
8
not connected
9
not connected
The E1 connector is used for connecting the E1 cable from the Digital
Distribution Frame (DDF) and provides 8 E1 ports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-89
connectors
AFME1 pack
internal cables
(upstream/downstream each). It is realized as a 37-pin SUB-D
connector (female).
Figure 4-75 E1 connector (AFME1)
Front view
(contact side)
37
nc
36
RE1D8R
35
E1 port 8 (Ring)
RE1U8T
RE1D7R
E1 port 7 (Ring)
RE1U7T
RE1D6R
E1 port 6 (Ring)
RE1U6T
34
33
32
31
30
29
RE1U5T
28
RE1D4R
27
RE1U4T
26
RE1D3R
25
RE1U3T
24
RE1D2R
23
E1 port 4 (Ring)
E1 port 3 (Ring)
E1 port 2 (Ring)
RE1U2T
RE1D1R
E1 port 1 (Ring)
RE1U1T
18
nc
17
TE1D8R
16
TE1U8T
15
TE1D7R
14
TE1U7T
13
TE1D6R
12
TE1U6T
11
RE1D5R
E1 port 5 (Ring)
19
22
21
20
E1 port 8 (Tip)
E1 port 7 (Tip)
E1 port 6 (Tip)
TE1D5R
E1 port 5 (Tip)
10
TE1U5T
9
TE1D4R
E1 port 4 (Tip)
8
TE1U4T
7
TE1D3R
E1 port 3 (Tip)
6
TE1U3T
5
TE1D2R
4
TE1U2T
3
TE1D1R
2
TE1U1T
E1 port 2 (Tip)
E1 port 1 (Tip)
1
nc
nc = not connected
Table 4-50
Point on
connector
Signal name
Meaning
1
not connected
2
TE1U1T
Tip, E1 port 1 (Up)
3
TE1D1R
Tip, E1 port 1 (Down)
4
TE1U2T
Tip, E1 port 2 (Up)
5
TE1D2R
6
TE1U3T
Tip, E1 port 3 (Up)
7
TE1D3R
8
TE1U4T
Tip, E1 port 4 (Up)
9
TE1D4R
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-90
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
connectors
AFME1 pack
internal cables
Table 4-50
Point on
connector
(continued)
Signal name
Meaning
10
TE1U5T
Tip, E1 port 5 (Up)
11
TE1D5R
12
TE1U6T
Tip, E1 port 6 (Up)
13
TE1D6R
14
TE1U7T
Tip, E1 port 7 (Up)
15
TE1D7R
16
TE1U8T
Tip, E1 port 8 (Up)
17
TE1D8R
18
not connected
19
connected to pin 37
20
RE1U1T
Ring, E1 port 1 (Up)
21
RE1D1R
Ring, E1 port 1 (Down)
22
RE1U2T
23
RE1D2R
24
RE1U3T
25
RE1D3R
26
RE1U4T
27
RE1D4R
28
RE1U5T
29
RE1D5R
30
RE1U6T
31
RE1D6R
32
RE1U7T
33
RE1D7R
34
RE1U8T
35
RE1D8R
36
not connected
37
connected to pin 19
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-91
connectors
AFME1 pack
Cabling
internal cables
The figure below shows the cable connections for the AFME1 pack.
Figure 4-76 AFME1 cabling
(Serial interface)
LAN (10Base-T)
E1 interface
Cables
Table 4-51
E1
to DDF
The following table lists the cable sto the AFME1 which can be used
for management purposes. The external E1 cables are shown in
“Installing the E1 cables to the AFME1 - Overview” (5-32).
Cable type
Cable description
PC cable
Serial RS-232 cable with
9-pin SUB-D (male)
Length
Equipment code
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-92
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
connectors
AFME1 pack
Table 4-51
internal cables
(continued)
Cable type
Cable description
Length
Equipment code
LAN cable
LAN inband management
cable to connect NB/BB
Ethernet port (10Base-T,
crossover wiring), 9-pin
SUB-D (male)/RJ45 (male)
4 ft (≈ 1.2 m)
ED7C829-32 Gr6 or
ED7C829-32 Gr6A1
LAN cable to
HUB or PC
LAN cable RJ45 to RJ45
(straight through for HUB,
crossover for PC)
Notes:
1.
Orderable item required if inband management for narrowband is supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-93
connectors
internal cables
AFMO
pack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The AFMO pack (LPA920B) contains the following connectors:
•
•
•
Two optical STM-1/OC-3 connectors
•
Cross-couple connector.
(female).
Figure 4-77 Serial RS-232C connector (AFMO)
Front view
(contact side)
nc
RxD
TxD
DTR
GRD
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
DSR
RTS
CTS
nc
nc = not connected
Table 4-52
Pin assignment (Serial RS-232C connector, AFMO)
Point on
connector
Signal name
Meaning
1
not connected
2
RxD
Received Data
3
TxD
Transmitted Data
4
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
5
GRD
Ground
6
DSR
Data Set Ready
7
RTS
Request To Send
8
CTS
Clear To Send
9
not connected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-94
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
connectors
AFMO pack
internal cables
Figure 4-78 10Base-T LAN connector (AFMO)
Front view
(contact side)
nc
nc
LAN_RDP/RX+
LAN_TDP/TX+
Table 4-53
Point on
connector
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
nc
LAN_RDN/RXnc
LAN_TDN/TX-
Pin assignment (10Base-T LAN connector, AFMO)
Signal name
Meaning
1
LAN_TDP/TX+
2
LAN_TDN/TX–
3
LAN_RDP/RX+
4
not connected
5
not connected
6
LAN_RDN/RX–
7
not connected
8
not connected
9
not connected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-95
connectors
AFMO pack
Optical STM-1/OC-3
connectors
internal cables
The optical connectors are used for connecting STM-1/OC-3 signals
from the optical ATM feeder interface. Each optical port supports two
single SC-type connectors or one duplex SC-type connector.
TX-1
10B A
Figure 4-79 Optical ports (AFMO)
TX-2
RX-1
Optical port 1
CROSS COUPLE
RX-2
Optical port 2
Cross-couple connector
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-96
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
connectors
AFMO pack
Cabling
internal cables
The figure below shows the cable connections for the AFMO pack.
Figure 4-80 AFMO cabling
LPA920
n:m
CONSOLE
(Serial interface)
LAN (10Base-T)
10BASE-T
RTH4455AAB
FLT
ACTV
ALM
FAC1
FAC2
TX-1
to/from optical STM-1/OC-3
ATM feeder interface
or
to/from previous AnyMedia shelf in the
optical daisy chain
TX-2
RX-1
Optical port 1
towards the next AnyMedia shelf for
optical daisy-chaining
CROSS COUPLE
RX-2
Optical port 2
Cables
Table 4-54
Cross-couple connector for duplex
operation of 2 AFMOs
The following table lists the cables to the AFMO which can be used
for management purposes. The external fiber cables are shown in
“Installing fiber cables for AFMO packs - Overview” (5-54).
Cable type
Cable description
PC cable
Serial RS-232 cable with 9-pin
SUB-D (male)
Length
Equipment code
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-97
connectors
AFMO pack
Table 4-54
internal cables
(continued)
Cable type
Cable description
Length
Equipment code
LAN cable
LAN inband management cable to
connect NB/BB Ethernet port
(10Base-T, crossover wiring),
9-pin SUB-D (male)/RJ45 (male)
4 ft (≈ 1.2 m)
ED7C829-32 Gr6
LAN cable to
HUB or PC
LAN cable RJ45 to RJ45 (straight
through for HUB, crossover for
PC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-98
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
connectors
internal cables
IPFM
pack (for LAG 1900 Shelf only)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The IPFM pack (LPI902) contains the following connectors:
•
•
•
Two 100Base-T LAN connectors (Fast Ethernet)
•
Two Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC) slots.
for ATM VoIP applications. It is realized as a 9-pin SUB-D connector
(female).
Figure 4-81 Serial RS-232C connector (IPFM)
Front view
(contact side)
nc
RxD
TxD
DTR
GRD
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
DSR
RTS
CTS
nc
nc = not connected
Table 4-55
Pin assignment (Serial RS-232C connector, IPFM)
Point on
connector
Signal name
Meaning
1
not connected
2
RxD
Received Data
3
TxD
Transmitted Data
4
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
5
GRD
Ground
6
DSR
Data Set Ready
7
RTS
Request To Send
8
CTS
Clear To Send
9
not connected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-99
connectors
internal cables
Figure 4-82 10Base-T LAN connector (IPFM)
Front view
(contact side)
nc
nc
LAN_RDP/RX+
LAN_TDP/TX+
Table 4-56
Point on
connector
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
nc
LAN_RDN/RXnc
LAN_TDN/TX-
Signal name
Meaning
1
LAN_TDP/TX+
2
LAN_TDN/TX–
3
LAN_RDP/RX+
4
not connected
5
not connected
6
LAN_RDN/RX–
7
not connected
8
not connected
9
not connected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-100
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
connectors
100Base-T LAN connectors
internal cables
The 100Base-T LAN connectors are used for connecting external
100Base-T LAN equipment. It is realized as a 8-pin RJ45 connector
(female).
Figure 4-83 100Base-T LAN connector (IPFM)
Front view
(contact side)
nc
nc
LAN_RDP/RX+
LAN_TDP/TX+
Table 4-57
Point on
connector
Gigabit Interface Converter
slots
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
nc
LAN_RDN/RXnc
LAN_TDN/TX-
Signal name
Meaning
1
LAN_TDP/TX+
2
LAN_TDN/TX–
3
LAN_RDP/RX+
4
not connected
5
not connected
6
LAN_RDN/RX–
7
not connected
8
not connected
9
not connected
The Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC) slots are used for attaching
separate GBICs as interfaces to the GbE uplinks. They are designed as
1000Base-SX/LX uplink interfaces.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-101
connectors
Cabling
internal cables
The figure below shows the cable connections for the IPFM pack.
Figure 4-84 IPFM cabling
Cables
Table 4-58
to PC GSI for ATM VoIP applications
(Serial interface)
Management interface (LAN 10Base-T)
to PC GSI for ATM VoIP applications
Fast Ethernet (uplinks)
to IP network
Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC) slots
for GbE uplinks
to IP network
The following table lists the cables to the IPFM which can be used
for management purposes. Details on the uplinks are shown in
“Installing IPFM uplink feeders” (5-82).
Cable type
Cable description
Length
Equipment code
PC cable
Serial RS-232 cable with 9-pin
SUB-D (male)
LAN cable to
HUB or PC
LAN cable RJ45 to RJ45 (straight
through for HUB, crossover for
PC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-102
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
connectors
internal cables
SHDSL
application pack (LPS510)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The SHDSL application pack (LPS510) contains the following
connectors:
•
SHDSL connector
•
E1 connector.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-103
connectors
SHDSL connector for
8 ports
internal cables
This connector is used for SHDSL cables to SHDSL application packs
(LPS510) with 8 duplex-mode SHDSL ports. The figure below shows
the pin assignment of this connector.
Figure 4-85 Pin assignment (SHDSL AP cable connector, 8 ports)
Shown is the wiring/soldering side of the
AP cable connector of the a/b-cable
(identical to the contact side of the AP)
Short
Blue binder
Orange binder
not used
Ring
BL/Y
Tip
Y/BL
R32
T32
T30
not used
not used
BK/BR
BK/BR
G/BK
G/BK
BK/G
BK/G
O/BK
O/BK
BK/O
BK/O
BL/BK
BK/BL
BK/BL
S/R
S/R
R27
R26
R25
R24
not used
R23
T23
R22
T22
not used
R21
T21
not used
BR/R
R/BR
R/BR
G/R
G/R
R/G
R/G
O/R
O/R
R/O
R/O
BL/R
BL/R
R/BL
R/BL
S/W
S/W
W/S
BR/W
W/BR
W/BR
G/W
G/W
W/G
W/G
O/W
O/W
W/O
W/O
R18
T18
not used
R/S
W/S
R19
Ring
BL/W
Tip
W/BL
R17
T17
36
2
35
1
Short
R14
not used
T14
R13
not used
R12
T12
R11
not used
not used
T11
not used
T10
R9
not used
T9
T8
R7
T7
R6
T6
R5
T5
R4
T4
R3
T3
R2
BL/W
Ring
W/BL
Tip
T2
R1
T1
SHDSL8 copper pair
for SHDSL port 8
SHDSL7 copper pair
for SHDSL port 7
SHDSL6 copper pair
for SHDSL port 6
SHDSL5 copper pair
for SHDSL port 5
SHDSL4 copper pair
for SHDSL port 4
SHDSL3 copper pair
for SHDSL port 3
SHDSL2 copper pair
for SHDSL port 2
SHDSL1 copper pair
for SHDSL port 1
and bottom pair (1 & 35)
are each shorted to alert the
transmission rate of 192 to 2048 kbit/s (line rate
E1 connector for 8 E1
ports
not used
The top pair (34 & 68)
For the SHDSL AP only 8 SHDSL ports with 1
copper pair each are used. Each of them have a
not used
T15
R10
R/S
BR/R
BR/W
T19
not used
R15
R20
T20
not used
T16
R8
T24
not used
R16
T13
BL/BK
T25
not used
Tip
BR/BK
T26
not used
Ring
Y/BL
BR/BK
R28
T27
BL/Y
BK/S
T29
T28
not used
33
BK/S
R29
not used
67
S/BK
T31
R30
not used
34
S/BK
R31
not used
68
up to 2064 baud).
circuit pack that the connector
By default SHDSL ports 5 to 8 are routed
to the unstructured E1 ports 1 to 4 until
other provisioning. For pinning of
these E1 ports see next figure.
is attached
Wiring side
This connector provides 4 unstructured E1 ports (4 E1 ports
upstream/downstream each). The 8x2 twisted pair cable must have an
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-104
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
connectors
internal cables
impedance of 120 Ω. The figure below shows the pin assignment of
this connector.
Figure 4-86 Pin assignment (E1 cable connector, LPS510)
Shown is the wiring/soldering side of the E1 cable
connector of the E1 cable for the 4 unstructured E1 ports
(identical to the contact side of the E1 connector on the SHDSL AP).
1
11
DSX1D1R
BK
2
12
BK
DSX1U1R
DSX1D1T
R
3
13
Y
DSX1U1T
DSX1D2R
BK
4
14
BK
DSX1U2R
DSX1D2T
WH
5
15
BR
DSX1U2T
DSX1D3R
BK
6
16
BK
DSX1U3R
DSX1D3T
G
7
17
OR
DSX1U3T
DSX1D4R
BK
8
18
R
DSX1U4R
DSX1D4T
BL
9
19
WH
DSX1U4T
10
20
E1 port 1_D
E1 port 2_D
E1 port 3_D
E1 port 4_D
By default the unstructured E1 ports
are routed to the duplex SHDSL ports 5 to 8 until
until other provisioning.
Short
E1 port 1_U
Upstream side (Tx; transmit)
Downstream side (Rx; receive)
Short
E1 port 2_U
E1 port 3_U
E1 port 4_U
DSX1U4T stands for: DSX1 = E1 signal
U = Upstream
4 = E1 port 4
T = tip wire
Wiring side
NOTE: Four pins on this 20-pin connector have to be shorted so that
the AnyMedia ® Access System can verify whether an E1 cable is
connected or not. The connector pins 1/11 and 10/20 are shorted as
shown in the figure above.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-105
connectors
Cabling
internal cables
The figure below shows the cable connections for the LPS510
application pack.
Figure 4-87 LPS510 cabling
LPS510
n:m
FAULT
1
E1 connector
to/from E1 equipment
E1
SHDSL connector
RTH4455AAB
to/from subscriber
For the E1 cables refer to Table 5-3, “Length of E1 cables for the
SHDSL AP LPS510” (5-38).
As SHDSL cable use one of the shielded a/b-cables (1x32 pairs)
ED818-30 GR1x:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-106
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
connectors
Table 4-59
internal cables
Available LPS510 cables
Cable type
Cable description
Length
Equipment code
SHDSL cable
Shielded a/b cable (1x32 pairs)
50 ft (≈ 15.0 m)
ED7C818-30 Gr1
100 ft (≈ 30.5 m)
ED7C818-30 Gr1A
200 ft (≈ 61.0 m)
ED7C818-30 Gr1B
300 ft (≈ 91.5 m)
ED7C818-30 Gr1C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-107
connectors
internal cables
Optical
application pack (OAP)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Faceplate
This application pack is used for fiber connecting from the shelf to
the Optical Controller Pack (OCP) in the ONU. The fiber of the
optical link is connected to the pack via an optical SC-type connector
located on the OAP faceplate (see figure below).
Figure 4-88 OAP faceplate
LPF5
00
FAULT
CLF
SC-type fiber connector
Optical parameters
The table below shows the transmit/receive parameters for the laser
transmitter/receiver of the OAP which are identical to the parameters
of the OCP inside the ONU.
Table 4-60
Optical parameter
Value/Remark
Laser type
Laser transmitter of Laser Class I
Wavelength
1310 ±50 nm (upstream)
1550 ±50 nm (downstream)
Fiber
Single-mode, bidirectional, WDM
(wavelength division multilplexing)
Connector type
Single connector, SC-type
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-108
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
connectors
internal cables
Table 4-60
(continued)
Optical parameter
Value/Remark
Optical link range
about 15 km1
Optical laser transmit average
power
–8 dBm min., ±2 dBm max.
Optical receive sensitivity
–23.5 dBm or better,
with 12 dB loss budget, including
fiber, connectors, splices
Reflection
max. –20 dBm
Bit error rate (BER)
≤ 1x10-10
Automatic Laser Shutdown
(ALS)
No
Due to the transmitter/receiver characteristics used for the OAP the
optical power must not be reduced for the receiver side if the OAP is
connected via a short fiber to the OCP in the ONU. For the fiber
connection OAP to OCP (ONU side) no attenuation is required.
Cable
Single-mode fiber cable with SC-type connector.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-109
connectors
internal cables
VSIM
application pack (for LAG Shelf only)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
VSIM connector
The VSIM application pack (LPV417) contains the following
connectors:
•
Console (for internal use only)
•
Two 100Base-T LAN connectors (for standalone mode)
•
VSIM connector.
On the VSIM AP the same 32 ports a/b connector is used as for most
POTS APs. The pin assignment of this connector is shown in Figure
4-93, “Pin assignment (POTS AP cable connector, 32 ports)” (4-116)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-110
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
internal cables
connectors
VSIM application pack (for LAG Shelf
only)
The figure below shows the cable connections for the VSIM
Cabling
application pack.
Figure 4-89 LPV417 cabling
LPV417
Lucent
For stand-alone mode
CONSOLE
FAULT
UP2
UP1
EJECT
B34
a/b connector
to/from subscribers
A1
LIFT
TO
INSERT
CONNECTOR
The orderable cables are listed in Table 4-61, “Available a/b cables”
(4-129).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-111
connectors
internal cables
LPZ600
application pack (POTS VoIP)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The LPZ600 application pack (POTS VoIP) contains the following
connectors:
•
POTS connector
•
10/100Base-T LAN connector (for stand-alone mode)
•
Serial RJ45 connector (for stand-alone mode).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-112
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
connectors
POTS connector
internal cables
This connector provides POTS and VoIP service. The figure below
shows the pin assignment of this connector.
Figure 4-90 Pin assignment (POTS connector, LPZ600)
Short
Tip32
Y/BL
64
32
BL/Y
Ring32
Tip31
BK/S
63
31
S/BK
Ring31
Tip30
BK/BR
BR/BK
Ring30
Tip29
BK/G
G/BK
Ring29
Tip28
BK/O
O/BK
Ring28
Tip27
BK/BL
BL/BK
Ring27
Tip26
R/S
S/R
Ring26
Tip25
R/BR
BR/R
Ring25
Tip24
R/G
G/R
Ring24
Tip23
R/O
O/R
Ring23
Tip22
R/BL
BL/R
Ring22
Tip21
W/S
S/W
Ring21
Tip20
W/BR
BR/W
Ring20
Tip19
W/G
G/W
Ring19
Tip18
W/O
O/W
Ring18
Tip17
W/BL
BL/W
Ring17
Tip16
Y/BL
BL/Y
Ring16
Tip15
BK/S
S/BK
Ring15
Tip14
BK/BR
BR/BK
Ring14
Tip13
BK/G
G/BK
Ring13
Tip12
BK/O
O/BK
Ring12
Tip11
BK/BL
BL/BK
Ring11
Tip10
R/S
S/R
Ring10
Tip9
R/BR
BR/R
Ring9
Tip8
R/G
G/R
Ring8
Tip7
R/O
O/R
Ring7
Tip6
R/BL
BL/R
Ring6
Tip5
W/S
S/W
Ring5
Tip4
W/BR
BR/W
Ring4
Tip3
W/G
G/W
Ring3
Tip
Tip2
W/O
O/W
Ring2
Tip1
W/BL
BL/W
Ring1
34
2
36
33
12
Short
Wiring side
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-113
connectors
Cabling
internal cables
The figure below shows the cable connections for the LPZ600
application pack.
Figure 4-91 LPZ600 cabling
LPZ600
FAULT
POTS connector
to/from subscriber
LAN
CONSOLE
(4-129).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-114
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
connectors
internal cables
Other
application packs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Faceplate
The figure below is valid for all application packs except the OAP
(see section “Optical application pack (OAP)” (4-108)) and the
SHDSL application pack (see section “SHDSL application pack
(LPS510)” (4-103)).
Figure 4-92 Application pack faceplate
AP connector
Use of the AP connectors
The 68-pin cable connectors of the application packs and the
a/b-cables are uniformly designed and connected. The lower opposite
pins 1 and 35 and the upper opposite pins 33 and 68 are shorted for
checking if the cable is connected. Only the number of Tip/Ring wires
used differs per application pack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-115
connectors
POTS application pack
connector (for up to 32
ports)
internal cables
This connector is used for the application packs LPZ100, LPZ110,
LPZ120, LPZ121, LPZ122, LPZ123 and LPP100 (24 Z ports). The
figure below shows the pin assignment of this connector. The
orderable cables are listed in Table 4-61, “Available a/b cables”
(4-129).
Figure 4-93 Pin assignment (POTS AP cable connector, 32 ports)
Short
Blue binder
Orange binder
Z port 32*
Ring
BL/Y
Tip
Y/BL
R32
T32
T31
R30
Z port 30*
T30
R29
Z port 29*
Z port 28*
T29
Z port 26*
Z port 24
T27
R26
R25
T25
R24
Z port 22
R23
T23
R22
T22
Z port 21
R21
T21
Z port 20
R19
T19
Z port 18
R18
T18
Z port 17
Ring
R17
T17
Ring
Y/BL
Tip
R16
Tip
R15
BK/S
BK/S
BR/BK
BR/BK
BK/BR
BK/BR
G/BK
G/BK
BK/G
BK/G
O/BK
O/BK
T15
R14
BK/O
BK/O
BL/BK
BK/BL
BK/BL
S/R
S/R
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
R/BR
G/R
G/R
R/G
R/G
O/R
O/R
R/O
R/O
BL/R
BL/R
R/BL
R/BL
S/W
S/W
W/S
W/S
BR/W
BR/W
W/BR
W/BR
G/W
G/W
W/G
W/G
O/W
O/W
R12
R11
R9
1
Z port 9
T9
R6
Z port 8
Z port 7
Z port 6
T6
R5
Z port 5
T5
R4
Z port 4
T4
R3
Z port 3
T3
R2
W/BL
35
Z port 10
T7
W/O
For the AP Periodic Pulse Metering
Z port 11
T11
R7
BL/W
2
Z port 12
T12
T8
W/O
36
Z port 13
T10
BL/W
W/BL
Z port 14
R13
R10
R/S
BR/R
Z port 15
T14
T13
BL/BK
(LPP100B) only 24 Z ports are used.
Z port 16
T16
S/BK
R20
T20
Z port 19
BL/Y
R8
T24
Z port 23
33
R27
T26
Z port 25*
67
R28
T28
Z port 27*
34
S/BK
R31
Z port 31*
68
Ring
Tip
Z port 2
T2
R1
Z port 1
T1
Short
The LPZ110 is equipped with 32
low-pass filters (G.992 Annex A) for
Y-connecting to the ADSL32p AP (LPA432)
with 32 high-pass filters (G.992 AnnexA).
POTS application pack
connector (for 64 ports)
is attached.
Wiring side
This connector is used for the application packs LPZ640 and LPZ641.
The figures below show the pin assignment of this connector. The
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-116
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
connectors
internal cables
(4-129).
Figure 4-94 POTS AP cable (64 ports)
P1
P2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-117
connectors
internal cables
Figure 4-95 Pin assignment (POTS AP cable connector P1, 64
ports)
Short
Orange
binder
Blue
binder
Tip32
Y/BL
64
32
BL/Y
Ring32
Tip31
BK/S
63
31
S/BK
Ring31
Tip30
BK/BR
BR/BK
Ring30
Tip29
BK/G
G/BK
Ring29
Tip28
BK/O
O/BK
Ring28
Tip27
BK/BL
BL/BK
Ring27
Tip26
R/S
S/R
Ring26
Tip25
R/BR
BR/R
Ring25
Tip24
R/G
G/R
Ring24
Tip23
R/O
O/R
Ring23
Tip22
R/BL
BL/R
Ring22
Tip21
W/S
S/W
Ring21
Tip20
W/BR
BR/W
Ring20
Tip19
W/G
G/W
Ring19
Tip18
W/O
O/W
Ring18
Tip17
W/BL
BL/W
Ring17
Tip16
Y/BL
BL/Y
Ring16
Tip15
BK/S
S/BK
Ring15
Tip14
BK/BR
BR/BK
Ring14
Tip13
BK/G
G/BK
Ring13
Tip12
BK/O
O/BK
Ring12
Tip11
BK/BL
BL/BK
Ring11
Tip10
R/S
S/R
Ring10
Tip9
R/BR
BR/R
Ring9
Tip8
R/G
G/R
Ring8
Tip7
R/O
O/R
Ring7
Tip6
R/BL
BL/R
Ring6
Tip5
W/S
S/W
Ring5
Tip4
W/BR
BR/W
Ring4
Tip3
W/G
G/W
Ring3
Tip
Tip2
W/O
O/W
Ring2
Tip1
W/BL
BL/W
Ring1
34
2
36
33
12
Orange
binder
Blue
binder
Short
Wiring side
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-118
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
connectors
internal cables
Figure 4-96 Pin assignment (POTS AP cable connector P2, 64
ports)
Short
Brown
binder
Green
binder
Tip64
Y/BL
64
32
BL/Y
Ring64
Tip63
BK/S
63
31
S/BK
Ring63
Tip62
BK/BR
BR/BK
Ring62
Tip61
BK/G
G/BK
Ring61
Tip60
BK/O
O/BK
Ring60
Tip59
BK/BL
BL/BK
Ring59
Tip58
R/S
S/R
Ring58
Tip57
R/BR
BR/R
Ring57
Tip56
R/G
G/R
Ring56
Tip55
R/O
O/R
Ring55
Tip54
R/BL
BL/R
Ring54
Tip53
W/S
S/W
Ring53
Tip52
W/BR
BR/W
Ring52
Tip51
W/G
G/W
Ring51
Tip50
W/O
O/W
Ring50
Tip49
W/BL
BL/W
Ring49
Tip48
Y/BL
BL/Y
Ring48
Tip47
BK/S
S/BK
Ring47
Tip46
BK/BR
BR/BK
Ring46
Tip45
BK/G
G/BK
Ring45
Tip44
BK/O
O/BK
Ring44
Tip43
BK/BL
BL/BK
Ring43
Tip42
R/S
S/R
Ring42
Tip41
R/BR
BR/R
Ring41
Tip40
R/G
G/R
Ring40
Tip39
R/O
O/R
Ring39
Tip38
R/BL
BL/R
Ring38
Tip37
W/S
S/W
Ring37
Tip36
W/BR
BR/W
Ring36
Tip35
W/G
G/W
Ring35
Tip
Tip34
W/O
O/W
Ring34
Tip33
W/BL
BL/W
Ring33
34
2
36
33
12
Brown
binder
Green
binder
Short
Wiring side
Test application pack
connector
This connector is used for the application packs TAP100 and TAP
101. The figure below shows the pin assignment of this connector.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-119
connectors
internal cables
(4-129).
Figure 4-97 Pin assignment (TAP cable connector)
Short
Blue binder
Orange binder
Ring
BL/Y
Tip
Y/BL
R32
not used
T32
T31
R30
not used
T30
R29
not used
34
67
33
S/BK
R31
not used
68
T29
T28
T27
BK/S
BR/BK
BK/BR
BK/BR
G/BK
G/BK
BK/G
BK/G
O/BK
O/BK
R25
not used
T25
BK/O
BK/O
BL/BK
BK/BL
BK/BL
S/R
S/R
R/S
R/S
BR/R
BR/R
R/BR
R/BR
G/R
G/R
R/G
R/G
O/R
O/R
R24
not used
R23
not used
R/O
R/O
BL/R
BL/R
R/BL
R/BL
S/W
S/W
W/S
W/S
BR/W
BR/W
W/BR
W/BR
G/W
G/W
W/G
W/G
O/W
O/W
T23
R22
not used
T22
R21
not used
T21
R20
not used
T20
R19
not used
T19
R18
not used
T18
T17
R14
R12
R11
R10
R9
R7
not used
not used
T7
R6
not used
T6
R5
not used
T5
R4
not used
T4
R3
not used
T3
R2
W/BL
W/BL
Tip
Short
not used
T8
Tip
not used
T9
Ring
1
not used
T10
W/O
35
not used
T11
BL/W
not used
T12
W/O
2
not used
R13
BL/W
36
not used
T14
Ring
R17
not used
T15
R8
T24
not used
T16
T13
BL/BK
T26
R16
R15
BK/S
R26
not used
Tip
BR/BK
R27
not used
Ring
Y/BL
S/BK
R28
not used
BL/Y
TAP Facility (FAC)*
T2
R1
TAP Equipment (EQ)
T1
*For the TAP10x the test pathTAP_FAC
is currently not supported.
is attached.
For the TAP10x
only 2 a/b ports are used
ISDN application pack
connector
Wiring side
This connector is used for the following application packs:
•
LPU112 (12 U ports)
•
LPU132 (32 U ports)
•
LPU430 (16 U ports, ETSI V5 Shelf only)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-120
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
connectors
internal cables
•
LPU432 (32 U ports, ETSI V5 Shelf only)
•
LPU508 (8 U ports, LAG 1900 Shelf only).
The figure below shows the pin assignment of this connector. The
(4-129).
Figure 4-98 Pin assignment (ISDN AP cable connector)
Short
Blue binder
Orange binder
ISDN U port 32
Ring
BL/Y
Tip
Y/BL
R32
T32
ISDN U port 29
ISDN U port 28
T30
R29
T29
T25
ISDN U port 24
BK/BR
BK/BR
G/BK
G/BK
BK/G
BK/G
O/BK
O/BK
BK/O
BK/O
BL/BK
BK/BL
BK/BL
S/R
S/R
R/S
R/S
BR/R
BR/R
R/BR
R/BR
G/R
G/R
T23
ISDN U port 22
R22
T22
ISDN U port 21
R21
T21
ISDN U port 20
O/R
R/O
R/O
BL/R
BL/R
R/BL
R/BL
S/W
S/W
W/S
W/S
BR/W
W/BR
W/BR
G/W
G/W
W/G
W/G
O/W
O/W
W/O
W/O
BL/W
BL/W
R19
R18
T18
ISDN U port 17
R/G
O/R
BR/W
T19
ISDN U port 18
R/G
R20
T20
ISDN U port 19
Ring
R17
T17
T15
R14
Tip
W/BL
For the ISDN AP
W/BL
36
2
35
1
Short
ISDN U port 15
ISDN U port 14
T14
R13
R12
ISDN U port 13
ISDN U port 12
T12
R11
ISDN U port 11
T11
R10
ISDN U port 10
T10
R9
ISDN U port 9
T9
R8
R23
ISDN U port 16
T16
T13
BL/BK
R24
R16
R15
BK/S
T24
ISDN U port 23
Tip
BR/BK
T26
ISDN U port 25
Ring
Y/BL
BK/S
R26
R25
BL/Y
S/BK
R27
T27
ISDN U port 26
33
R28
T28
ISDN U port 27
67
BR/BK
T31
R30
ISDN U port 30
34
S/BK
R31
ISDN U port 31
68
ISDN U port 8
T8
R7
ISDN U port 7
T7
R6
ISDN U port 6
T6
R5
ISDN U port 5
T5
R4
ISDN U port 4
T4
R3
ISDN U port 3
T3
R2
Ring
Tip
ISDN U port 2
T2
R1
ISDN U port 1
T1
- LPU112 only 12 U ports are used
- LPU430 only 16 U ports are used
- LPU508 only 8 U ports are used.
is attached.
Wiring side
ADSL16p application pack
connector (16 ports)
This connector provides POTS service and is used for the application
pack LPA416. The figure below shows the pin assignment of this
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-121
connectors
internal cables
connector. The orderable cables are listed in Table 4-61, “Available
a/b cables” (4-129).
Figure 4-99 Pin assignment (ADSL16p AP cable connector)
Shot
Blue binder
Orange binder
Z port 16
Ring
BL/Y
Tip
Y/BL
R32
T32
R31
ADSL port 16
T31
R30
Z port 15
T30
R29
ADSL port 15
Z port 14
T29
68
34
67
33
Z port 13
T27
R26
T26
R25
ADSL port 13
T25
R24
Z port 12
BK/S
BK/S
BR/BK
BR/BK
BK/BR
BK/BR
G/BK
G/BK
BK/G
BK/G
O/BK
O/BK
T24
T23
R22
Z port 11
T22
R21
ADSL port 11
T21
T20
R19
ADSL port 10
Z port 9
T19
R18
T18
Ring
R17
ADSL port 9
T17
T16
T15
R14
BK/O
BK/O
BL/BK
BK/BL
BK/BL
S/R
S/R
T12
T11
R/S
BR/R
Ring
R/BR
R/BR
Tip
G/R
G/R
O/R
R/O
R/O
BL/R
BL/R
R/BL
R/BL
S/W
S/W
W/S
W/S
BR/W
BR/W
W/BR
W/BR
G/W
G/W
W/G
W/G
O/W
O/W
Tip
W/O
W/O
BL/W
BL/W
W/BL
is attached
W/BL
36
2
35
1
Z port 6
R11
R/S
R/G
ADSL port 7
R12
BR/R
O/R
Z port 7
R13
R10
R/G
ADSL port 8
T14
T13
BL/BK
Z port 8
R15
ADSL port 6
Z port 5
T10
R9
T9
ADSL port 5
Z port 4
T8
R7
T7
ADSL port 4
R6
T6
R5
Z port 3
ADSL port 3
T5
R4
R20
Z port 10
R16
R8
R23
ADSL port 12
Tip
S/BK
R27
ADSL port 14
Ring
Y/BL
S/BK
R28
T28
BL/Y
T4
Z port 2
R3
T3
R2
Ring
Tip
T2
ADSL port 2
Z port 1
R1
T1
ADSL port 1
Short
means cabling from MDF switch side
means cabling to MDF subscriber side
Wiring side
ADSL16i application pack
This connector provides ISDN service and is used for the application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-122
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
connectors
internal cables
Figure 4-100 Pin assignment (ADSL16i AP cable connector)
Short
Blue binder
Orange binder
ISDN port 16
Ring
BL/Y
Tip
Y/BL
R32
T32
R31
ADSL port 16
T31
R30
ISDN port 15
T30
R29
ADSL port 15
ISDN port 14
T29
68
34
67
33
ISDN port 13
T27
R26
T26
R25
ADSL port 13
T25
R24
ISDN port 12
BK/S
BK/S
BR/BK
BR/BK
BK/BR
BK/BR
G/BK
G/BK
BK/G
BK/G
O/BK
O/BK
T24
T23
R22
ISDN port 11
T22
R21
ADSL port 11
T21
T20
R19
ADSL port 10
ISDN port 9
T19
R18
T18
Ring
R17
ADSL port 9
T17
T16
T15
R14
BK/O
BK/O
BL/BK
BK/BL
BK/BL
S/R
S/R
T12
T11
R10
R/S
Ring
R/BR
R/BR
Tip
G/R
G/R
O/R
R/O
R/O
BL/R
BL/R
R/BL
R/BL
S/W
S/W
Tip
R9
T9
T7
W/BR
W/BR
G/W
G/W
W/G
W/G
O/W
O/W
T6
W/O
W/BL
Short
ISDN port 3
ADSL port 3
R4
T4
R2
BL/W
is attached
ADSL port 4
T5
T3
W/O
2
ISDN port 4
ISDN port 2
R3
BL/W
1
ADSL port 5
R6
R5
W/S
BR/W
35
ISDN port 5
T10
R7
W/S
36
ADSL port 6
T8
BR/W
W/BL
ISDN port 6
R11
BR/R
R/G
ADSL port 7
R12
R/S
O/R
ISDN port 7
R13
BR/R
R/G
ADSL port 8
T14
T13
BL/BK
ISDN port 8
R15
R20
ISDN port 10
R16
R8
R23
ADSL port 12
Tip
S/BK
R27
ADSL port 14
Ring
Y/BL
S/BK
R28
T28
BL/Y
Ring
Tip
T2
ADSL port 2
ISDN port 1
R1
T1
ADSL port 1
means cabling from MDF switch side
means cabling to MDF subscriber side
Wiring side
ADSL32p application pack
This connector provides POTS service and is used for the application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-123
connectors
internal cables
Figure 4-101 Pin assignment (ADSL32p AP cable connector)
Shot
Blue binder
Orange binder
ADSL port 32
Ring
BL/Y
Tip
Y/BL
R32
T32
R31
ADSL port 31
T31
R30
ADSL port 30
T30
R29
ADSL port 29
ADSL port 28
T29
68
34
67
33
ADSL port 26
T27
R26
T26
ADSL port 25
R25
T25
R24
ADSL port 24
BK/S
BK/S
BR/BK
BR/BK
BK/BR
BK/BR
G/BK
G/BK
BK/G
BK/G
O/BK
O/BK
T23
R22
ADSL port 22
T22
R21
ADSL port 21
BK/O
BK/O
BL/BK
BK/BL
BK/BL
S/R
S/R
R14
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
R/BR
G/R
G/R
R/G
R/G
O/R
O/R
R/O
R/O
BL/R
BL/R
R/BL
R/BL
S/W
S/W
T21
W/S
W/S
BR/W
BR/W
T20
W/BR
W/BR
G/W
G/W
R19
ADSL port 19
ADSL port 18
T19
W/G
W/G
O/W
O/W
R18
T18
Ring
R17
ADSL port 17
T17
Tip
W/O
W/O
BL/W
BL/W
W/BL
W/BL
36
2
35
1
Short
ADSL port 14
T14
R13
ADSL port 13
R12
T12
ADSL port 12
R11
T11
R10
R/S
BR/R
ADSL port 15
T15
T13
BL/BK
ADSL port 16
T16
R15
ADSL port 11
ADSL port 10
T10
R9
ADSL port 9
T9
ADSL port 8
T8
R7
T7
ADSL port 7
R6
T6
R5
ADSL port 6
ADSL port 5
T5
R4
R20
ADSL port 20
R16
R8
T24
R23
ADSL port 23
Tip
S/BK
R27
ADSL port 27
Ring
Y/BL
S/BK
R28
T28
BL/Y
T4
ADSL port 4
R3
T3
R2
Ring
Tip
T2
ADSL port 3
ADSL port 2
R1
T1
ADSL port 1
is attached
Wiring side
ADSL32i application pack
This connector provides ISDN service and is used for the application
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-124
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
connectors
internal cables
Figure 4-102 Pin assignment (ADSL32i AP cable connector)
Shot
Blue binder
Orange binder
ISDN port 32
Ring
BL/Y
Tip
Y/BL
R32
T32
R31
ISDN port 31
T31
R30
ISDN port 30
T30
R29
ISDN port 29
ISDN port 28
T29
68
34
67
33
ISDN port 26
T27
R26
T26
ISDN port 25
R25
T25
R24
ISDN port 24
BK/S
BK/S
BR/BK
BR/BK
BK/BR
BK/BR
G/BK
G/BK
BK/G
BK/G
O/BK
O/BK
T23
R22
ISDN port 22
T22
R21
ISDN port 21
BK/O
BK/O
BL/BK
BK/BL
BK/BL
S/R
S/R
R14
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
R/BR
G/R
G/R
R/G
R/G
O/R
O/R
R/O
R/O
BL/R
BL/R
R/BL
R/BL
S/W
S/W
T21
W/S
W/S
BR/W
BR/W
T20
W/BR
W/BR
G/W
G/W
R19
ISDN port 19
ISDN port 18
T19
W/G
W/G
O/W
O/W
R18
T18
Ring
R17
ISDN port 17
T17
Tip
W/O
W/O
BL/W
BL/W
W/BL
W/BL
36
2
35
1
Short
ISDN port 14
T14
R13
ISDN port 13
R12
T12
ISDN port 12
R11
T11
R10
R/S
BR/R
ISDN port 15
T15
T13
BL/BK
ISDN port 16
T16
R15
ISDN port 11
ISDN port 10
T10
R9
ISDN port 9
T9
ISDN port 8
T8
R7
T7
ISDN port 7
R6
T6
R5
ISDN port 6
ISDN port 5
T5
R4
R20
ISDN port 20
R16
R8
T24
R23
ISDN port 23
Tip
S/BK
R27
ISDN port 27
Ring
Y/BL
S/BK
R28
T28
BL/Y
T4
ISDN port 4
R3
T3
R2
Ring
Tip
T2
ISDN port 3
ISDN port 2
R1
T1
ISDN port 1
is attached
Wiring side
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-125
connectors
SHDSL16 application pack
connector
internal cables
This connector is used for the application pack LPS702. The figure
below shows the pin assignment of this connector. The orderable
cables are listed in Table 4-61, “Available a/b cables” (4-129).
Figure 4-103 Pin assignment (SHDSL16 AP cable connector)
Short
Blue binder
Orange binder
not used
Ring
BL/Y
Tip
Y/BL
R32
T32
R31
not used
T31
R30
not used
T30
R29
not used
not used
T29
not used
T27
R26
R25
T25
not used
R24
not used
R23
T23
R22
T22
not used
R21
S/BK
S/BK
BK/S
BK/S
BR/BK
BR/BK
BK/BR
BK/BR
G/BK
G/BK
BK/G
BK/G
O/BK
O/BK
BK/O
BK/O
BL/BK
BL/BK
BK/BL
BK/BL
S/R
S/R
R/S
R/S
BR/R
BR/R
R/BR
R/BR
G/R
G/R
R/G
R/G
O/R
O/R
R/O
R/O
BL/R
BL/R
R/BL
R/BL
S/W
S/W
SHDSL8 copper pair
T16 for HDSL port 16
R14 SHDSL6 copper pair
T14 for SHDSL port 14
R13
SHDSL5 copper pair
T11 for HDSL port 11
R9
T9
T8
R7
T7
R6
T6
R5
W/S
W/BR
W/BR
G/W
G/W
W/G
W/G
O/W
O/W
W/O
W/O
Ring
BL/W
BL/W
Ring
Tip
W/BL
W/BL
Tip
R19
R18
R17
T17
R16
T5
R4
R20
T18
not used
Tip
BR/W
T19
not used
Ring
Y/BL
W/S
T20
not used
BL/Y
BR/W
T21
not used
33
R8
T24
not used
67
R27
T26
not used
34
R28
T28
not used
68
For the SHDSL16 AP only 16 SHDSL ports
36
2
35
1
Short
T4
R3
T3
R2
T2
R1
T1
SHDSL1 copper pair
for SHDSL port 9
SHDSL8 copper pair
for SHDSL port 8
SHDSL7 copper pair
for SHDSL port 7
SHDSL6 copper pair
for SHDSL port 6
SHDSL5 copper pair
for SHDSL port 5
SHDSL4 copper pair
for SHDSL port 4
SHDSL3 copper pair
for SHDSL port 3
SHDSL2 copper pair
for SHDSL port 2
SHDSL1 copper pair
for SHDSL port 1
with 1 copper pair each are used supporting
up to 2.3 Mbit/s brutto with 16 PAM line
coding.
is attached
Wiring side
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-126
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
connectors
HDSL application pack
connector
internal cables
This connector is used for the application pack LPS504. The figure
below shows the pin assignment of this connector. The orderable
cables are listed in Table 4-61, “Available a/b cables” (4-129).
Figure 4-104 Pin assignment (HDSL AP cable connector)
Short
Blue binder
Orange binder
not used
Ring
BL/Y
Tip
Y/BL
R32
T32
T31
R30
not used
T30
R29
not used
not used
T29
not used
not used
T25
not used
BK/BR
BK/BR
G/BK
G/BK
BK/G
BK/G
O/BK
O/BK
BK/O
BK/O
BL/BK
BK/BL
BK/BL
S/R
S/R
R/S
R/S
BR/R
BR/R
R/BR
R/BR
G/R
G/R
R/G
R/G
O/R
O/R
R/O
R/O
BL/R
BL/R
R/BL
R/BL
S/W
S/W
T23
R22
R21
not used
T17
R11
R10
R9
R7
T7
R6
T6
R5
W/G
O/W
O/W
W/O
W/O
Ring
BL/W
BL/W
Ring
Tip
W/BL
W/BL
Tip
1
not used
T5
R4
HDSL3 copper pair
for HDSL port 4
not used
HDSL2 copper pair
for HDSL port 3
not used
T4
R3
T3
R2
HDSL1 copper pair
for HDSL port 2
not used
T2
R1
T1
HDSL0 copper pair
for HDSL port 1
For the HDSL AP only 4 HDSL copper
pairs are used. Each of them have a transport
not used
T8
W/G
35
not used
T9
G/W
2
not used
T10
G/W
36
not used
T11
W/BR
R17
not used
T12
W/BR
R18
T18
R12
W/S
R19
not used
R13
BR/W
R20
not used
T14
W/S
T19
not used
R14
BR/W
T20
not used
T15
T13
BL/BK
R23
not used
T16
R8
T21
not used
R16
R15
BK/S
R24
T22
not used
Tip
BR/BK
R26
R25
Ring
Y/BL
S/BK
R27
T27
BL/Y
BK/S
T24
not used
33
BR/BK
T26
not used
67
R28
T28
not used
34
S/BK
R31
not used
68
Short
rate of 1168 kbit/s. Two copper pairs can be
used in parallel for a bit rate of 2336 kbit/s
(HDSL0/HDSL1 pair or HDSL2/HDSL3 pair)
is attached
Wiring side
P32A32 application pack
connector
This connector provides ADSL and POTS service and is used for the
application packs LPA832 and LPA833. The figure below shows the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-127
connectors
internal cables
pin assignment of this connector. The orderable cables are listed in
Table 4-61, “Available a/b cables” (4-129).
Figure 4-105 Pin assignment (P32A32 AP cable connector)
Shot
Blue binder
Orange binder
ADSL/POTS port 32
Ring
BL/Y
Tip
Y/BL
R32
T32
R31
ADSL/POTS port 31
ADSL/POTS port 30
T31
R30
T30
ADSL/POTS port 29
R29
T29
ADSL/POTS port 28
68
34
67
33
ADSL/POTS port 26
T27
R26
T26
ADSL/POTS port 25
R25
T25
ADSL/POTS port 24
R24
BK/S
BK/S
BR/BK
BR/BK
BK/BR
BK/BR
G/BK
G/BK
BK/G
BK/G
O/BK
O/BK
T23
R22
ADSL/POTS port 22
T22
R21
ADSL/POTS port 21
ADSL/POTS port 20
T21
BK/O
BK/O
BL/BK
BK/BL
BK/BL
S/R
S/R
ADSL/POTS port 18
T20
T19
R18
T18
ADSL/POTS port 17
R14
R/S
BR/R
R/BR
R/BR
G/R
G/R
R/G
R/G
O/R
O/R
R/O
R/O
BL/R
BL/R
R/BL
R/BL
S/W
S/W
W/S
W/S
BR/W
BR/W
W/BR
W/BR
G/W
G/W
W/G
W/G
O/W
O/W
Ring
R17
T17
Tip
W/O
W/O
BL/W
BL/W
W/BL
W/BL
36
2
35
1
Short
ADSL/POTS port 14
T14
R13
ADSL/POTS port 13
R12
T12
ADSL/POTS port 12
R11
T11
R10
R/S
BR/R
ADSL/POTS port 15
T15
T13
BL/BK
ADSL/POTS port 16
T16
R15
ADSL/POTS port 11
ADSL/POTS port 10
T10
R9
ADSL/POTS port 9
T9
ADSL/POTS port 8
T8
R7
T7
ADSL/POTS port 7
R6
T6
R5
ADSL/POTS port 6
ADSL/POTS port 5
T5
R4
R20
R19
ADSL/POTS port 19
R16
R8
T24
R23
ADSL/POTS port 23
Tip
S/BK
R27
ADSL/POTS port 27
Ring
Y/BL
S/BK
R28
T28
BL/Y
T4
ADSL/POTS port 4
R3
T3
R2
Ring
Tip
T2
ADSL/POTS port 3
ADSL/POTS port 2
R1
T1
ADSL/POTS port 1
is attached
Wiring side
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-128
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
connectors
internal cables
The table below shows the a/b cable types. For the different lengths
refer to the Ordering Guide (363-211-144).
Table 4-61
Available a/b cables
Cable type
Equipment code
ED7C818-30 Gr1x
ED7C873-31 Gr1x
Shielded a/b cable for VoIP
APs (only for LAG Shelf
applications)
ED7C873-31 Gr2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-129
internal cables
Internal cabling
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Internal cables provide connection between the Rack Connection
Panel (RCP) or the Subrack for Fuse and Connection Panel (RFCP) in
the upper part of the rack and the individual shelves /fans for:
•
Powering
•
External ringing
•
External clock distribution
•
Alarms.
All internal cables are factory assembled. At delivery they are
connected to the correct connectors at the rack connection panel (or
the rack fuse connection panel), routed through the rack and attached
to the rack near the positions where they have to be connected later.
The cables are labeled with
•
The name of the destination connector in the shelf (e.g. J3)
•
The cable specification (e.g. ED7C818-35 GR21A)
•
The number of the destination shelf (e.g. Shelf 3).
Important! Note that the shelf numbering starts with Shelf 1 at
the bottom of the rack and ends up with Shelf 3 in the highest
position.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-130
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Internal cabling
internal cables
Internal
connections for J1C293B-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connection points in the
RFCP
This figure shows the RFCP with all internal pre-installed connections
to the shelves/fans. The number added (e.g. C316) enables the user to
find in the table below both destinations and the cable type used for
this unique connection.
Figure 4-106 Connection points in the RFCP
C036
C115
C236
C136
C116
C215
C336
C315
C216
C316
C036
C110
C210
C310
C336
C236
C136
Gr20
C212
C112
Connections within the
rack
C312
C213
C113
C313
This table specifies all pre-installed internal connections in the rack,
describing both destinations and the cable specification for the cable
type used.
Table 4-62
Cable
Destination 1
Destination 2
Cable
Specification
Comcode
C316
Shelf 3 B1
RFP F9/SH3B
ED7C818-35
GR11F
C216
Shelf 2 B1
RFU/RFP
F8/SH2B
ED7C818-35
GR11G
C116
Shelf 1 B1
RFP F7/SH1B
ED7C818-35
GR11H
C315
Shelf 3 A1
RFP F3/SH3A
ED7C818-35
GR11J
C215
Shelf 2 A1
RFP F2/SH2A
ED7C818-35
GR11K
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-131
Internal cabling
internal cables
Table 4-62
(continued)
Cable
Destination 1
Destination 2
Cable
Specification
Comcode
C115
Shelf 1 A1
RFP F1/SH1A
ED7C818-35
GR11L
C313
Shelf 3 F2
RCP
ED7C818-35
GR7A
C213
Shelf 2 F2
RCP
ED7C818-35
GR7B
C113
Shelf 1 F2
RCP
ED7C818-35
GR7C
C312
Shelf 3 J3
RCP
ED7C818-35
GR12
C212
Shelf 2 J3
RCP
ED7C818-35
GR12A
C112
Shelf 1 J3
RCP
ED7C818-35
GR12B
C310
Shelf 3 D2
FFC500 Field 04
ED7C818-35
GR13
C210
Shelf 2 D2
FFC500 Field 03
ED7C818-35
GR13A
C110
Shelf 1 D2
FFC500 Field 02
ED7C818-35
GR13B
FFC500 Field 05
ED7C818-35
GR20
C036
FFC500 J4
RFP F4, F10
ED7C818-35 G22
C336
FFC500 J3 RCP
ROW E
Fan Unit 3 J1
ED7C818-35
G21A
C236
FFC500 J2 RCP
ROW D
Fan Unit 2 J1
ED7C818-35
G21B
C136
FFC500 J1 RCP
ROW A
Fan Unit 1 J1
ED7C818-35
G21C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-132
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Internal cabling
internal cables
Internal
connections for J1C301B-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This figure shows the RCP with all internal connections (pre-installed
and optional connections) to the shelves/fans. The number added (e.g.
C111) enables the user to find in the table below both destinations and
the cable type used for this unique connection.
Connection points in the
RCP
Figure 4-107 Connection points in the RCP
C113
C114
C116
C112
C117
C115
C101
C102
C105
C137
C108
C100
C104
C103
C106
C107
C136
C135
C109
C111
C110
Note: All connections drawn to the bottom of the RCP are
pre-installed. All others have to be done during installation or are
optional.
Connections within the
rack
This table specifies all internal connections in the rack (pre-installed
and optional), describing both destinations and the cable specification
for the cable type used.
Table 4-63
Cable
Destination 1
Destination 2
Cable
Specification
Comcode
C100
1
P108/SH3
ACP/E
ED7C874–31
GR10
C101
1
P108/SH2
ACP/C
ED7C874–31
GR10A
C102
1
P108/SH1
ACP/A
ED7C874–31
GR10B
C103
1
P107/SH3
ACP/F
ED7C874–31
GR5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
4-133
Internal cabling
internal cables
Table 4-63
Cable
(continued)
Destination 1
Destination 2
Cable
Specification
Comcode
C104
1
J107/SH2
ACP/D
ED7C874–31
GR5A
C105
1
J107/SH1
ACP/B
ED7C874–31
GR5B
C106
1
J111/SH3
FCP/F3
ED7C874–31
GR8E
C107
1
J111/SH2
FCP/F2
ED7C874–31
GR8D
C108
1
J111/SH1
FCP/F1
ED7C874–31
GR8C
C109
1
J112/SH3
FCP/F8
ED7C874–31
GR8
C110
1
J112/SH2
FCP/F7
ED7C874–31
GR8A
C111
1
J112/SH1
FCP/F6
ED7C874–31
GR8B
C112
J109/SH3
PCD1/OUT3
ED7C874–31
GR6C
C113
J109/SH2
PCD1/OUT2
ED7C874–31
GR6A
C114
J109/SH1
PCD1/OUT1
ED7C874–31
GR6B
C115
J110/SH3
PCD2/OUT3
ED7C874–31
GR6C
C116
J110/SH2
PCD2/OUT2
ED7C874–31
GR6D
C117
J110/SH1
PCD2/OUT1
ED7C874–31
GR6E
C135
P113/SH3
FCP/TERMINAL
3
ED7C874–31
GR9
C136
P113/SH2
FCP/TERMINAL
2
ED7C874–31
GR9A
C137
P113/SH1
FCP/TERMINAL
1
ED7C874–31
GR9B
Notes:
1.
Pre-installed at delivery.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-134
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5
Cabling procedures
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This chapter is used to
•
give some general information on external cables
•
describe the customer cabling that must be performed on-site
once the rack has been mounted and grounded and provides a
recommended cabling order.
For the cabling procedures it is assumed that the mechanical
installation has been completed, that means the shelves, the power
filter units (PFUs) and the ringing filter units (RFUs) as far as
applicable, and the fans and baffles are already included.
Note: The packs inside the shelves may or may not yet be inserted. In
any case the turn-up of the packs in the shelves is covered in the
Commands and procedures for narrowband services (363-211-119),
the Commands and procedures for ATM xDSL services (363-211-133)
and in the Commands and procedures for IP-based services
(363-211-555).
If fiber will be used, the optical cable duct has been mounted.
The description of the cabling procedures assumes that the cover
plates that normally close the front of the connector fields on the
LAG 1900 Shelves, have been removed temporarily during the
installation of the shelves in order to have the connectors below
accessible.
Contents
External Cables
5-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-1
Overview
Cabling procedures
5-7
Installing E3/DS3 cables for AFME3/AFMDS3 packs Overview
5-9
Installing E3/DS3 feeder cables for simplex mode
without daisy-chaining
5-12
Installing E3/DS3 feeder cables for simplex mode with
daisy-chaining
5-15
Installing E3/DS3 feeder cables for duplex mode
5-19
Installing E3/DS3 feeder cables for duplex mode with
daisy-chaining
5-24
Installing the E1 cables to the AFME1 - Overview
5-32
Installing the E1 cables from the AFME1 to the E1
cross-connect
5-35
Installing the E1 cables for the SHDSL AP LPS510
5-38
5-42
5-44
5-49
5-51
Installing fiber cables for AFMO packs - Overview
5-54
Installing fiber cables for simplex mode without
daisy-chaining
5-59
Installing fiber cables for simplex mode with
daisy-chaining
5-64
Installing fiber cables for duplex mode without
daisy-chaining
5-69
Installing fiber cables for duplex mode with
daisy-chaining
5-74
5-80
5-82
Installing OAM&P connections
5-86
5-87
5-92
Installing the test application paths for local testing Overview
5-98
5-100
5-100
5-106
5-106
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-2
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Overview
Cabling procedures
Test installation procedure using the remote test head
(RTU) - Overview
5-109
5-109
Installing the physical connection between the RTU
and the NB subsystem.
5-113
Connection of the a/b cables to the MDF
5-115
5-116
5-120
5-120
5-124
5-124
5-130
5-130
Final installation activities
5-136
5-136
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-3
Cabling procedures
External
Cables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The external cables may be prefabricated (equipped with at least one
connector) or the cables may have to be assembled completely on site
by the installer/customer. The external prefabricated cables must be
ordered separately. For details refer to the Ordering Guide
(363-211-144).
External cables Prefabricated cables
Prefabricated cables are used to interconnect the AnyMedia Shelves to
ancillary equipment such as the following:
•
a/b-cabling (e.g. POTS lines, ADSL lines, ISDN lines) for
connections from the application packs (APs) to the main
distribution frame (MDF)
•
TAP test pair connections from the test application pack (TAP) to
the MDF or to the customer’s remote test unit for subscriber
testing facilities
•
E1 and E3/DS3 line connections from the shelf connectors to the
digital distribution frame (DDF)
•
10BaseT connections for connecting from the shelves to the LAN
via the customer’s mini- hub or other LAN equipment
•
Feeder cabling from the AFM application pack to the digital
distribution frame (DDF) or to/from the next/previous BB
subsystem in the daisy chain, if required
•
Fiber cabling from the AFMO application pack to the optical
distribution frame or to/from the next/previous BB subsystem in
the daisy chain, if required
•
Cabling for the FE uplink feeders and/or the GbE uplink feeders
from the IPFM(s) to the IP network
•
Fiber cabling from the optical application packs (OAPs) to the
ONU Subshelves
•
DC power connections from the rack to the external −48 V
power feeders
•
Ringing connections from the customer’s ringing supplies via the
ringing filter units (RFUs) if applicable.
The standard wire color coding for the prefabricated cables is shown
in “Color-Coding for cables” (A-3).
Customized cables
Customer-made cables are cables that must be engineered and
fabricated in the field. They are used to connect the AnyMedia ®
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-4
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
External Cables
Cabling procedures
Access System to various external customer equipment such as the
following:
•
External clock connection from the customer’s clock source to
the shelves
•
Serial connections from/to modems or RTU
•
Alarm connections for external inputs/outputs and discrete alarm
connections for environment status and controls via the alarm
connection panel.
The requirements for customized cables are described in the
applicable cabling procedures.
Important! Not all cables are required for each installation.
Refer to the regional equipment engineering job specifications for
a particular office application.
Cable routing
If not stated otherwise in the cabling procedures, the following routing
order must be observed during CP and AP cable installation:
1.
All cables must be routed from the AP faceplate connectors to
the bottom of the AnyMedia ® Shelf vertically. Make sure that the
cables are led through the cut-outs located at the shelf bottom
and fixed with cable ties.
2.
All fiber cables should be routed to the right cut-out of the shelf
and then through the optical cable duct.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-5
External Cables
Cabling procedures
3.
The AP cables should be routed through the left cut-out of the
shelf, all the other cables to the right cut-out.
4.
All AP cables can be routed upwards or downwards within the
rack frame (as required).
Figure 5-1 Cable routing of the CP and AP cables
AP cables to the left
CP cables to the right
Fiber cables to the right
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-6
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
Recommended
range of order for cabling
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
High level overview
This section describes the customer cabling that must be performed
on-site once the rack and the shelves have been mounted and
grounded and it provides a recommended order for the cabling.
The cabling procedures depend on the configuration of the
As described in detail in the following sections the cabling should be
done in the following recommended order.
Procedure
Skip procedures that are not applicable because they do not apply
to the current configuration.
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Note that cabling to the OAM&P interfaces is described in “OAM&P
connections” (A-34).
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Install E3/DS3 cables for AFME3 or AFMDS3 packs.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Install E1 cables for AFME1 packs.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
Install the a/b-cables for the application packs of the installed shelves
and attach ferrite kits if applicable. One of the a/b-cables can be used
per Shelf as TAP10x (TAP10x is a placeholder for TAP100B or
TAP101) cable for the TAP10x application pack.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Install the E1 feeder cables.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Install fiber cables for AFMO packs.
............................................................................................................................................................
7
Install electrical cables and fiber cables for IPFM uplinks.
............................................................................................................................................................
8
Install fiber cables for OAP packs for the connection of ONU
Subshelves.
............................................................................................................................................................
9
Install the LAN cables to the connector fields of the shelves and
connect to the customer’s 10BaseT LAN equipment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-7
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
10
Install external clock cables and connect to the customer’s clock
source.
............................................................................................................................................................
11
Install the test application paths.
............................................................................................................................................................
12
Install the connections for using remote test head (RTU).
............................................................................................................................................................
13
Connect all a/b-cables to the MDF (used for POTS, ISDN, and xDSL)
and verify the MDF cabling. Note that the MDF and all subscriber
cabling leaving the building should be protected by protector blocks
(primary protection).
............................................................................................................................................................
14
Connect all E1 and/or E3 cables to the DDF.
............................................................................................................................................................
15
Connect all fiber cables to the optical distribution frame.
............................................................................................................................................................
16
Install power feeder cables and connect them to the customer’s
external - 48 V power feeders.
............................................................................................................................................................
17
Install external ringing cables if an external ringing generator will be
used and connect to the customer’s external central ringing source.
............................................................................................................................................................
18
Test the powering and ringing voltage.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-8
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
Installing E3/DS3 cables for AFME3/AFMDS3 packs Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This section describes the cabling procedures for the AFME3/DS3
packs using coaxial cables. For the duplex mode also
splitters/combiners with three BNC-type connectors have to be used.
The connections can be made:
Connectors
•
In simplex AFM mode without daisy-chaining as described in
“Installing E3/DS3 feeder cables for simplex mode without
daisy-chaining” (5-12)
•
In simplex AFM mode with daisy-chaining as described in
“Installing E3/DS3 feeder cables for simplex mode with
•
In duplex AFM mode without daisy-chaining as described in
“Installing E3/DS3 feeder cables for duplex mode without
•
In duplex AFM mode with daisy-chaining as described in
“Installing E3/DS3 feeder cables for duplex mode with
daisy-chaining” (5-24).
For connecting the E3/DS3-cables, 4 BNC connectors on the faceplate
of the AFME3/DS3 packs are used. Connectors TX-1, RX-1 on the
AFM pack are used for upstream connection via two coaxial cables
to/from the ATM Network or previous shelf in the daisy chain.
Connectors TX-2, RX-2 are used for downstream connection via two
coaxial cables to/from the next daisy-chained shelf. Each upstream or
downstream connection consists of 2 coaxial cables, one for Transmit
(TX) and one for Receive (RX). The connectors are shown in Figure
4-72, “AFME3/AFMDS3 cabling” (4-86).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-9
Installing E3/DS3 cables for
AFME3/AFMDS3 packs - Overview
Cables
Cabling procedures
Table 5-1
Orderable external cables and splitters/combiners
for E3/DS3 cabling
Cable description
Equipment Code
Used for
E3/DS3 75 735A
cable, 90deg/straight
BNC
ED7C829-32 G3x3
For E3/DS3 feeders
towards the ATM
network
E3/DS3 75 734A
cable, 90deg/straight
BNC
ED7C829-32 G4
E3/DS3 75 735A
cable,
straight/straight BNC
ED7C829-32 G30x3
E3/DS3 75 734A
cable,straight/straight
BNC
ED7C829-32 G40
E3/DS3 75 735A
cable, 90deg/90deg
BNC
ED7C829-31 G1x3
Used for E3/DS3
daisychaining in
duplex mode for
interconnecting the
splitters (2 per
daisychained row)1
E3/DS3 75 735A
cable, 90deg/90deg
BNC
ED7C829-31 G1D
Used for E3/DS3
daisychaining (2 per
splitter/ combiner)2
Splitter/Combiner
ZFSC-2-1-75
406333849
For duplex AFM
mode
Notes:
1.
The cables are connected to the S-ports of the splitters.
2.
The cables are used for connecting the splitters to the AFM ports
3.
For the different lengths refer to the Ordering Guide (363-211-144).
E3/DS3-cables with right-angled BNC connectors at both ends are
used for internal E3/DS3 daisy-chaining between AFM packs and for
connecting the ports of the AFMs to the splitters/combiners.
E3/DS3-cables with a right-angled BNC connector for the AFM side
and straight BNC connector on the other side can be used to connect
the AFM pack to an external E3/DS3 feeder or digital distribution
frame (DDF).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-10
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Installing E3/DS3 cables for
AFME3/AFMDS3 packs - Overview
Shielding
Cable labelling
Duplex AFM mode
Cabling procedures
The coax cables have to be grounded close to the AFM ports by
attaching grounding clips. The grounding clips create electrical
connection between cable shield and shelf framework.
The cable ends should be labelled during installation with the
designations which the cable ends have to be connected to.
In duplex AFM mode two AFMs are installed per BB subsystem.
Splitters/combiners with three BNC-type connectors have to be used.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-11
Cabling procedures
Installing E3/DS3 feeder cables for simplex mode without
daisy-chaining
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Use this procedure to install E3/DS3 feeder cables in a BB subsystem
for an AFME3/DS3 in simplex mode without daisy-chaining.
If the AFM is already installed, the procedure describes how to
connect it. If the AFM is not yet installed, the procedure describes
how to install the cables. In this case the connection to the AFM will
be done during turn-up of the system.
Equipment
Procedure
The following equipment is required:
•
Two coax cables (ED7C829-32 G3x, G4 or ED7C829-32 G30x,
G40) for the connection towards the ATM network
•
Grounding clips.
Proceed as follows:
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Verify that no a/b cable is installed to the blank faceplate of the slot
position where the AFM will be installed.
Otherwise disconnect this a/b cable from the faceplate, cut the cable
tie on the guiding finger and place the cable in the cable trough above
the already installed a/b-cables. If the work order specifies remove
this a/b cable completely.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Obtain two coax cables with the appropriate length (ED7C829-32
G3x, G4 or ED7C829-32 G30x, G40).
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Mark one cable end with TX-1 the other end with E3/DS3_TX. Mark
the other cable with RX-1 and E3/DS3_RX accordingly.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
Install the two cables with the TX-1/RX-1 labeled BNC connectors
from the top of the rack.
Route E3/DS3 feeder cables:
•
To the LAG 1900 Shelves in the left cable duct
•
To the ETSI V5 Shelves in the right cable duct of the rack.
Pull the BNC ends through the opening of the shelves so that the
BNC ends reach the RX-1/TX-1 connectors of the AFM. If the AFM
is not equipped the cable ends should reach the middle of the AFM
slot position. The free ends on top of the rack will be connected later.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-12
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Installing E3/DS3 feeder cables for simplex
mode without daisy-chaining
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Attach grounding clips to the cable ends RX-1 and TX-1 close to the
AFM ports. The grounding clips create electrical connection between
cable shield and shelf framework.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
If
then
the AFM is not installed already
place the two cables in the cable
trough for later installation. Do
not remove the blank faceplate.
the AFM is installed already
connect the TX-1 cable end to
the TX-1 faceplate connector of
the AFM, connect the RX-1
cable connector to the RX-1
faceplate connector.
............................................................................................................................................................
7
Fix the cables in the cable duct area with cable ties as required.
............................................................................................................................................................
8
Locate the free cable ends on top of the rack and route the other cable
ends to the E3/DS3 distribution panel:
1.
Connect the RX-ends to the TX (Transmit, output) of the E3/DS3
distribution panel.
2.
Connect E3/DS3 _TX connector to the TX connector (OUT) and
the E3/DS3_RX to the RX (IN) connector of the E3/DS3
distribution panel.
E
ND OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-13
Cabling procedures
Comment:
Often the receive and the transmit ports of the E3/DS3 distribution
panel are cross-connected internally. Therefore for example TX-1
cable is connected to TX (out) here.
Figure 5-2 E3/DS3 distribution panel cross-connections
AFM
TX-1
E3/DS3
distribution panel
OUT
TX
IN
RX
Transmit
RX-1
E3/DS3
network
Receive
IN
RX
OUT
Receive
TX
Transmit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-14
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
Installing E3/DS3 feeder cables for simplex mode with
daisy-chaining
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
for an AFME3/DS3 in simplex mode with daisy-chaining.
For daisy chaining the TX2/RX2 connectors of the previous
AFME3/DS3 pack in the chain must be connected to the RX1/TX1
connectors of the next AFME3/DS3 pack in the chain.
If the AFMs are already installed, the procedure describes how to
connect them. If the AFMs are not yet installed, the procedure
describes how to install the cables. In this case the connection to the
AFMs will be done during turn-up of the system.
Equipment
•
•
Two coax cables ED7C829-31 G1D (90°/90°) per daisychained
BB subsystem
•
Grounding clips for all coax cables that will be connected to the
AFMs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-15
mode with daisy-chaining
Principle
Cabling procedures
The figure below shows the cabling principle for simplex
daisy-chaining.
Figure 5-3 Daisy-chaining principle for AFME3/DS3 in simplex
mode
Simplex E3/DS3 cabling
with daisychaining
Start this procedure with the first AFM in the daisy-chain:
............................................................................................................................................................
1
If
then
the current AFM is the first AFM
in the daisy-chain
follow “Installing E3/DS3 feeder
cables for simplex mode without
daisy-chaining” (5-12) to make
the connections to the
TX-1/RX-1 connectors.
Then repeat Step 1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-16
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
2
If
then
the AFM has to be daisy-chained
on ports RX-2/TX-2,
two coax cables (ED7C829-31
G1D) as described in “Cables”
(5-10) are required with the
appropriate length to reach the
next shelf in the daisy-chain.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Mark for the first cable one BNC connector (the right angled, if
applicable) with RX-2 and the other connector with TX-1. Mark the
second cable with TX-2 and RX-1 accordingly.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
Route the two cables with the RX-2/TX-2 connectors from the cable
duct through the shelf opening where the current AFM is located. The
cable ends should reach about the middle of the relevant slot.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
............................................................................................................................................................
6
If the AFM is not equipped place the two cables in the cable trough
for later installation. Do not remove the blank faceplate.
............................................................................................................................................................
7
If the AFM is installed already connect the TX-2 cable end to the
TX-2 faceplate connector of the AFM, connect the RX-2 cable
connector to the RX-2 faceplate connector.
............................................................................................................................................................
8
Obtain the other two free cable ends (labeled TX-1 and RX-1) from
the cable duct and route them to the opening of the shelf where the
next AFM in the daisy-chain is located.
............................................................................................................................................................
9
Verify that no a/b cable is installed to the blank faceplate of the AFM
slot. Otherwise disconnect this a/b cable from the faceplate, cut the
cable tie on the guiding finger and place the cable in the cable trough.
If the work order specifies remove this a/b cable completely.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-17
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
10
Feed the two cable ends with their RX-1/TX-1 connectors through the
shelf opening so that the connectors reach the RX-1/TX-1 connectors
of the AFM.
............................................................................................................................................................
11
............................................................................................................................................................
12
If
then
the AFM is not installed already,
place the two cables in the cable
trough for later installation. Do
not remove the blank faceplate.
the AFM is installed already,
connect the TX-1 cable end to
the TX-1 faceplate connector of
the AFM, connect the RX-1
cable connector to the RX-1
faceplate connector.
............................................................................................................................................................
13
Repeat this procedure for the next AFM in the daisy-chain.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-18
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
Installing E3/DS3 feeder cables for duplex mode without
daisy-chaining
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
in duplex AFM mode without daisy-chaining. Two splitters/combiners
are required.
Equipment
•
•
Four coax cables ED7C829-31 G1D (90°/90°)
•
Two splitters/combiners ZF-2C-2-1-75
•
Grounding clips for the cable connections to the AFM ports.
In the following procedure various labeling of splitters/combiners and
cable ends is described. The complete labeling is shown in the figure
below.
Figure 5-4 Labeling of cables and splitters/combiners for duplex
E3/DS3 cabling without daisychaining
ED7C829-32 G3x, G4 cables
(90°/straight) or
Splitters /
Combiners
TX-1
AFM1
TX-1
TX-1
TX-1
RX-1 RX-1
TX-2 TX-2
RX-2 RX-2
RX-1
1
TX1 S
ED7C829-32 G30x, G40 cables
(straight/straight)
TX-1
2
ATM Network
RX-1
1
RX1 S
RX-1
2
AFM2
TX-1
TX-1
RX-1 RX-1
TX-2
TX-2
RX-2 RX-2
ED7C829-31 G1D cables
(90°/90°)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-19
Installing E3/DS3 feeder cables for duplex
Procedure
Cabling procedures
Proceed as follows:
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Mark the 90° BNC connector of one cable ED7C829-32 Gxx with
TX-1, mark the other side with E3/DS3_TX. Mark the other cable
with RX-1 and E3/DS3_RX accordingly.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Install the two cables with the RX-1/TX-1 BNC connectors from the
top of the rack in the cable duct on the left side for LAG 1900
Shelves, respectively on the right side for ETSI V5 Shelves.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Pull the BNC ends through the left opening in the shelf to the bottom
of the row where the BB subsystem will be placed. Place the two
cable ends in the cable trough, available for later connection to the
splitters.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
Obtain 2 splitters/combiners ZFSC-2-1-75 and four short coaxial
cables ED7C829-31 G1D.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Mark one splitter/combiner with TX-1, mark the other
splitter/combiner with RX-1.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Mark two ED7C829-31 G1D cables with TX-1 on both ends, mark
the other two ED7C829-31 G1D cables with RX-1 accordingly.
TX1
TX1
RX1
RX1
Figure 5-5 Splitter/combiner cabling (AFM side)
S
RX1 1
Splitter/Combiner
RX1
S
2 RX1
TX1 1
Splitter/Combiner
TX1
2 TX1
............................................................................................................................................................
7
Connect the RX-1 ends to the 1-port and to the 2-port of the RX-1
splitter, connect the TX-1 ends to the 1-port and to the 2-port of the
TX-1 splitter.
............................................................................................................................................................
8
Locate the two coaxial cables in the cable trough.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-20
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
9
Connect the RX-1 cable end to the S-port of the RX-1
splitter/combiner, connect the TX-1 cable end to the S-port of the
RX-1 splitter/combiner as shown:
Figure 5-6 Splitter/combiner cabling (all ports connected)
RX1 1
TX1
TX1
S
S
2 RX1
Splitter/Combiner
RX1
To ATM network
TX1
RX1
RX1
RX1
TX
RX
From ATM network
TX1 1
Splitter/Combiner
TX1
2 TX1
............................................................................................................................................................
10
Place the two splitter/combiner assemblies upright in the cable trough
below the row and push them carefully to the background as shown:
Figure 5-7 Arrangement of the two splitters/combiners
............................................................................................................................................................
11
AFM ports.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-21
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
12
If
then
the AFMs are not installed
already
sort the cable ends of the four
ED7C829-31 G1D cables to the
guiding fingers and fix them
temporarily in order to make
sure that they will not be hidden
during a/b cabling. Do not
remove the blank faceplates.
the AFMs are already installed
connect one RX-1 end to the
RX-1 faceplate connector and
one TX-1 end to the TX-1
faceplate connector of the
preferred AFM and sort these
two cables to the guiding finger
below. Connect the other RX-1
and TX-1 end to the appropriate
RX-1 and TX-1 faceplate
connector of the AFM in the
AFM protection slot and sort the
cables to the guiding fingers
below.
............................................................................................................................................................
13
Locate the free cable ends on top of the rack and route them to the
E3/DS3 distribution panel.
............................................................................................................................................................
14
Connect the cables to the E3/DS3 distribution panel:
Connect E3/DS3_TX connector to the TX connector (OUT) and the
E3/DS3_RX to the RX (IN) connector of the E3/DS3 distribution
panel.
E
ND OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-22
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
Comment:
Often the receive and the transmit ports of the E3/DS3 distribution
panel are cross-connected internally. Therefore for example the TX-1
cable is connected to TX (OUT) here:
Figure 5-8 E3/DS3 distribution panel cross-connections
AnyMedia
AFM
AnyMedia
E3/DS3 distribution
E3/DS3 Network
panel
AFM
TX-1
Transmit
TX-1
IN
RX
Transmit
RX-1
Receive
OUT
TX
RX-1
Receive
Receive
IN
RX
OUT
TX
Transmit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-23
Cabling procedures
Installing E3/DS3 feeder cables for duplex mode with
daisy-chaining
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Use this procedure to install E3/DS3 feeder cables for daisy-chained
BB subsystems in duplex AFM mode. Splitters/combiners are
required.
For daisy chaining the TX2/RX2 connectors of the previous
AFME3/DS3 packs in the daisy-chain must be connected via the
splitters/combiners to the RX1/TX1 connectors of the next
AFME3/DS3 packs in the chain.
Equipment
The following equipment is required in total (for the list of cables
refer to “Cables” (5-10)):
•
Two coaxial cables towards the ATM network; select one type of
ED7C829- 32 Gxx
•
Twelve coaxial cables ED7C829-31 G1D (90°/90°)
•
Two coaxial cables ED7C829-31 G1 (90°/90°)
•
Six splitters/combiners ZFSC-2-1-75
•
Grounding clips for the cable connections to the AFM ports.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-24
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
The principle for duplex daisy-chaining:
Figure 5-9 E3/DS3 daisy-chaining principle for duplex mode
ED7C829-32 G3x, 4 cables
(90°/straight) or
(straight/straight)
AFM pack*
AFM pack*
TX-1 TX-1
To/from ATM
network
TX-1 splitter
RX-1 RX-1
RX-1 splitter
TX-2 TX-2
TX-2 splitter
1
RX-2 RX-2
Splitter/Combiner
ZFSC-2-1-75
RX-2 splitter
S
2
AFM pack*
AFM pack*
Detailed view of splitter/combiner
TX-1 TX-1
TX-1 splitter
RX-1 RX-1
RX-1 splitter
ED7C829-31 G1 cables
TX-2 TX-2
(90°/90°)
RX-2 RX-2
ED7C829-31 G1D cables
(90°/90°)
* AFM_E3/DS3
In the following procedure various labeling of splitters/combiners and
cable ends is described.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-25
Cabling procedures
The complete labeling looks like this:
Figure 5-10 Labeling of cables and splitters/combiners for
duplex E3/DS3 cabling with daisy-chaining
(90°/straight) or
Splitters/combiners
TX-1
TX-1
AFM1
TX-1
RX-1
TX-2
RX-2
1
TX1 S
(straight/straight)
TX-1
2
ATM Network
TX-1
RX-1
RX-1
TX-2
RX-2
RX-1
1
RX1 S
RX-1
2
AFM2
TX-1
RX-1
TX-2
RX-2
TX-1
TX-2
RX-1
TX-2
TX-2
RX-2
RX-2
RX-2
1
TX2 S
TX-2
2
1
RX2 S
RX-2
2
AFM1
TX-1
RX-1
TX-2
TX-1
TX-1
RX-1
TX-1
ED7C829-37 G1 cables
1
TX1 S
TX-1
(90°/90°)
2
RX-2
RX-1
1
AFM2
TX-1
RX-1
TX-2
RX-1
TX-1
RX1 S
RX-1
2
RX-1
RX-2
ED7C829-31 D1D cables
(90°/90°)
Procedure
Start this procedure with the first AFM pair in the daisy-chain:
............................................................................................................................................................
1
If the current AFM pair is the first AFM pair in the daisy-chain, then
follow “Installing E3/DS3 feeder cables for duplex mode without
daisy-chaining” (5-19) to make the connections to the TX-1/RX-1
connectors.
Then go to Step 2.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-26
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Obtain 2 splitters/combiners and four short coaxial cables
ED7C829-31 G1D.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
............................................................................................................................................................
4
Mark two ED7C829-31 G1D cables with TX-2 on both ends close to
the connector, mark the other two ED7C829-31 G1D cables with
RX-2 accordingly.
TX1
TX2
RX2
RX2
Figure 5-11 Splitter/combiner cabling (AFM side, towards
previous row)
S
RX2 1
Splitter/Combiner
RX2
S
2 RX1
TX2 1
Splitter/Combiner
TX2
2 TX2
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Connect the RX-2 cable ends to the 1-port and to the 2-port of the
RX-2 splitter, connect the TX-2 ends to the 1-port and to the 2-port of
the TX-2 splitter.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Temporarily place the splitter/combiner assemblies in the cable trough
of the row where the splitter/combiner assemblies of the previous
AFMs are located and mark one splitter/combiner with TX-2, mark
the other splitter/ combiner with RX-2.
............................................................................................................................................................
7
AFM ports.
............................................................................................................................................................
8
If
then
already
sort the cable ends of the two
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-27
Cabling procedures
If
then
connect one RX-2 end and one
TX-2 end to each of both AFMs
in this row. Sort the cables to the
guiding fingers below.
............................................................................................................................................................
9
Obtain two coaxial cables ED7C829-31 G1.
............................................................................................................................................................
10
Mark for the first cable one connector with RX-2 and the other
connector with TX-1. Mark the second cable with TX-2 and RX-1
accordingly.
TX2
TX2
S
S
2 RX2
Splitter/Combiner
RX2
To Receive port
of the next AFM in
the daisy chain
TX2
RX2
RX2
RX2 1
RX1
From Transmit port
of the next AFM in
the daisy chain
RX2
TX1
Figure 5-12 Splitter/combiner cabling (all ports connected,
previous shelf)
TX2 1
Splitter/Combiner
TX2
2 TX2
............................................................................................................................................................
11
Connect the two cables with their RX-2/TX-2 connectors to the
S-ports of the two splitter/combiner assemblies. Prepare the other ends
of these two cables with their RX-1/TX-1 ends so that they can be
routed towards the next AFM pair in the daisy-chain.
............................................................................................................................................................
12
Place the two splitter/combiner assemblies upright in the cable trough
where the previously installed two splitter/combiner assemblies (from
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-28
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
“Installing E3/DS3 feeder cables for duplex mode without
daisy-chaining” (5-19) are already installed.
Figure 5-13 Arrangement of splitters/combiners in the cable
trough
Splitters / combiners
............................................................................................................................................................
13
Locate the RX-1 and TX-1 ends from the cables and route them
through the left shelf opening towards the row with the next AFM
pair in the daisy-chain.
............................................................................................................................................................
14
Route the two cables with the RX-1/TX-1 connectors in the left cable
duct to this row. Pull the cables through the left shelf opening of this
row. Place the two cables in the cable trough, available for later
connection.
............................................................................................................................................................
15
Obtain 2 splitters/combiners and four short coaxial cables
ED7C829-31 G1D.
............................................................................................................................................................
16
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-29
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
17
Mark two ED7C829-31 G1D cables with TX-1 on both ends, mark
the other two ED7C829-31 G1D cables with RX-1 accordingly.
TX1
TX1
RX1
RX1
Figure 5-14 Splitter/combiner cabling (AFM side, next row)
S
RX1 1
S
Splitter/Combiner
RX1
2 RX1
TX1 1
Splitter/Combiner
TX1
2 TX1
............................................................................................................................................................
18
Connect the RX-1 ends to the 1-port and to the 2-port of the RX-1
splitter, connect the TX-1 ends to the 1-port and to the 2-port of the
TX-2 splitter.
............................................................................................................................................................
19
Locate in the cable trough the two coaxial cables from the previous
row in the daisy chain with the RX-1 and TX-1 ends.
............................................................................................................................................................
20
Connect the RX-1 cable end to the S-port of the RX1
splitter/combiner, connect the TX-1 cable end to the S-port of the TX1
splitter/combiner.
TX1
TX1
S
S
2 RX1
Splitter/Combiner
RX1
From S port of the
RX-2 splitter of the
previous AFMs in
the daisy chain
TX1
RX1
RX1
RX1 1
RX2
From S port of the
TX-2 splitter of the
previous AFMs in
the daisy chain
RX1
TX2
Figure 5-15 Splitter/combiner cabling (all ports connected, next
shelf)
TX1 1
Splitter/Combiner
TX1
2 TX1
............................................................................................................................................................
21
Place the two splitter/combiner assemblies upright in the cable trough.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-30
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
22
............................................................................................................................................................
23
If
then
already
sort the cable ends of the four
connect one RX-1 end and one
TX-1 end to each of both AFMs
in this row. Sort the cables to the
guiding fingers below.
............................................................................................................................................................
24
Repeat this procedure for the next AFM pair in the daisy-chain.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-31
Cabling procedures
Installing
the E1 cables to the AFME1 - Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Connectors
This section describes the cabling procedure for the AFME1 packs
using a special AFME1 Y-cable with 16 pairs to which two 8-pair
cables with open end are connected.
For connecting the Y-cable to the AFME1 the faceplate is equipped
with a female 37-pin D-sub connector. One end of the Y-cable is
equipped with a male 37-pin D-sub connector, the other ends are
equipped with a female 25-pin D-sub connector each.
The 8-pair cables ED7C849-30 G11x are equipped with a male 25-pin
D-sub connector on the side which connects to the 25-pin female
D-sub connector of the AFME1 Y-cable ED7C849-30 G10. The other
end is of open end for connecting to the E1 cross-connect.
Cables
The AFME1 Y-cable ED7C849-30 G10 splits the 8 E1 ports in a
Transmit (Upstream) cord and a second Receive (Downstream) cord to
which 2 separate 8-pair E1 cables ED7C849-30 G11x are connected
for routing to the external E1 crossconnect. One Y-cable and two
ED7C849-30 G11x cables are required per AFME1.
Table 5-2
External orderable cables for AFME1 cabling
Cable description
Equipment Code
Used for
AFME1 Y-cable
ED7C849-30 G10
Splitting the 8 E1
signals into transmit
and receive paths for
connection to the E1
panel; 26 AWG (≈
0.4 mm2)
E1 cable 8-pair
ED7C849-30 G11x1
Used for connection
to external DDF2
(25-pin D-sub/open
end)
Notes:
1.
For the different lenghts refer to the Ordering Guide (363-211-144).
2.
The cross-section of the Group 11 to Group 11C cable is 26 AWG (≈
0.4 mm diameter), the cross-section of the Group 11D cable is 22
AWG (≈ 0.6 mm diameter).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-32
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Installing the E1 cables to the AFME1 Overview
Cabling procedures
The cabling principle for the AFME1 cabling.
Figure 5-16 AFME1 cabling principle
LPA941
S1:1
Lucent
FAULT
ACTV
CR-MJ
MN
10BASE-T
CONSOLE
CLF
Cable area w.
exposed braided
shield
E1 (Tx)
ED7C849-30-G11x for Transmit pairs
Tx
1
P1/Tx
E1
J1
Rx
ED7C849-30-G10
Y-cable
1
J3
E1 (Rx)
ED7C849-30-G11x for Receive pairs
1
J2
P2/Rx
AFME1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-33
Installing the E1 cables to the AFME1 Overview
Cabling procedures
The pinning of both cable types and the color coding sequence:
Figure 5-17 Pinning for the AFME1 cabling
(Receive pairs) P 2/ J2
m
J1 / P1 ( Transmit pairs)
f
J5
35
4K
to
44
G-R
R-G
O-R
R-O
BL-R
R-BL
S-W
W-S
BR-W
W-BR
G-W
W-G
O-W
W-O
BL-W
W-BL
43
f
m
m
to
58
_
NC
57
Y
E1 port 8, Down
RxRing8
RxTip8
Y_BL
BL-Y
4G
5K
56
8
E1 port 7, Down
RxRing7
RxTip7
BK-BR
BR-BK
55
3_
3Y
7
E1 port 6, Down
37
BK-O
O-BK
3Y
E1 port 5, Down
RxRing5
RxTip5
R-S
S-R
38
6
E1 port 4, Down
R-G
G-R
37
4_
34
E1 port 3, Down
RxRing3
RxTip3
R-BL
BL-R
3G
48
4K
Y
E1 port 2, Down
RxRing2
RxTip2
W-BR
BR-W
36
E1 port 1, Down
RxRing1
RxTip1
W-O
O-W
21
4
TxTip6
TxRing6
G-R
R-G
8
O-R
R-O
7
BL-R
R-BL
K
S-W
W-S
6
BR-W
W-BR
5
G-W
W-G
4
O-W
W-O
3
BL-W
W-BL
3_
E1 port 6, Up
TxTip5
TxRing5
R-BR
BR-R
3Y
E1 port 5, Up
TxTip4
TxRing4
R-O
O-R
38
E1 port 4, Up
TxTip3
TxRing3
W-S
S-W
37
E1 port 3, Up
TxTip2
TxRing2
W-G
G-W
2
3K
E1 port 2, Up
3
1
TxTip1
TxRing1
W-BL
BL-W
NC
36
E1 port 1, Up
16-pair AFME1 Y-cable with male 37- pin D-sub
and two female 25- pin D-sub connectors
(ED7C849-30 G10)
Note: RxTip1" stands for: Rx = Downstream (from CO to subscriber)
Tip = Tip-wire (a-wire)
1 = E1 port 1 for Up- and Downstream
Y
23
20
8-pair E1 cable with
male 25- pin D- sub
and open end to DDF
(ED7C849-30 G11x)
BK-BL
BL-BK
5
22
3
_
4G
E1 port 7, Up
8
46
4
TxTip7
TxRing7
BK-G
G_BK
_
7
3K
43
E1 port 8, Up
33
47
5
to
53
4Y
RxRing4
RxTip4
35
44
TxTip8
TxRing8
BK-S
S-BK
35
5G
K
to
3K
54
RxRing6
RxTip6
NC
38
36
3_
4K
8-pair E1 cable with
male 25- pin D-sub
and open end to DDF
(ED7C849-30 G11x)
Downstream means: Receive, towards the subscriber
Upstream means: Transmit, towards the service node (SN)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-34
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
Installing the E1 cables from the AFME1 to the E1
cross-connect
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Use this procedure to install E1 feeder cables in a BB subsystem from
the AFME1 to the E1 cross-connect.
If the AFM is already installed, the procedure describes how to install
the cables and to connect them. If the AFM is not yet installed, the
procedure describes how to install the cables. In this case the
connection to the AFM will be done during turn-up of the system.
The AFME1 works in simplex mode and cannot be daisy-chained.
Equipment
Installation
The following equipment is required per AFME1 for the connection
towards the ATM network:
•
One Y-cable ED7C849-30 G10
•
Two 8-pair E1 cables (ED7C849-30 G11x)
•
Grounding clips.
Proceed as follows:
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Verify that no a/b cable is installed to the blank faceplate of the slot
position where the AFM will be installed.
Otherwise disconnect this a/b cable from the faceplate, cut the cable
tie on the guiding finger and place the cable in the cable trough above
the already installed a/b-cables. If the work order specifies remove
this a/b cable completely.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Obtain two 8-pair E1 cables (ED7C849-30 G11x) with the length
required to reach the E1 cross-connect /DDF or with the length stated
in the work order). For the first cable mark the 25- pin D-sub
connector with P1/Tx and mark the open end in the same manner. For
the second cable mark the 25-pin D-sub connector and the open end
with P2/Rx.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Install the two 8-pair E1 cables with their male 25-pin D-sub
connectors from top of the rack in the cable duct to the shelf where
the AFME1 is located.
•
Use the left cable duct if the AFME1 will be installed in a LAG
1900 Shelf
•
Use the right cable duct if the AFME1 will be installed in a ETSI
V5 Shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-35
Installing the E1 cables from the AFME1 to
the E1 cross-connect
Cabling procedures
Pull the cable ends with the connectors through the shelf opening. The
free ends on top of the rack will be connected later.
Important! If the free space in the cable duct does not allow the
insertion of the cable with the connectors from top of the rack,
these two cables must be installed reverse with their open end
starting at the shelf opening and must be pulled-up with a pulling
wire to the top of the rack. This means, of course, the entire
cable will have to be pulled up trough the cable duct.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
If
then
the AFME1 Y-cable ED7C849-30
G10 is not available
place the two 8-pair E1 cables
secured in the cabling area for
later connection. Go to Step 10.
the AFME1 Y-cable ED7C849-30
G10 is available
verify that the UNC 4-40 nuts on
connector hoods of the two
25-pin connectors are tight. If
required tighten the four nuts.
Otherwise it could be difficult to
loose the screws if the
connectors have to be
disconnected later.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Connect the female 25-pin D-sub connector marked with J1 of the
ED7C849-30 G10 cable to the male P1/Tx connector of the 8-pair E1
ED7C849-30 G11x cable and secure the connection with the UNC
4-40 screws of the connector hood. Connect the second 25-pin D-sub
connector of the AFME1 Y-cable marked with J2 to the male P2/Rx
connector of the 8-pair E1 cable and secure the connection with the
UNC 4-40 screws of the connector hood.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
If
then
the AFME1 is not installed
place the AFME1 Y-cable
secured in the cabling trough for
later connection. Do not remove
the blank faceplate. Go to Step
10.
the AFME1 is installed
place the AFME1 Y-cable so that
the 37-pin Dsub connector J3
reaches the middle of the
AFME1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-36
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Installing the E1 cables from the AFME1 to
the E1 cross-connect
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
7
Attach a grounding clip to the Y-cable (near the 37-pin D-sub
connector) close to the AFM port. The grounding clip creates
electrical connection between cable shield and shelf framework.
............................................................................................................................................................
8
Connect the male 37-pin D-sub connector of the AFME1 Y-cable to
the faceplate connector of the AFME1 pack and place the two
connected 25-pin connectors in the background of the cabling trough.
............................................................................................................................................................
9
Fix the cables in the cable duct area with cable ties as required.
............................................................................................................................................................
10
Route the open ends of the Transmit and Receive cables from top of
the rack to the DDF.
............................................................................................................................................................
11
On the DDF connect the Tx open ends for the E1 Transmit
(Upstream) ports and the Rx open ends for the E1 Receive
(Downstream) ports to the E1 cross-connect or DDF as indicated in
the work order. The pinning and the color coding of these both cables
can be found in Figure 5-17, “Pinning for the AFME1 cabling” (5-34).
............................................................................................................................................................
12
If required equip this cabling with the primary protection according to
local regulations or as indicated in the work order.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-37
Cabling procedures
Installing
the E1 cables for the SHDSL AP LPS510
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This procedure describes the E1 cabling for the SHDSL AP LPS510 if
the E1 feature of the LPS510 is used. The maximum distance to the
E1 cross-connect or to digital distribution frame (DDF) can be about
300 ft (≈ 91.5 m).
Connectors on SHDSL AP
The SHDSL AP LPS510 is equipped with the standard 68-pin
faceplate connector for the SHDSL ports and is additionally equipped
with a 20-pin AMP connector for 4 unstructured E1 ports. The E1
connector is located directly above the 68-pin AP faceplate connector.
SHDSL E1 cables
One Y-cable ED7C860-30 G1 and two ED7C860-30 G2x cables are
required per SHDSL AP LPS510 if the E1 feature of the LPS510 has
to be used.
Table 5-3
Length of E1 cables for the SHDSL AP LPS510
Description
1
Code
E1 Y-cable for LPS510
ED7C860-30 G1
4-pair E1 cable (two cables2 are
required per LPS510)
ED7C860-30 G2x3
Notes:
1.
With exposed shield. The cross-section of the Group 1 cable is 28
AWG (≈ 0.3 mm diameter), the length is 3 ft (≈ 0.9 m).
2.
The cross-section of the Group 2x cable is 26 AWG (≈ 0.4 mm
diameter).
3.
For connecting to the E1 connector of the SHDSL AP LPS510 a
9-pair Y-cable ED7C860-30 G1 is used which splits the 4 E1
Upstream/Downstream ports in a Transmit (Upstream) cord and a
Receive (Downstream) cord. The two separate 4-pair E1 cables
ED7C860-30 G2x are connected to the Y-cable (see next figure).
Their other open ends can be connected to the external E1
cross-connect or to digital distribution frame (DDF). The ninth pair of
the Y-cable ED7C860-30 G1 cable is unused.
The Y-cable ED7C860-30 G1 is equipped with a female 20-pin AMP
connector (.050 series) and two female 9-pin D-sub connectors for
Upstream/Downstream each. The AMP connector connects to the E1
faceplate connector on the LPS510.
The two cables ED7C860-30 G2x are equipped on the one side with a
male 9-pin D-sub connector which connects to the 9-pin female D-sub
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-38
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Installing the E1 cables for the SHDSL AP
LPS510
Cabling procedures
connector of the E1 Y-cable ends of the ED7C860-30 G1 Y-cable. The
other open end is used for connecting to the E1 cross-connect.
For more details on the pinning and the cabling coding sequence of
the connector refer to “SHDSL application pack (LPS510)” (4-103)
The figure below shows the cabling principle for the E1 cabling for
the LPS510.
SHDSL E1 cabling
During installation the two 4-pair E1 cables ED7C860-30 G2x are
routed with their 9-pin D-sub connectors in the left (or right) cable
duct to the LPS510 position in the same manner as the a/b-cables are
installed.
Figure 5-18 E1 cabling principle for the SHDSL AP LPS510
LPS510
n:m
Cable area w.
exposed braided
shield
4 x E1 (Tx)
Tx
FAULT
1
J1
1
1
ED7C860-30-G2x for Transmit pairs
P1/Tx
1
E1
ED7C860-30-G1
Y-cable
Rx
1
4 x E1 (Rx)
1
ED7C860-30-G2x for Receive pairs
AP connector
20-pin AMP connector
J2
P2/Rx
RTH4455AAB
68-pin AP connector
for the 8 SHDSL ports
Note: The 20-pin AMP connector does not have a designation marking due to its unique design.
Procedure
1
............................................................................................................................................................
If an a/b-cable is already installed to the blank faceplate of the slot
position for the LPS510 do not remove or disconnect this cable.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-39
LPS510
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Obtain one Y-cable ED7C860-30 G1 and two 4-pair E1 cables
(ED7C860-30 G2x) with the length required to reach the E1
cross-connect/DDF.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Mark the two 4-pair E1 cables ED7C860-30 G2x. For the first cable
mark the 9-pin D-sub connector with P1/Tx and the slot position of
the LPS510 and mark the open end in the same manner. For the
second cable mark the 9-pin D-sub connector and the open end with
P2/Rx and the slot position of the LPS510.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
Install the two 4-pair E1 cables with their 9-pin D-sub connectors
from top of the rack in the cable duct to the shelf where the LPS510
is located. Pull the cable ends with the connectors through the shelf
opening.
Note: If the free space in the left cable duct does not allow the
insertion of the cable with the connectors from top of the rack these
two cables must be installed in reverse order with their open end
starting at shelf opening and must be pulled-up with a pulling wire to
the top of the rack.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Label the 20-pin AMP connector of the Y-cable ED7C860-30 G1 with
E1 and the slot position of the LPS510. Add the slot position to the J1
and J2 labels of the two 9-pin D-sub connectors.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Connect the female 9-pin D-sub connector marked with J1 of the
ED7C860-30 G1 cable to the male P1/Tx connector of the 4-pair E1
ED7C860-30 G2x cable and secure the connection with the UNC 4-40
screws of the connector hood. Connect the second 9-pin D-sub
connector of the E1 Y-cable marked with J2 to the male P2/Rx
connector of the 4-pair E1 cable and secure the connection with the
UNC 4-40 screws of the connector hood. Move the 9-pin D-sub
connectors from the cable trough through the shelf opening into the
upright cable duct.
............................................................................................................................................................
7
On the E1 Y-cable ED7C860-30 G1 verify that the UNC 4-40 nuts on
connector hoods of the two 9-pin connectors are tight. If required
tighten the four nuts.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-40
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
LPS510
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
8
If the LPS510 is not installed place the E1 Y-cable with the 20-pin
AMP connector secured in the cabling area for later connection.
If the LPS510 is installed place the E1 Y-cable so that the 20-pin
AMP connector reaches the female 20-pin AMP connector of the E1
Y-cable to the E1 faceplate connector of the LPS510.
............................................................................................................................................................
9
Arrange the cables between the guiding fingers.
............................................................................................................................................................
10
Route the open ends of the Transmit and Receive cables ED7C860-30
G2x from top of the rack to the DDF.
............................................................................................................................................................
11
On the DDF connect the Tx open ends for the E1 Transmit
(Upstream) ports and the Rx open ends for the E1 Receive
(Downstream) ports to the E1 cross-connect or DDF as indicated in
the work order.
............................................................................................................................................................
12
If required equip this cabling with the primary protection according to
local regulations or as indicated in the work order.
............................................................................................................................................................
13
Repeat this procedure for all slot positions where LPS510 have to be
installed.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-41
Cabling procedures
Installing
a/b-cables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This procedure consists of installing the external prefabricated
a/b-cables for POTS, ISDN, ADSL and VoIP in the rack and connect
them to the blank faceplates within the shelves.
The a/b-cables should not be installed to slot positions where AFMs,
IPFMs and/or OAPs have to be inserted. Consider that an OAP
occupies two slot positions. The other end must be connected to the
MDF according to local conditions or requirements of the network
provider as described in “Connection of the a/b cables to the MDF”
(5-115).
Note
Although ADSL APs also use a/b cables, refer to “Installing ADSL
cables - Overview” (5-44) for detailed information on installing ADSL
cables.
Installing E1 cabling for the SHDSL AP LPS510 is described in
“Installing the E1 cables for the SHDSL AP LPS510” (5-38).
a/b Cables
The following cables are used for a/b cabling:
Table 5-4
External orderable cables: Cables for a/b-cabling
Equipment code
Description
ED7C818–30 G1x
1
Shielded a/b cables (1 x 32
pairs)
ED7C873–31 G1x
1
Shielded a/b cables (2 x 32 pairs
for 64 port APs)
Connectorized only on one end
with two special AP connectors.
ED7C873–31 G2x
1
Shielded a/b cable for VoIP APs.
Notes:
1.
AP connector pinning
For the different cable lengths refer to the Ordering Guide
(363-211-144).
The pinning of all application pack connectors used for the different
APs can be found in “Circuit pack and application pack connectors”
(4-79). Four pins on this 68-pin connector are shorted so that the
system can verify whether an application pack cable is connected or
not. pinning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-42
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
Assumption
The described procedure assumes that the a/b cables are fed to the
rack from the top of the rack.
But if the a/b cables are fed to the rack from the floor, then start the
cabling with the shelf in the highest position.
Important! As shown in the table above, special cable types are
used for some APs. Make sure that the correct cable types are
routed to the individual AP slots.
Installing the a/b cables
Proceed as follows:
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Two people are required to feed the cables through the cable duct.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Mark lables by hand in accordance with the route/system numbering
scheme. Stamp or mark each connector. Mark the other cable end in
the direction of the MDF with the same label designation. Check the
work order for the correct marking.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Sort the cables in that way that the right and left cable duct is evenly
occupied.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
First take the a/b cables for the shelf in the lowest position. Starting
from the cable trough feed the open cable ends through the opening at
both sides of the shelves into the cable ducts and push them to the
cable grid on top of the rack.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Fix the 68-pin AP connectors of the a/b-cables to the blank faceplates
and arrange the cables between the guiding fingers.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Carefully push the cables to the back of the duct.
............................................................................................................................................................
7
Repeat this procedure for the a/b cables for shelf 2 and shelf 3 if
applicable.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-43
Cabling procedures
Installing
ADSL cables - Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Cabling principles
For subscriber lines carrying data (ADSL) and narrowband services
(POTS/ISDN) splitters are used to ″combine″ the narrowband and the
ADSL ports. The main components of the splitter are a low pass filter
(LPF) for the POTS/ISDN side, a high pass filter (HPF) for the ADSL
side and a DC-blocking capacitor for protecting the ADSL port being
affected by the feeding (or ringing) of the POTS/ISDN port.
Depending on the location of the splitter or the parts of the splitter
three different cabling scenarios are used in principle:
•
If the complete splitter is located on the ADSL AP the ports of
the POTS/ISDN AP are connected to the appropriate inputs of the
ADSL AP and the outputs of the ADSL AP carrying data and
narrowband services are routed to the subscriber. For the
connecting pattern see Figure 5-19, “ADSL/POTS cabling and
rerouting principle if the complete splitter is on the ADSL AP”
(5-46).
•
If the splitter parts are located on both the POTS/ISDN and the
ADSL APs the POTS/ISDN ports and the ADSL ports belonging
together are connected in parallel directly and then routed to the
subscriber This applies to the 32-port ADSL AP LPA432 and the
32-port POTS AP LPZ110 only. For connecting pattern see
Figure 5-20, “ADSL/POTS cabling principle for separate splitters
shared on the ADSL AP and the POTS AP” (5-47).
•
If an external splitter shelf is used the POTS/ISDN ports and the
ADSL ports are routed to the appropriate inputs of the splitter
shelf and the outputs of the splitter shelf carrying data and
narrowband services are routed to the subscriber. For connecting
pattern see Figure 5-21, “ADSL/POTS cabling principle for
external splitter shelf with free routing capability” (5-48).
The ADSL32 packs LPA432 (POTS over ADSL) and LPA434 (ADSL
over ISDN) are cabled to service-dependent modules (splitter modules
or connect-through modules) integrated in a module container on the
MDF instead of disconnect terminal blocks, see “New installation
concept” (A-13).
The Table 5-5, “Combinations for POTS/ISDN and ADSL APs”
(5-49) shows the possible combinations of the different APs and
shows also the appropriate connecting scheme.
Binder group restrictions
for the OSP feeder cable
A single binder group in the outside plant (OSP) feeder cable should
not contain subscriber lines that connect to both an ADSL over ISDN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-44
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
AP and to an ADSL over POTS AP as this configuration may cause
spectral interference.
Important! It is permissible for a single binder group to contain
both subscriber lines providing combined ADSL and ISDN (or
ADSL and POTS) service, and subscriber lines providing only
narrowband services (i.e., POTS or ISDN only).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-45
Cabling principle for
splitter completely located
on the ADSL AP
Cabling procedures
The figure below shows the cabling if the splitter is completely
located on the ADSL AP.
Figure 5-19 ADSL/POTS cabling and rerouting principle if the
complete splitter is on the ADSL AP
Original POTS-only connection which has been
removed for ADSL upgrade
AnyMedia
POTS AP
Primary protection
(protector block / GDT)
32x2
POTS
Line
Interface
2
2
Z port
POTS
Line
Interface
Subscriber line carrying
POTS only
2
2
2
POTS and data services
POTS
2
32x2
AnyMedia
ADSL AP
Splitter
LPF
ADSL AP
Transceiver
Z port
2
HPF
ADSL
port
Splitter
LPF
ADSL AP
Transceiver
2
HPF
2
Z port
2
2
data services only
ADSL
port
switch side
(connection/switching type)
MDF
subscriber side
(disconnection type)
Note that although only POTS are shown here, also ISDN APs can be
used instead, if the appropriate ADSL AP has been selected, see also
Table 5-5, “Combinations for POTS/ISDN and ADSL APs” (5-49).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-46
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
splitter shared on POTS
and ADSL AP
Cabling procedures
The figure below shows the cabling if the splitter is shared on the
POTS/ISDN AP (LPF) and the ADSL AP (HPF). This applies to the
32-port ADSL AP LPA432 and the 32-port POTS AP LPZ110 only.
Figure 5-20 ADSL/POTS cabling principle for separate splitters
shared on the ADSL AP and the POTS AP
Original POTS-only connection which has been
AnyMedia
POTS AP LPZ110
Primary protection
32x2
Splitter
POTS
Line
Interface
LPF
POTS
Line
Interface
LPF
2
2
Z port
POTS only
2
2
2
POTS
2
POTS and data services
ED7C818-30 Gr1x
AnyMedia
ADSL AP LPA432
32x2
2
2 wires of the same type per IDC
(must have the same diameter)
or
a 2-pole connection cord inserted
into the MDF module is used for
the connection POTS to ADSL
2
2
Splitter
ADSL AP
Transceiver
HPF
ADSL AP
Transceiver
HPF
data services only
ED7C818-30 Gr1x
switch side
external splitter shelf
MDF
subscriber side
The figure below shows the cabling if an external splitter shelf is
used. The figure shows for example a situation where the HPF and the
DC blocking capacitor are located on the ADSL AP and the LPF is
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-47
Cabling procedures
located on the splitter boards of the external splitter shelf. Also
another splitter arrangements are possible.
Figure 5-21 ADSL/POTS cabling principle for external splitter
shelf with free routing capability
POTS AP
Original (old) POTS-only
connection which has been
32x2
POTS
Line
Interface
2
Primary protection
2
2
Z port
Subscriber line
carrying POTS
services only
2
POTS
Line
Interface
2
2
Z port
24x2 pair*
POTS
Line
Interface
2
2
Z port
24x2 pair*
2
AnyMedia ADSL AP
LPA432
Splitter
HPF
PHONE
LPF
Subscriber lines
carrying:
2
Splitter
ADSL AP
Transceiver
LPF
Line
ADSL AP
Transceiver
ADSL
ADSL
Splitter
shelf
32x2
PHONE
2
ED7C818-30 Gr1x
HPF
POTS and data
2
Splitter protection
(GDT + fuse)
2
POTS and data
2
*Note: The cable required depends on
the connectors used for the splitter shelf.
24x2 pair*
Splitter
ADSL AP
Transceiver
HPF
2
2
2
Subscriber line
carrying data
services only
ED7C818-30 Gr1x
Distribution
Distribution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-48
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
Installing
ADSL cables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This procedure is used to install the ADSL cables. The ADSL cabling
depends on the site situation and on the MDF type, on the AP and on
the splitter shelf used. Therefore, the cabling procedure is described in
principle only. The cabling has to be done in the order described
below.
Procedure
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Identify the narrowband port (POTS/ISDN) and the appropriate ADSL
port which have to be ″combined″ according to the work order or
according to the information given by the network provider.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
If the subscriber has to be upgraded from narrowband-only service
(POTS/ISDN only) to narrowband and data service remove on the
MDF the internal cross-connection from the switch side to the
subscriber side for this subscriber.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Connect the appropriate POTS/ISDN port with the ADSL port
according to one of the three cabling principles described in Figure
5-19, “ADSL/POTS cabling and rerouting principle if the complete
splitter is on the ADSL AP” (5-46) to Figure 5-21, “ADSL/POTS
cabling principle for external splitter shelf with free routing
capability” (5-48) depending on the splitter location.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
Route the combined ADSL and POTS/ISDN output to the subscriber
terminals on the subscriber side of the MDF.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Check the required primary protection of this subscriber according to
local regulations.
The table below shows the combinations for connecting the
POTS/ISDN APs and the ADSL APs.
Table 5-5
Narrowband and ADSL AP to be combined:
POTS AP
LPZ100 (32 sl),
LPZ12xB (32 sl)
1
ISDN AP
ADSL AP
Remark
-
LPA400 (4 c),
-
LPA408 (8 c),
LPA416 (16 c),
LPA419 (16 c)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-49
Table 5-5
Cabling procedures
(continued)
Narrowband and ADSL AP to be combined:
POTS AP
ext. POTS w/o LPF
ISDN AP
1
ADSL AP
Remark
LPA400 (4 c),
Restrictions of ext. POTS
should be checked
LPA408 (8 c),
LPA416 (16 c),
LPA419 (16 c)
LPZ110 (32 l)2
ext. POTS w. LPF,
ext. POTS wo LPF
-
-
LPA432 (32 h)
-
-
LPA432 (32 h)
Using ext. splitter shelf or
splitter module
LPU112 (12 sl)1
LPA414 (4 c),
-
LPU430 (16 sl)
LPA417 (16 c),
3
ext. ISDN w/o LPF
1
LPA414 (4 c),
LPA417 (16 c),
-
LPU430 (16 sl)
3
LPA434 (32 h)
Restrictions of ext. ISDN
should be checked
Using ext. splitter shelf or
splitter module
Notes:
1.
Connection principle similar to: Figure 5-19, “ADSL/POTS cabling and rerouting principle if the complete
splitter is on the ADSL AP” (5-46).
2.
Connection principle similar to: Figure 5-20, “ADSL/POTS cabling principle for separate splitters shared
on the ADSL AP and the POTS AP” (5-47)
3.
Connection principle similar to: Figure 5-21, “ADSL/POTS cabling principle for external splitter shelf with
free routing capability” (5-48) or Figure A-10, “Wiring diagram” (A-28).
In the table above the number of supported ports per AP is indicated
in the brackets and also the type of splitter:
•
sl means no splitter on the AP
•
c means the complete splitter (LPF + HPF +DC-blocking
capacitor) is on the AP
•
l means the low pass filter is located on the AP
•
h means the high pass filter is located on the AP.
Important! For Lucent APs the standard a/b-cables are used for
connecting from the AP faceplate to the MDF or to the external
splitter shelf. For cabling also the number of ports used per
ADSL and POTS/ISDN AP has to be considered.
END OF STEPS
..................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-50
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
Installing
the E1 feeder cables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This procedure consists of installing the external prefabricated E1
cables which are available in different lengths and connecting their
connectors to the E1 connectors of the connector fields on the shelves.
The other end must be connected to the digital distribution frame
(DDF) according to local conditions or requirements of the network
provider.
For the E1 cabling from DDF to IO_E1 packs 120 Ω are used. But if
an external cabling with 75 Ω is required, there are also 75 Ω coax
cables orderable (for ETSI V5 Shelves).
Note that when turning up the system the IO_E1 packs inside the
shelves must be configured via 9 jumpers on each IO_E1 to the
required impedance of 120 Ω (default factory setting) or 75 Ω as
shown in Figure 4-29, “E1 cable (75 Ω)” (4-38).
Note
Installing E1 cabling for the SHDSL AP LPS510 is described in
“Installing the E1 cables for the SHDSL AP LPS510” (5-38).
Cables
Table 5-6
E1 feeder cables
Shelf type
Description
Destination 1
Destination 2
Code
ETSI V5 Shelf
E1 cable, 120 Ω
DDF
D1, E1, F1, G1
EDC7C818-36
GR2x 1
DDF
D1, E1, F1, G1
EDC7C818-36
GR3x 1
DDF
J101, J102
EDC7C874-31
GR1x 1
for upstream and
downstream direction
1 cable per 8 ports
E1 cable, 75 Ω
for upstream and
1 cable per 8 ports
LAG 1900 Shelf
E1 cable, 120 Ω
for upstream and
1 cable per 8 ports
Notes:
1.
For the different cable lengths refer to the Ordering Guide (363-211-144).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-51
Install E1 cables
Cabling procedures
Proceed as follows:
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Obtain the E1 cables of the correct length for the rack location.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Fill in system ID lables by hand in accordance with the route/system
numbering scheme. Stamp or mark each E1 connector with the correct
connector designation. Mark the other cable end in the direction of the
DDF with the same label designation. Check the work order for the
correct marking.
For the connector pinning and the E1 cable description refer to “E1
connectors (D1/E1/F1/G1)” (4-32) for the ETSI V5 Shelf and to “E1
connectors (J101/J102)” (4-58)” for the LAG 1900 Shelf.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Put the cable ends with the attached D-sub connectors on the cable
grid on top of the rack.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
Feed all E1 cables down in the right cable duct of the rack.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
In height of the connector fields on top of the shelves push the
connectors through the openings of the shelves.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Connect the 25-pin D-sub connectors to the E1 connectors on the
connector fields. Connectors are J101 and J102 for the LAG 1900
Shelf and D1 through G1 for the ETSI V5 Shelf. The connections are
shown in Figure 4-20, “Shelf Connection Panel (ETSI V5 Shelf)”
(4-27) for the ETSI V5 Shelf and in Figure 4-41, “LAG 1900 Shelf
connector field” (4-53) for the LAG 1900 Shelf.
............................................................................................................................................................
7
Screw down the cable connector hoods to the mating connectors on
the connector fields.
All cable shields are grounded at the shelf through the cable connector
hoods which have been screwed down to the mating connectors on the
shelf connection panel.
............................................................................................................................................................
8
Route the cables and dress the cables neatly with cable ties or cord.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-52
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Table 5-7
Cabling procedures
E1 feeders
Shelf type
E1 connectors on
the shelf
IO_E1 pack
E1 cable
LAG 1900 Shelves
J101 (downstream)
IO_E1_1 port 1 ... 4
E1 cable No. 1 (8 pairs)
IO_E1_2 port 1 ... 4
J102 (upstream)
IO_E1_1 port 1 ... 4
IO_E1_2 port 1 ... 4
ETSI V5 Shelves
D1 (downstream)
IO_E1_1 port 1 ... 4
IO_E1_2 port 1 ... 4
F1 (upstream)
IO_E1_1 port 1 ... 4
IO_E1_2 port 1 ... 4
E1 (downstream)
IO_E1_1 port 1 ... 4
IO_E1_2 port 1 ... 4
G1 (upstream)
IO_E1_1 port 1 ... 4
IO_E1_2 port 1 ... 4
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-53
Cabling procedures
Installing
fiber cables for AFMO packs - Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This section describes the cabling procedures for the AFMO packs
using fiber cables. Depending on the fiber length, the installation of
optical attenuators will be required.
The connections can be made:
Connectors
•
In simplex AFM mode without daisy-chaining as described
“Installing fiber cables for simplex mode without daisy-chaining”
(5-59)
•
In simplex AFM mode with daisy-chaining as described in
“Installing fiber cables for simplex mode with daisy-chaining”
(5-64)
•
In duplex AFM mode without daisy-chaining as described in
“Installing fiber cables for duplex mode without daisy-chaining”
(5-69)
•
In duplex AFM mode with daisy-chaining as described in
“Installing fiber cables for duplex mode with daisy-chaining”
(5-74)
The AFMO LPA920 provides two optical feeder interfaces via two
duplex SC-type fiber connectors on the faceplate.
Each optical port of the AFMO supports two single SC-type
connectors or one duplex SC-type connector. Connectors TX-1, RX-1
on the AFM pack are used for upstream connection via two fiber
cables to/from the ATM Network or previous shelf in the daisy chain.
Connectors TX-2, RX-2 are used for downstream connection via two
fiber cables to/from the next daisy-chained shelf. In general a
recommended limit for daisy-chaining is eight BB subsystems. Each
upstream or downstream connection consists of 2 fiber cables, one for
Transmit (TX) and one for Receive (RX). The connectors are shown
in “AFMO pack” (4-94).
Fiber cables
Either a duplex fiber with a duplex SC-type connector or two single
fibers with single SC-type connectors can be used. All fibers are
single-mode fibers.
Note: The usage of an optical cable duct is recommended always
when fiber cables have to be installed in the rack. For the installation
of the optical cable duct see “Optical cable duct mounting” (3-25).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-54
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Installing fiber cables for AFMO packs Overview
Table 5-8
Cabling procedures
Single mode fiber jumpers (SC/SC-type connectors)
Ordering information for single protected fibers
Comcode
Length
Cable assembly, fiber optic, connectorized
408794535
5m
408795797
1.6 m
408795540
3m
408795524
2m
(protected fiber used towards the ATM network)
(protected fiber used for daisychaining)
Single fiber
Duplex fiber
Ordering
information
Comcode
Length
Ordering
information
Comcode
Lenght
LS1SCSC-02
106908247
2 feet (≈ 0.6 m)
LS2SCSC-02
107122434
2 feet (≈ 0.6 m)
LS1SCSC-04
106908254
4 feet (≈ 1.2 m)
LS2SCSC-05
107122442
4 feet (≈ 1.2 m)
LS1SCSC-05
106908262
5 feet (≈ 1.5 m)
LS2SCSC-02
107122459
5 feet (≈ 1.5 m)
LS1SCSC-10
106908270
10 feet (≈ 3 m)
LS2SCSC-10
107122475
10 feet (≈ 3 m)
LS1SCSC-15
106908288
15 feet (≈ 4.5 m)
LS2SCSC-15
107122483
15 feet (≈ 4.5 m)
LS1SCSC-16
107849804
16 feet (≈ 4.8 m)
LS2SCSC-16
107849812
16 feet (≈ 4.8 m)
LS1SCSC-20
106908296
20 feet (≈ 6 m)
LS2SCSC-20
107122509
20 feet (≈ 6 m)
LS1SCSC-25
106908304
25 feet (≈ 7.6 m)
LS2SCSC-25
107122517
25 feet (≈ 7.6 m)
LS1SCSC-30
106908312
30 feet (≈ 9.1 m)
LS2SCSC-30
107122533
30 feet (≈ 9.1 m)
LS1SCSC-35
106908320
35 feet (≈ 10.7
m)
LS2SCSC-35
107122541
35 feet (≈ 10.7
m)
LS1SCSC-40
106908338
40 feet (≈ 12 m)
LS2SCSC-40
107122558
40 feet (≈ 12 m)
LS1SCSC-50
107243404
50 feet (≈ 15 m)
LS2SCSC-50
107122574
50 feet (≈ 15 m)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-55
Single fiber
Cabling procedures
Duplex fiber
Ordering
information
Comcode
Length
LS1SCSC-55
107668782
55 feet (≈ 16.8
m)
LS1SCSC-60
107668790
60 feet (≈ 18.3
m)
LS1SCSC-65
107668808
65 feet (≈ 19.8
m)
LS1SCSC-70
107668816
70 feet (≈ 21.3
m)
LS1SCSC-75
106908387
75 feet (≈ 22.8
m)
LS1SCSC-80
107668824
80 feet (≈ 24.4
m)
LS1SCSC-85
107668832
85 feet (≈ 25.9
m)
LS1SCSC-90
107668840
90 feet (≈ 27.4
m)
LS1SCSC-95
107668857
95 feet (≈ 29 m)
LS1SCSC-100
106908395
100 feet (≈ 30.5
m)
Ordering
information
Comcode
Lenght
LS2SCSC-75
107122590
75 feet (≈ 22.8
m)
LS2SCSC-100
107122608
100 feet (≈ 30.5
m)
Note: Prior to connecting the fiber cables, the fibers should be
examined that they are clean. The fibers may be cleaned with optical
lint-free tissues or with canned compressed air.
The cable ends should be labeled during installation with the
designations which the cable ends have to be connected to.
Optical power attenuation
Due to the L1.1 long-haul laser transmitter/receiver characteristics
used for the AFMO pack the optical power must be reduced for the
receiver side if two AFMOs are connected via short fibers. Therefore
the fiber cabling should include optical attenuators depending on the
optical loss of the fibers, splices and connectors. The attenuators must
be ordered separately. Type and quantity of the attenuators are
site-specific and depend on the fiber cabling (length, number and
quality of the fibers, connectors and splices for example).
Typically the attenuation required in a daisy-chain is the same for the
transmit and the receive fiber. In general an attenuation of 15 dB is
sufficient for daisy-chaining of two AFMOs over short distances.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-56
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
For the calculation of fiber attenuation, see the Applications and
Planning Guide for Narrowband and ATM xDSL Services
(363–211–586).
The attenuators will be directly attached to the RX ports of the
AFMOs. Therefore they need to be equipped with a build-on SC-type
connector. The attenuators are commercially available. An example is
shown in the figure below.
Figure 5-22 Optical attenuator
Protective cap
Protective cap
SC-type connector
to be connected to
the AFMO port
Fiber cable has
to be connected here
The following optical SC-type attenuators are orderable from Lucent
Technologies
Table 5-9
Optical SC-type attenuators
Attenuator
type
Connector
style
Attenuator
values (dB)
Comcode
SC Build-on
Attenuator
SC-PC
5.0
108617549
10.0
108617556
15.0
108618554
20.0
108618562
The location where the attenuator is placed in the fiber loop has no
impact on the correct operation of the AFMOs. It is recommended
that the attenuator is attached directly to the Receive port of the
AFMOs. In this way the correct attenuator value can be verified using
the Transmit laser source of the far end and, if required the attenuator
can be adapted immediately to meet the optical receive power
requirements of the AFMO.
Duplex AFMO mode
In duplex AFMO mode two AFMOs are equipped per BB subsystem.
A cross-couple connector 995A as shown in the next figure is required
to interconnect the two AFMOs per shelf electrically.
For daisychaining duplex AFMOs, four fibers are needed per
daisychained BB subsystem.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-57
Cross couple connector
995A
Cabling procedures
The 995A cross couple connector (Comcode 108765587) is a small
device with two male keyed 40-pin connectors. The 995A cross
couple connects the two female cross couple ports on the faceplate of
both AFMOs in one BB subsystem. The cross couple 995A is installed
together with the AFMOs.
Figure 5-23 Cross couple connector 995A
995A
TOP
LUCENT
Fiber checking
General laser and fiber
safety information
All fiber loops should be checked with an optical power meter after
installation to ensure that the complete fiber routing and all connectors
have no impurities, that the right attenuators are equipped and that the
loop has been properly installed.
The optical AFM packs (AFMO) are equipped with a laser source.
Fibers are routed to these packs.
Lucent lightwave digital transmission system and associated optical
test sets use semiconductor laser transmitters. The lasers emit
lightwaves into lightguide cables, at or near infrared wavelengths that
is invisible to the human eye (wavelengths between 800 nm and 1600
nm).
For further information see “Laser safety guidelines” (1-15).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-58
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
Installing
fiber cables for simplex mode without daisy-chaining
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Use this procedure to install optical feeder cables for one BB
subsystem. If more than one (not daisy-chained) BB subsystem has to
be installed, repeat this procedure for each BB subsystem.
If the AFMO is already installed, the procedure describes how to
install the fiber cables and how to connect them to the AFMO. If the
AFMO is not yet installed, the procedure describes how to install the
cables. In this case the connection to the AFMO will be done during
turn-up of the system.
Assumptions
For this procedure only one AFMO pack has to be installed per BB
subsystem (simplex mode). The AFMO will not be in a daisy-chain.
The fiber attenuation on the receive port of the optical STM1
equipment side is not considered in this procedure. This applies
because the attenuation value and the attenuator type is
equipment-specific and will be provided in most cases by the network
provider.
Equipment
Following equipment is required:
•
An optical power meter for measuring the power of an optical
STM-1/OC-3c signal on fibers with SC-type connectors.
•
If necessary a pull-wire must be available.
•
Equipment to clean optical connectors or couplers should be
available.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-59
Installing fiber cables for simplex mode
Cabling procedures
•
Two protected fibers (comcode 408794535).
•
Two optical attenuators may be required, one on the AFMO, one
on the ATM transport network side (the installation of the
attenuator on the network side is not included in this procedure).
For the calculation of fiber attenuation, see the Applications and
Planning Guide for Narrowband and ATM xDSL Services
(363-211-586).
Figure 5-24 Cabling principle for simplex AFM mode without
daisy-chaining
Optical network
interface
STM-1
RX
TX
TX1
RX1
Fiber 408794535
AnyMedia shelf
AFMO
TX2
RX2
Attenuators
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-60
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
Procedure
CAUTION
............................................................................................................................................................
1
CAUTION
Laser hazard
damage to the skin and considerable injuries to the eyes. This applies
that the fiber is de-energized and ensure that the laser source can
Verify that no a/b cable is installed to the blank faceplate of the
AFMO slot position. Otherwise disconnect this a/b cable from the
faceplate.
Note: The AFMO/fibers should not be energized at this time. The
protective covers must be left on the fiber connectors until the
connectors have to be connected.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-61
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Obtain the two optical fiber cables from the ATM transport network
(408794535) and verify that the end of the transport transmit cable connected to the transmit port of the optical STM-1 equipment - is
labeled RX-1 on the AFMO side. Verify that the end of the transport
receive cable - connected to the receive port of the optical STM-1
equipment - is labeled TX-1 on the AFMO side. The marking on the
STM-1 equipment side is site-specific.
Note: Often the receive and the transmit ports of the optical
distribution panel are cross-connected internally, see next figure.
Therefore for example TX-1 fiber is connected to TX (OUT) here.
Figure 5-25 Optical distribution panel cross-connections
AnyMedia
Optical distribution
panel
Optical interface of
the STM-1 ATM feeder
AFMO
TX-1
OUT
IN
RX
TX
Transmit
RX-1
Receive
IN
OUT
TX
RX
Receive
Transmit
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Route the two fibers carefully with their TX-1 and the RX-1 fiber
connectors from the top of the rack through the optical cable duct and
pull the fibers very carefully through the shelf opening.
Note: If required a pull-wire must be used.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
If the AFMO is not installed already place the two fiber assemblies in
front of the already installed a/b-cabling in the cable trough for later
installation. Verify that the open ends of the fibers are equipped with
the protective caps. Do not remove the blank faceplate.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-62
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
5
If the AFMO is installed already
•
Remove the protective caps of the optical attenuator as shown in
“Optical power attenuation” (5-56) and keep them for later use if
the fiber cabling has to be disconnected.
•
Connect the optical attenuator to the cable end RX-1
•
Test the fiber by following the fiber testing procedure in “Fiber
testing procedure” (5-80)
•
Attach the optical attenuator properly to the RX-1 port of the
AFMO
•
Remove the protective caps of the fibers and keep them for later
use if the fiber cabling has to be disconnected.
•
Connect the TX-1 cable end to the TX-1 faceplate connector of
the AFMO, connect the RX-1 cable connector to optical
attenuator on the RX-1 faceplate connector.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Fix the fibers with a waxed cord or with a small cable tie to the
guiding finger. Do not overtighten the cord or the cable tie. Fibers
should only be fixed loosely.
Important! Fiber pinching.
Fibers can be pinched or damaged by the cable tie if the tie is
overtighten. Make sure that the cables are properly placed and
secured to the guiding finger and the cable tie is not overtighten.
............................................................................................................................................................
7
If the work order specifies the testing of the fibers go to the fiber
testing procedure in “Fiber testing procedure” (5-80)
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-63
Cabling procedures
Installing
fiber cables for simplex mode with daisy-chaining
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Use this procedure to install optical feeder cables for a BB subsystem
with daisy-chaining.
For daisy chaining the TX2/RX2 connectors of the previous AMFO
pack in the chain must be connected to the RX1/TX1 connectors of
the next AFMO pack in the chain. In general a recommended limit for
daisy-chaining is eight BB subsystems.
If the AFMOs are already installed, the procedure describes how to
install the fiber cables and how to connect them to the AFMOs. If the
AFMOs are not yet installed, the procedure describes how to install
the fiber cables. In this case the connection to the AFMOs will be
done during turn-up of the system.
Assumptions
For this procedure the use of only one AFMO pack per BB subsystem
is assumed (simplex mode). The AFMO will be in a daisy-chain.
•
•
•
available.
•
Two protected fibers for the connection towards the ATM
network (408794535)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-64
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
with daisy-chaining
Cabling procedures
•
Two protected fibers for the connection to the next AFMO in the
daisy-chain. The fiber length depends on which BB subsystems
have to be daisychained. Select the appropriate length.
•
Two optical attenuators are required for the network connection,
one on the AFMO, one on the ATM transport network side (the
installation of the attenuator on the network side is not included
in this procedure). For the calculation of fiber attenuation, see the
Applications and Planning Guide for Narrowband and ATM
xDSL Services (363–211–586).
Figure 5-26 Cabling principle for simplex AFM mode with
daisy-chaining
Optical network
interface
STM-1
RX
TX
TX1
RX1
Fiber 408794535
First BB subsystem
in the daisy-chain
Next BB subsystem
in the daisy-chain
AFMO
TX2
RX2
TX1
RX1
AFMO
TX2
RX2
Boundary indicating which equipment
is associated with which shelf/row
Attenuators
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-65
with daisy-chaining
Cabling procedures
Procedure
CAUTION
............................................................................................................................................................
1
CAUTION
Laser hazard
Start this procedure with the first AFMO in the daisy-chain.
Note: The AFMOs/fibers should not be energized at this time. The
............................................................................................................................................................
2
If the current AFMO is the first AFMO in the daisy-chain follow
“Installing fiber cables for simplex mode without daisy-chaining”
(5-59) to make the connections to the TX-1/RX-1 connectors.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-66
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
with daisy-chaining
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
3
If the AFMO has to be daisy-chained on ports RX-2/TX-2, two fiber
cables are required. The fiber length depends on which BB
subsystems have to be daisychained. Select the appropriate length.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
Mark for the first fiber cable one SC-type connector with RX-2 and
the other connector with TX-1. Mark the second fiber cable with
TX-2 and RX-1 accordingly.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Insert the two cables into the optical cable duct and route the
RX-2/TX-2 connectors from the cable duct through the shelf opening
where the current AFMO is located.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
If the AFMO in this previous BB subsystem is not installed already
place the two fiber assemblies in front of the already installed
a/b-cabling in the cable trough for later installation. Verify that the
open ends of the fiber are equipped with the protective caps. Do not
remove the blank faceplate.
Have the other cable ends ready for installation as described in Step 7
.
If the AFMO in this previous BB subsystem is installed already
•
Remove the protective caps of one optical attenuator as shown in
•
AFMO.
•
•
Connect the TX-2 fiber cable end to the TX-2 faceplate
connector of the AFMO, connect the RX-2 fiber cable connector
to the optical attenuator on the RX-2 faceplate connector.
............................................................................................................................................................
7
Route the other two free fiber cable ends (labeled TX-1 and RX-1)
through the optical cable duct, then through the opening of the shelf
row where the next AFMO in the daisy-chain is located, and then
through the cable trough below the row to the next AFMO in the
daisy-chain.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-67
with daisy-chaining
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
8
If the AFMO in this next BB subsystem is not installed already place
the two fiber assemblies in front of the already installed a/b-cabling in
the cable trough for later installation. Verify that the open ends of the
fibers are equipped with the protective caps. Do not remove the blank
faceplate.
If the AFMO is installed already:
•
Remove the protective caps of one optical attenuator as shown in
•
AFMO.
•
•
Connect the TX-1 fiber cable end to the TX-1 faceplate
connector of the AFMO, connect the RX-1 fiber cable connector
to the optical attenuator on the RX-1 faceplate connector.
............................................................................................................................................................
9
Fix the fibers very carefully with a waxed cord or with a small cable
tie to the guiding finger. Do not overtighten the cord or the cable tie.
The fibers should only be fixed loosely. Use only one cable tie per
grounding finger and arrange the cables so that they take up as little
space as possible.
The fibers can be pinched or damaged by the cable tie if the tie
is overtighten. Make sure that the cables are proper placed and
secured to the grounding finger and the cable tie is not
overtighten.
............................................................................................................................................................
10
............................................................................................................................................................
11
Repeat this procedure for the next AFMO in the daisy chain, if
applicable.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-68
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
Installing
fiber cables for duplex mode without daisy-chaining
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Use this procedure to install optical feeder cables for a BB subsystem
in duplex mode. A cross-couple connector has to be installed to the
faceplates of the AFMOs to connect them electrically.
the cables. In this case the connection to the AFMOs will be done
during turn-up of the system.
Assumptions
For this procedure two AFMO pack have to be installed per BB
subsystem (duplex mode). The AFMO will not be in a daisy-chain.
The fiber attenuation on the receive port of the optical STM1
provider.
Equipment
•
•
•
available.
•
Four protected fibers (comcode 408794535).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-69
Installing fiber cables for duplex mode
Cabling procedures
•
Four optical attenuators may be required, one on each of the
AFMOs, two on the ATM transport network side (the installation
of the attenuators on the network side is not included in this
procedure). For the calculation of fiber attenuation, see the
Applications and Planning Guide for Narrowband and ATM
xDSL Services (363-211-586).
•
One 995A cross couple connector (comcode 108765587) for
duplex cabling.
Figure 5-27 Cabling principle for duplex AFM mode without
daisy-chaining
Optical network
interface
STM-1
STM-1
RX
TX
RX
TX
TX1
RX1
TX1
RX1
Fiber 408794535
AnyMedia shelf
AFMO
TX2
995A cross
couple connector
RX2
AFMO
TX2
RX2
Attenuators
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-70
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
Procedure
CAUTION
............................................................................................................................................................
1
CAUTION
Laser hazard
Verify that no a/b cables are installed to the blank faceplate of the
AFMO slot positions. Otherwise disconnect the a/b cables from the
faceplate.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-71
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Obtain the four optical fiber cables from the ATM transport network
(408794535) and verify that the ends of the transport transmit cable connected to the transmit ports of the optical STM-1 equipment - are
labeled RX-1/slot number on the AFMO side. Verify that the ends of
the transport receive cable - connected to the receive ports of the
optical STM-1 equipment - are labeled TX-1/slot number on the
AFMO side. The marking on the STM-1 equipment side is
site-specific.
Note: Often the receive and the transmit ports of the optical
distribution panel are cross-connected internally, see figure below.
Therefore for example TX-1 fiber is connected to TX (OUT) here.
Figure 5-28 Optical distribution panel cross-connections
AnyMedia
Optical distribution
panel
Optical interface of
the STM-1 ATM feeder
AFMO
TX-1
OUT
IN
RX
TX
Transmit
RX-1
Receive
IN
OUT
TX
RX
Receive
Transmit
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Route the four fibers carefully with their TX-1/slot number and the
RX-1/slot number fiber connectors from the top of the rack through
the optical cable duct and pull the fibers very carefully through the
shelf opening.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
If the AFMOs are not installed already place the four fiber assemblies
in front of the already installed a/b-cabling in the cable trough for
later installation. Verify that the open ends of the fibers are equipped
with the protective caps. Do not remove the blank faceplate.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-72
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
If the AFMOs are installed already
•
Obtain one 995A cross couple connector (Comcode 108765587)
and plug into the cross couple ports of both AFMOs. The top of
the 995A cross couple connector is marked.
•
Remove the protective caps of the two optical attenuators as
shown in “Optical power attenuation” (5-56)and keep them for
later use if the fiber cabling has to be disconnected.
•
Connect the optical attenuators to the cable ends RX-1
•
Test the fibers by following the fiber testing procedure in “Fiber
testing procedure” (5-80)
•
Attach the optical attenuators properly to the RX-1 ports of the
AFMOs.
•
•
Regarding their labelled slot numbers connect the TX-1 cable
ends to the TX-1 faceplate connectors of the AFMOs, connect the
RX-1 cable connector to optical attenuators on the RX-1
faceplate connectors.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Fix the fibers with a waxed cord or with a small cable tie to the
guiding finger. Do not overtighten the cord or the cable tie. The fibers
should only be fixed loosely.
If the AFMOs are not yet installed, the cross-couple connector has to
be installed during system turn-up.
is overtighten. Make sure that the cables are properly placed and
............................................................................................................................................................
6
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-73
Cabling procedures
Installing
fiber cables for duplex mode with daisy-chaining
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Use this procedure to install optical feeder cables for BB subsystems
in duplex mode in a daisy-chain. Cross-couple connectors have to be
installed to the faceplates of both AFMOs in one BB subsystem to
connect them electrically.
For daisy chaining the TX2/RX2 connectors of the previous AFMO
packs in the daisy-chain must be connected to the RX1/TX1
connectors of the next AFMO packs in the chain. In general a
recommended limit for daisy-chaining is eight BB subsystems.
the cables. In this case the connection to the AFMOs will be done
during turn-up of the system.
Assumptions
For this procedure two AFMO packs have to be installed per BB
subsystem (duplex mode). The AFMO packs will be in a daisy-chain.
The fiber attenuation on the receive ports of the optical STM1
provider.
Equipment
•
•
•
available.
•
Four protected fibers (comcode 408794535) for the connection
towards the ATM network.
•
Four optical attenuators may be required for the connection
towards the ATM network, one on each of the AFMOs, two on
the ATM transport network side (the installation of the
attenuators on the network side is not included in this procedure).
For the calculation of fiber attenuation, see Applications and
Planning Guide for Narrowband and ATM xDSL services
(363-211-586).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-74
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
daisy-chaining
Cabling procedures
•
Four protected fibers per each daisychained BB subsystem for the
connection to the next AFMOs in the daisy-chain. The fiber
length depends on which BB subsystems have to be
daisychained. Select the appropriate length.
•
Four optical attenuators per the daisychained BB subsystem. In
general an attenuation of 15 dB is sufficient for daisy-chaining of
two AFMOs over short distances.
•
One 995A cross couple connector (comcode 108765587) for
duplex cabling per each duplex BB subsystem.
Figure 5-29 Cabling principle for duplex AFM mode with
daisy-chaining
Optical network
interface
STM-1
STM-1
RX
TX
RX
TX
TX1
RX1
TX1
RX1
Fiber 408794535
First BB subsystem
in the daisy-chain
AFMO
995A cross
couple connector
AFMO
TX2
RX2
TX2
RX2
TX1
RX1
TX1
RX1
Next BB subsystem
in the daisy-chain
AFMO
TX2
995A cross
couple connector
RX2
AFMO
TX2
RX2
Boundary indicating which equipment
is associated with which shelf/row
Attenuators
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-75
daisy-chaining
Cabling procedures
Procedure
CAUTION
............................................................................................................................................................
1
CAUTION
Laser hazard
Start this procedure with the first AFMO pair in the daisy-chain.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
If the current AFMO pair is the first AFMO pair in the daisy-chain
follow “Installing fiber cables for duplex mode without
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-76
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
daisy-chaining
Cabling procedures
daisy-chaining” (5-69) to make the connections to the TX-1/RX-1
connectors
............................................................................................................................................................
3
If the AFMOs have to be daisy-chained on ports RX-2/TX-2, four
protected fiber cables are required. The fiber length depends on which
BB subsystems have to be daisychained. Select the appropriate length.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
Mark on two fiber cables one SC-type connector with RX-2/slot
number and the other connector with TX-1/slot number. Mark the
other two fiber cables with TX-2/slot number and RX-1/slot number
accordingly.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Route the four fiber cables with the RX-2/TX-2 connectors from the
cable duct through the shelf opening where the current AFMO pair is
located.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
If the AFMOs are not installed already place the four fiber assemblies
in front of the already installed a/b-cabling in the cable trough for
later installation. Verify that the open ends of the fibers are equipped
with the protective caps. Do not remove the blank faceplate.
Have the other cable ends ready for installation as described in Step 7
.
If the AFMOs are installed already
•
•
Remove the protective caps of two optical attenuators as shown
in “Optical power attenuation” (5-56) and keep them for later use
if the fiber cabling has to be disconnected.
•
AFMOs.
•
•
Regarding their labeled slot numbers connect the TX-2 fiber
cable ends to the TX-2 faceplate connectors of the AFMOs,
connect the RX-2 fiber cable connectors to the optical attenuators
on the RX-2 faceplate connector.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-77
daisy-chaining
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
7
Obtain the other four free fiber cable ends (labeled TX-1/slot number
and RX-1/slot number) from the cable duct and route them through
the optical cable duct, then through the opening of the shelf row
where the next AFMOs in the daisy-chain are located, and then
through the cable trough below the row to the next AFMOs in the
daisy-chain.
............................................................................................................................................................
8
If the AFMOs in this next BB subsystem are not installed already
place the four fiber assemblies in front of the already installed
a/b-cabling in the cable trough for later installation. Verify that the
open ends of the fibers are equipped with the protective caps. Do not
remove the blank faceplate.
If the AFMOs are installed already:
•
•
Remove the protective caps of two optical attenuators as shown
in “Optical power attenuation” (5-56) and keep them for later use
if the fiber cabling has to be disconnected.
•
AFMOs.
•
•
Regarding their labelled slot numbers connect the TX-1 fiber
cable ends to the TX-1 faceplate connectors of the AFMOs,
connect the RX-1 fiber cable connectors to the optical attenuators
on the RX-1 faceplate connectors.
............................................................................................................................................................
9
tie to the guiding finger. Do not overtighten the cord or the cable tie.
The fibers should only be fixed loosely. Use only one cable tie per
grounding finger and arrange the cables so that they take up as little
space as possible.
is overtighten. Make sure that the cables are proper placed and
secured to the grounding finger and the cable tie is not
overtighten.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-78
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
daisy-chaining
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
10
............................................................................................................................................................
11
Repeat this procedure for the next AFMO in the daisy chain, if
applicable.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-79
Cabling procedures
Fiber
testing procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Procedure
1
Perform these steps in principle to verify that the complete fiber
routing and all connectors have no impurities, that the right LBOs are
equipped and that the fiber loop has been properly installed.
............................................................................................................................................................
CAUTION
Laser hazard
Verify that the testing is allowed to be executed because the fibers
have to be disconnected. Ensure that the transmit port of the fiber to
be tested is powered. If required power-up the laser source. Localize
the optical attenuator of the fiber loop. Be sure that the attenuator is
accessible and that other attenuators with a different attenuation are
available.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Obtain the optical power meter that can measure an STM-1/OC-3
optical signal on fibers with SC-type connectors.
Note: Prior to connecting the fiber cables, the fibers should be
examined that they are clean. The fibers may be cleaned with optical
lint-free tissues or with a wipe moistened with isopropyl alcohol and
blown dry with canned compressed air.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Move to the Receive port of the fiber which has to be examined.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-80
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
4
Disconnect the attenuator with the fiber attached on the Receive port
and connect the attenuator to the optical power meter.
Reference:
Wavelength: 1310 ±50 nm
Laser transmit average power: −5 dBm min., 0 dBm max.
Optical receive sensitivity: −34 dBm min., −10 dBm max.
These values apply to L1.1 lasers only, used on AFMO)
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Verify that the optical power is between the Receive Max and Receive
Min values as stated on the work order. If no value is given −22 dB
±1 dB should be sufficient for the AFMO.
•
If the power level is in the range of the work order go to Step 7.
•
If the power level is not in this range change the attenuators so
that the optical power is within this range. Go to Step 6.
Note: Reducing an attenuator should normally not happen. This could
also indicate that the fiber is defective (microbending) or a fiber
connector is not clean. Before replacing the attenuator the fiber should
be checked especially if the value difference is significantly.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Test the changed attenuator by repeating the measurement starting
with Step 3.
............................................................................................................................................................
7
Disconnect the attenuator with the fiber attached from the optical
power meter and reconnect it to the Receive port.
............................................................................................................................................................
8
tie to the grounding finger. Do not overtighten the cord or the cable
tie. The fibers should only be fixed loosely.
is overtighten. Make sure that the cables are properly placed and
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-81
Cabling procedures
Installing
IPFM uplink feeders
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Use this procedure to install IPFM uplink feeders from the IPFM(s)
towards the IP subsystem.
The IPFM provides two types of uplinks:
•
Up to two Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) uplinks GBIC1 and GBIC2
with GBIC modules inserted (fiber cables will be connected here)
•
Up to two Fast Ethernet (FE) uplinks FE1 and FE2 (electrical
cables will be connected here: 100 Base-T LAN connector,
designed as 8-pin RJ-45, female)).
Therefore the procedure is subdivided into two sub-procedures, one
for installing the fiber cables to the GBIC modules and one for
installing the electrical cables to the FE ports.
As the IP subsystem supports simplex operation mode and duplex
protection mode for the IPFM, the procedure may be performed a
second time for the protection IPFM if the IP subsystem will run in
duplex mode.
GBIC modules and cables
For installing fibers to the GbE uplinks, the following equipment is
required:
•
One GBIC module per GbE uplink
Depending on the reach, the following GBIC modules are
available:
–
1000Base-LX
–
1000Base-SX
•
One metal radius clip for each fiber cable
The clip has to be installed to protect the fiber if the shelf doors
will be closed.
•
The fiber cables will be provided by the customer. The following
is required:
•
–
All connectors are SC type.
–
The LX GBIC module accepts either single-mode fiber or
multi-mode fiber.
–
The SX GBIC module requires single-mode fiber.
If fiber cables have to be installed, it is recommended to use the
optional optical cable duct. For detailed information see “Optical
cable duct mounting” (3-25).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-82
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
FE uplink cables
Cabling procedures
For the electrical cables to the FE uplink ports the following cables
are required:
•
Commercially available 100BaseTX cable (also known as CAT 5
cable)
•
Wired ″straight-through″ as described in the table below
•
RJ-45 connectors on both ends
•
Length suitable for the distance between the IPFM and the
connection point in the IP network.
Table 5-10
Install fiber cables to the
GbE uplink ports
1
Pin assignment electrical cable
End A (IPFM)
End B (Connection point in the
IP network)
RJ-45
Pin
Signal
RJ-45
Pin
Signal
1
Transmit Data +
1
Transmit Data +
2
Transmit Data -
2
Transmit Data -
3
Receive Data +
3
Receive Data +
6
Receive Data -
6
Receive Data -
............................................................................................................................................................
CAUTION
Laser hazard
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-83
Cabling procedures
If the installation of an uplink feeder to a GbE uplink port is required,
insert the correct GBIC module in the GBIC opening GbE1 on the
faceplate of the IPFM.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Obtain one radius clip per fiber to connect to an GbE port.
Figure 5-30 Metal radius clip
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Slip the metal radius clip carefully under the rubber boot of the
customer provided fiber.
Figure 5-31 Metal radius clip and fiber
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-84
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
Figure 5-32 Mounted radius clip on fiber
............................................................................................................................................................
4
Insert the fiber into the clamp on the other end of the radius clip so
that the fiber is attached closely to the clip.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Connect the fiber to the GBIC module.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Route the fiber through the optical cable duct on the right side of the
rack.
............................................................................................................................................................
7
If applicable, repeat this sub-procedure for port FE2.
E
ND OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................
Install electrical cables to
the FE uplink ports
1
............................................................................................................................................................
If required connect the customer provided 10BaseT cable to port FE1
of the IPFM.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Route the cable through the left cable duct of the rack to the top.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
If applicable, repeat this sub-procedure for port FE2.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-85
Cabling procedures
Installing
OAM&P connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
The installation of OAM&P connections to the individual subsystems,
especially the installation of the LAN connection to the narrowband
subsystem is described in Appendix A, “Supplemental Information”.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-86
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
Installing
clock cables - J1C293B-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This procedure is applicable only for rack type J1C293B-1 and only if
external office clock will be used.
The ETSI V5 Shelves support simplex station clock. Both, balanced
input (120 Ω) and unbalanced input (75 Ω) from the external clock
source can be terminated. But while balanced input cables are
connected to the FFCU as described here, 75 Ω cables have to be
connected directly to the D2 connectors in the SCP of the ETSI V5
Shelves.
The procedure describes the requirements for manufacturing the 120
Ω clock cable and the installation of the external clock cable between
the clock distribution panel in the FFCU and the customer’s external
clock source.
Background information
The FFCU is located in the left part of the RFCP. For a description
refer to “Fan Filter and Clock Distribution Unit (FFCU) ” (4-8)
Note that jumper MP4 and MP5 on the CIU have to be set according
to the impedance used as shown below.
Figure 5-33 CIU jumper setting
MP5
3
HI
MI
MP4
75 Ω
3
1
120 Ω
1
Legend:
Factory settings are: 120 Ω, HI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-87
Cabling procedures
HI
high impedance
clock through, no termination
MI
matched impedance
clock terminated
Table 5-11
CIU jumper setting for 120 Ω and 75 Ω clock cables
CIU
Cable
Jumper
MP4
Jumper
MP5
Termination Setting valid for
impedance
Impedance
Type of
pair
120 (1-2)
HI (2-3)
high
impedance
DC-powered rack with
clock distribution
(CDP/FFCU)
120 Ω
symmetrical
other station clock
configuration
75 Ω
coaxial
75 (2-3)
MI (1-2)
1
75 Ω
Notes:
1.
clock through or external termination
Clock input cable
requirements
The clock input cables are user supplied. They must be manufactured
by the customer/installer.
Table 5-12
Requirements for clock input cable
Part
S-09YS(St)CY
1×2×0.6 (AWG24)
Description
Quantity
15-pin D-sub,
female, soldering
1
Metallic connector
hood with straight
cable outlet
1
Cable 4×2 shielded,
length according to
customer’s needs
twisted pair,
shielded, cable
impedance must be
120 Ω
1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-88
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
External shielded clock cable: CDP/FFCU, connector 1 to external
clock source
Table 5-13
Pin assignment
Female conn.
1 (from male
15-pin conn. 1
on CDP/FFCU)
Clock signal
1
should not be
used
2
should not be
used
3
not connected
4
should not be
used
5
SC_IN_T
6
not connected
7
should not be
used
8
not connected
9
should not be
used
10
not connected
11
should not be
used
12
SC_IN_R
13
not connected
14
should not be
used
15
not connected
Wire
External clock
source, end
according to
customer’s
equipment
clock_in Tip wire(1)
clock_in Ring wire(1)
Notes:
1.
Twisted pair, impedance 120 Ω.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-89
1
2
9
3
10
5
4
11
12
ms
Figure 5-34 Dummy load connector
6
13
7
121
Oh
Dummy load connector for
clock termination
Cabling procedures
14
8
15
Dummy load
(view of soldering side)
Notes:
All clock cable connectors internally connected by:
Dummy load connector:
pin 12 to pin 13 and pin 5 to pin 6
121 W, 1% or 2%, 0.125 W between pin 5 and
pin 12 (for 120-W-cable-termination)
If the dummy load connector ED7C818-35 Gr.20 is not available, the
installer must manufacture a dummy load connector, consisting of a
15-pin female D-sub connector with a 121-Ohms resistor connected to
pins 12 and 5 (1% or 2%, 0.125 Watt).
Correct position of dummy
load connector
The table below shows the correct position of the dummy load
connector, depending on the number of shelves equipped.
Table 5-14
Procedure
1
Position of dummy load connector
Shelves equipped
Dummy load connector on
connector
Shelves 1, 2, and 3
5
Shelves 1 and 2 only
4
Shelf 1 only
3
............................................................................................................................................................
Depending on the number of shelves equipped, set the dummy load
connector into the right position as shown in the table above.
If the external clock will be routed to a further AnyMedia ® Access
System, then the clock cable connecting to this system will be
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-90
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
attached to the applicable clock connector instead of the dummy load
connector.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Manufacture a clock cable according to the requirements above.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Connect the 15-pin D-sub connector of the manufactured cable to
connector 1 on the FFCU.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
Verify that the internal clock cables are connected correctly according
to the number of shelves equipped.
The internal clock cables are so connected internally that they form a
clock distribution bus. Disconnecting a clock cable will interrupt this
clock bus. Therefore the clock cables must be connected to the
CDP/FFCU one after the other starting with the second connector. An
unused clock connector on the CPP/FFCU between two connected
cables is not allowed.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Route the cable into the left cable duct.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Connect the other end of the cable to the external clock source.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-91
Cabling procedures
Installing
clock cables - J1C301B-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This procedure is applicable only for rack type J1C301B-1 and only if
external clock will be used.
The LAG 1900 Shelves support either simplex station clock or duplex
office clock. Both, balanced input (120 Ω) and unbalanced input
(75 Ω) from the external clock source can be terminated.
The procedure describes
Background information
•
mounting the second PCD if applicable
•
the requirements for manufacturing the 120 Ω clock cable if
required (the 75 Ω cable is commercially available)
•
setting the clock termination module into the correct position
•
the installation of the internal and external clock cable(s)
At delivery one PCD is located in the left part of the RCP. For a
description refer to “Passive Clock Distribution panel (PCD520)”
(4-20).
Note that jumper MP4 on the CIU has to be set according to the
impedance used, and that jumper MP5 is in position ″HI″ as described
in the Commands and Procedures for Narrowband Services,
(363-211-119) for turn-up.
Required kits
Depending on the clock type, use one of the following kits for
internal clock cabling.
Clock type
Kit
Simplex station clock
849015904
Duplex office clock
849015896
1
Notes:
1.
Internal clock cables
Includes also a second PCD.
The following table lists all clock cables that may be required for the
two external clock types. These cables are included in the optionally
orderable kits.
Table 5-15
Destination 1
Destination 2
Equipment code
Connector J109 (station clock)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-92
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
Table 5-15
(continued)
Destination 1
Destination 2
Equipment code
J109, Shelf 3
PCD 1
ED7C874-31 Gr7
1
J109, Shelf 2
ED7C874-31 Gr7A
1
J109, Shelf 1
ED7C874-31 Gr7B
1
Connector J109 (office clock)
J109, Shelf 3
PCD 1
ED7C874-31 Gr6
2
J109, Shelf 2
ED7C874-31 Gr6A
2
J109, Shelf 1
ED7C874-31 Gr6B
2
ED7C874-31 Gr6C
2
J110, Shelf 2
ED7C874-31 Gr6D
2
J110, Shelf 1
ED7C874-31 Gr6E
2
Connector J110 (office clock)
J110, Shelf 3
PCD 2
Notes:
Clock input cable
requirements
1.
Cables are included in the kit for station clock (849015904).
2.
Cables are included in the kit for office clock (849015896).
The clock input cables (external cables) are user supplied. While the
75 Ohms cable is commercially available, the 120 Ω cable must be
manufactured by the customer/installer. The following parts are
required:
Table 5-16
Requirements for clock input cables
Part
S-09YS(St)CY
4×2×0.6 (AWG24)
Description
Quantity
9-pin D-sub, female,
soldering
1
Metallic connector hood
with 90° cable outlet
1
Cable 4×2 shielded, length
according to customer’s
needs twisted pair, shielded,
cable impedance must be
120 Ω
1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-93
Cabling procedures
Pin assignment of the external 120 Ω clock cable
Table 5-17
Clock termination module
Female connector (from male
9-pin connector on PCD)
Clock signal
1
FRMGND
2
Clock input tip
3
not used
4
not used
5
not used
6
Clock input ring
7
not used
8
not used
9
not used
The figure below shows the clock termination module which is
connected to one of the PCD outputs (the correct position is specified
in the table below).
Figure 5-35 Clock termination module
9
4
8
3
7
1
6
2
female
Inductor
1.2 µH
5
Resistor
100
Correct position of clock
termination module
The table below shows the correct position of the clock termination
module, depending on the number of shelves equipped (applies to 120
Ω and 75 Ω).
Table 5-18
Shelves equipped
termination module
Shelves 1, 2, and 3
OUT 4
Shelves 1 and 2 only
OUT 3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-94
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
Table 5-18
(continued)
Shelves equipped
termination module
Shelf 1 only
OUT 2
The figure below shows the position of the connectors on the PCDs.
Figure 5-36 Timing reference distribution to/from the PCDs
to LAG shelf 3
(connector J109)
to LAG shelf 3
(connector J110)
to LAG shelf 2
(connector J109)
to LAG shelf 1
(connector J110)
to LAG shelf 1
(connector J109)
to LAG shelf 2
(connector J110)
from external
clock source 1
Twisted pair
(BAL)
Twisted pair
(BAL)
from external
clock source 2
Coax (UNB)
Coax (UNB)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-95
Cabling procedures
The clock cables must be routed as shown in the figure below.
Figure 5-37 Routing of the clock cables
to external clock source(s)
Internal
clock cables
Procedure
1
............................................................................................................................................................
Depending on the clock type used, obtain the correct kit.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
If duplex station clock will be used, mount the second PCD with two
screws to the right side of the pre-installed PCD.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
According to Table 5-15, “Available clock cables (LAG 1900)” (5-92),
Figure 5-36, “Timing reference distribution to/from the PCDs” (5-95)
and Figure 5-37, “Routing of the clock cables” (5-96) connect the
internal cables to the connectors on the PCD.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
Depending on the number of shelves equipped, set the clock
termination module(s) into the right position as shown in Table 5-18,
“Position of the clock termination module” (5-94).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-96
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
If the clock will be routed to a further AnyMedia ® Access System,
then the clock cable connecting to this system will be attached to the
applicable clock connector instead of the clock termination module.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
IF...
THEN...
the required clock cable is 120
Ω,
make sure that the switch on the
PCD is in position ″BAL″. Do
the same on the second PCD, if
applicable.
the required clock cable is 75 Ω,
set the switch on the PCD to
position ″UNBAL″. Then
connect the coax input cable to
the coax connector on the PCD.
Do the same on the second PCD,
if applicable.
Go to Step 10
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Route the internal cables to the right side of the RCP and then
through the cable duct towards the applicable shelf.
............................................................................................................................................................
7
Feed the cables through the shelf opening and connect them to the
clock connectors J109 (and if applicable to J110).
............................................................................................................................................................
8
Manufacture a clock cable (or two cables, if applicable) according to
the requirements above.
............................................................................................................................................................
9
Connect the 9-pin D-sub connector of the manufactured cable to
connector ″IN″ on the PCD.
............................................................................................................................................................
10
Route the cable(s) into the left cable duct.
............................................................................................................................................................
11
Connect the other end of the cable(s) to the external clock source.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-97
Cabling procedures
Installing
the test application paths for local testing - Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction
The testing of the APs in the shelves can be done either
•
•
Locally, using a TAP-B cable and a TAP10x (TAP10x is a
placeholder for TAP100B and TAP101.)
There are two ways of installing test application paths for local
testing.
–
The TAP-B cables which set up the test application paths
can be routed from the TAP10x to the MDF (see “Installing
TAP-B cabling via the MDF” (5-100)) or
–
They can be connected to the TAP connector on the shelf
directly (see “Installing TAP-B cabling directly to TAP10x”
(5-106)).
Using a remote test head unit (RTU) with a test system controller
(TSC) by an operator in a test center. The procedure for this test
installation is described in “Test installation procedure using the
remote test head (RTU) - Overview” (5-109).
The test application paths have to be set up for each shelf separately.
Assumptions
TAP10x
A TAP10x will be available in the shelf. It can be inserted into any
free AP slot.
The Test Application Pack (TAP10x) is the internal test head
executing the measurements required for the drop.
Each AP can switch any of its subscribers to the General Purpose Bus
(GPB) on the backplane of the shelf. The subscriber can be switched
by the COMDAC either bridged (connection between port and
subscriber line is kept) or split (connection between port and
subscriber line is opened) to the GPB.
The signals of the GPB can be switched by the CIU either to the
CHAN/MONDROP connector on the CIU or to the TAP connector on
the connector field. This TAP connector is connected to the TAP10x
faceplate connector (via the MDF or directly as it is described in this
section. With this cabling the TAP10x can execute the measurements
of a dedicated port (CHAN/MON) of the AP or of the far end
subscriber (DROP). See also Figure 5-38, “Cabling for integrated
testing with TAP10x via the MDF (example )” (5-102).
Cabling
For internal testing using the TAP10x the faceplate connector of the
TAP10x must be connected to the TAP connector on the shelf
connector field. Only four wires are required for this cabling.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-98
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Installing the test application paths for local
testing - Overview
Cabling procedures
There are two ways to establish this cabling:
•
Use the prefabricated 13-wire TAP cable and connect this cable
from the TAP connector on the connector field to the MDF.
Additionally connect the TAP10x faceplate connector to the MDF
using a normal a/b-cable. On the MDF cross-connect the four
wires which are required for the testing. A fifth wire is reserved
for future use (seizing). The other wires support TAP-B features
which are currently not supported by the AnyMedia Access
System.
This cabling is described in “Installing TAP-B cabling via the
MDF” (5-100).
•
Use the prefabricated 4-wire TAP cable and connect this cable
from the TAP connector on the connector field directly to the
TAP10x faceplate connector. This cabling is described in
“Installing TAP-B cabling directly to TAP10x” (5-106).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-99
Cabling procedures
Installing
TAP-B cabling via the MDF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Cabling
This procedure consists of the following subprocedures:
•
Installing the TAP-B cable connection to the MDF
This subprocedure consists of establishing the TAP-B connection
consisting of the external prefabricated TAP-B cable) between the
TAP connector on the connector field of the shelf and the MDF
according to local conditions and requirements of the network
provider.
Not all pins on this 37-pin connector are connected, only 4 wires
of this 13-wire cable are required for integrated drop testing and
monitoring. These 4 wires have to be connected to the 4 wires (Z
port 1 and Z port 2) of the TAP10x cable. The fifth wire is
reserved for future use (seizing).
•
Installing the TAP10x cable connection to the MDF
This subprocedure is used to establish a connection between the
TAP10x pack and the MDF. One of the a/b-cables which have
been installed already is used as TAP10x cable.
•
Interconnecting the test application paths via the MDF.
This subprocedure is used to interconnect on the MDF the TAP-B
cable and the TAP10x cable. The TAP-B cable is a 14-wire cable
of which only 5 wires are used. Four of them are for the circuit
pair and the drop pair. The fifth one is for future use. The
TAP10x cable is a normal 64-wire a/b-cable of which only 4
wires are used (Z port numbers 1 and 2).
The connections which have to be made for the ETSI V5 shelves:
Table 5-19
TAP-B connections for ETSI V5 shelves
Destination 1
Destination 2
Crossconnection
Cable
C1
MDF, feeder
side
Cross-connect
both on MDF
TAP-B cable
ED7C818-36
G1x 1
TAP10x
faceplate
MDF, feeder
side
a/b-cable
ED7C818-30
G1x1
Notes:
1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-100
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
The connections which have to be made for the LAG 1900 Shelves:
Table 5-20
TAP-B connections for LAG 1900 Shelves
Destination 1
Destination 2
Crossconnection
Cable
J103
MDF, feeder
side
Cross-connect
both on MDF
ED7C874-31
G2x 1
TAP10x
faceplate
MDF, feeder
side
a/b-cable
ED7C818-30
G1x1
Notes:
1.
AnyMedia ® Access System installations require a protected wire
system which consists of gastube type arrestors on all outside plant
telecommunications circuits (primary protection). The TAP-B cable
will be connected to a TAP10x cable (a/b cable) which is already
protected on the MDF. Therefore no additional protection is required.
TAP connectors
Table 5-21
Shelf
TAP-B connector
Pinning described
in
ETSI V5 Shelf
C1
“TAP connector
(C1)” (4-41)
LAG 1900 Shelf
J103
“TAP connector
(J103)” (4-62)
All TAP-B cables are routed to the right cable duct.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-101
Cabling procedures
The following figure shows as an example the cabling for integrated
testing with a TAP 10x via the MDF for an ETSI V5 Shelf with the
TAP10x inserted in slot AP13.
Figure 5-38 Cabling for integrated testing with TAP10x via the
MDF (example )
MDF
equipment side
Note: If the MDF is outside of the building
the TAP10x cable and all open wires of the
TAP-B cable should have primary protection
as applicable.
distribution side
TAPB_SEIZE
TAPB_FACR
TAPB_FACT
TAPB_EQR
TAPB_EQT
T1
R1
T2
R2
..
.
a/b cable
TAP-B cable
..
.
T32
R32
Protector block required if a subscriber is connected, but the the
subscriber can´t be operational
as long as the TAP10x is inserted
Open or no subsciber connected
14
C
Shelf Connection Panel
TAP
C1
64
T
1 2
DROP
01 02 03 04
13
GPB
AP or AFM
CHAN/
MON
AP or AFM
TAP100B
AP
AP
AP
AP
COMDAC
CIU
COMDAC
R
15 15
12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-102
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Installing the TAP-B cable
connection to the MDF
1
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
Install TAP-B cable assembly from the top of the rack to the right
cable duct. Pull the cable from the right cable duct to the opening of
the shelf to be wired.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Check the correct labeling on the TAP cable connector and mark if
required. Mark the other cable end in the direction of the MDF with a
corresponding label designation.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Mate the connector of the TAP-B cable with the TAP connector on the
connector field of the shelf (C1 for ETSI V5 Shelves, J103 for LAG
1900 Shelves).
Orient the mating cable connector so that the external TAP-B cable
exits the right cable opening of the shelf directly. Carefully place the
cable in the cable opening so that no cable will be damaged. Add
cable ties as needed.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
Connect the TAP-B cable to the MDF according to local regulations
or according to the instructions given by the network provider.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Terminate the tip/ring pairs at the MDF and check the labeling. Note
the wire color-coding sequence of the factory-prepared cable
assemblies to facilitate the terminations.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Attach the TAP-B cable with a cable tie to the factory installed cables.
E
ND OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-103
Installing the TAP10x cable
connection via the MDF
(option)
1
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
If the slot for the TAP10x plug-in is known, then mark the appropriate
a/b-cable on the MDF.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Locate the 4 wires for Z port numbers 1 and 2 (tip and ring wire of
subscribers 1 and 2) and mark them.
Important! Only these 2 ports are used by the TAP10x for the
test application path B. These 4 terminals have to be connected
to the TAP-B cable, which runs from the TAP connector on the
connector field to the MDF. On the TAP-B cable 5 wires are
used for the test application path B where the fifth wire is
reserved for future use (seizing).
............................................................................................................................................................
3
If the MDF is located outside the building the a/b-cable coming from
the TAP10x should have primary protection. Follow local regulations
or regulations specified by the network provider to install protector
blocks.
The cross-connections which the installer has to make are described
below.
Important! The testing should be done according to local
regulations.
E
ND OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................
Interconnecting the test
application paths via the
MDF
1
............................................................................................................................................................
On the MDF interconnect the test application path as shown in the
tables below. The table shows as an example the connections that
have to be made via the MDF if a TAP10x is used in slot AP13 in an
ETSI V5 Shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-104
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Table 5-22
Cabling procedures
Interconnecting the test application paths via the MDF
Female
AnyMedia signal
conn. C1
for TAP-B
Wire
(from male
MDF, TAP-B
MDF,
Female TAP10x
AnyMedia signal
side
TAP10x
connector (from
for TAP10x
(example)
side
male AP13
(example)
connector)
not used
connected, but
not used
C1 on SCP)
1...12
not used
1
TAPB_SEIZE ( )
13
-
not used
BL-W
531b
O-W
532b
G-W
533b
Wire
not used
(multiple testing)
14
TAPB_EQ_R1
2
TAPB_EQ_R( )
15
385b
BL-W
3 (AP13, port1)
(Ring, b-wire)
TAPB_FAC_R(3)
16
TAP_EQ_R
Equipment,
(b-wire, port1)
BR-W
534b
386b
O-W
5 (AP13, port2)
TAP_FAC_R
Facility, (b-wire,
port2)
connected, but
not used
-
(Ring, b-wire)
17
TAPB_FAC_R1
S-W
535b
18
TAPB_FAC_M
BL-R
536b
19
TAPB_EQ_M
O-R
537b
-
20...30
not used
-
-
-
31
NC
W-BL
531a
-
32
TAPB_EQ_T1
W-O
532a
-
W-G
533a
2
TAPB_EQ_T( )
33
385a
W-BL
2 (AP13, port1)
(Tip, a-wire)
TAPB_FAC_T(3)
34
-
TAP_EQ_T
Equipment,
(a-wire, port1)
W-BR
534a
386a
W-O
4 (AP13, port2)
(Tip, a-wire)
TAP_FAC_T
Facility, (a-wire,
port2)
35
TAPB_FAC_T1
W-S
535a
36
TAPB_FAC_E
R-BL
536a
37
TAPB_EQ_E
R-O
537a
connected, but
not used
-
Notes:
1.
For future use using the TAP10x for multiple NE testing (seizing multi TAP) or for multiple testing with
the remote test unit (via wired OR), currently not used
2.
Used for crossconnecting to the test application path for Equipment (corresponds to R1/T1 of TAP10x (1st
port)).
3.
Used for crossconnecting to the test application path for Facility (corresponds to R2/T2 of TAP10x (2nd
port)).
Important! The testing should be done according to local
regulations.
END OF STEPS
..................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-105
Cabling procedures
Installing
TAP-B cabling directly to TAP10x
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This procedure consists of installing the external prefabricated TAP-B
cable and connecting its 37-pin connector directly to the TAP
connector on the connector field of the shelf. The other end with the
normal 68-pin AP connector must be connected to the faceplate
connector of the TAP10x (TAP10x is a placeholder for TAP100B and
TAP101.)
Not all pins on the 37-pin or 68-pin connectors are connected, only 4
wires are required for integrated drop testing and monitoring. These
four wires connect the Z port 1 and Z port 2 of the TAP10x to the
TAP-B FAC/EQ inputs of the TAP connector; for an example see
Figure 5-39, “Direct cabling for integrated testing with TAP10x
(example)” (5-107).
TAP connectors
Cabling
Table 5-23
Shelf
Tap-B connector
Pinning described
in
ETSI V5 Shelf
C1
“TAP connector
(C1)” (4-41)
LAG 1900 Shelf
J103
“TAP connector
(J103)” (4-62)
The TAP-B cable has to be connected from the TAP connector on the
connection panel to the faceplate connector of the TAP10x located in
the same shelf.
Table 5-24
TAP-B connections (internal test access, direct)
Shelf
Connections
from
Connected to
Cable
ETSI V5 Shelf
C1
TAP10x
facelplate
TAP-B cable
ED7C818-36
G4
LAG 1900
Shelf
J103
TAP10x
facelplate
TAP-B cable
ED7C874-31
G13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-106
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
The figure below shows as an example direct cabling for integrated
testing with a TAP10x inserted in slot AP13 in an ETSI V5 Shelf.
Figure 5-39 Direct cabling for integrated testing with TAP10x
(example)
C
C1
T
AP or AFM
AP or AFM
TAP100B
AP
AP
AP
AP
CIU
COMDAC
COMDAC
R
ED7C818-36 Group 4
TAP
4
CHAN/
MON
1 2
01 02 03 04
13
DROP
GPB
15 15
12
Note: The example shows the wiring of the test access path for aETSI V5 s helf. For a
LAG1900 shelf the wiring is similar, but the TAP-B cable used is ED7C867-31 G36
the upper row and ED7C867-31 G36A for the lower row. The TAP connector is J103.
Recommendation
Installing the TAP-B cable
directly
If the TAP10x is only used temporarily for measurement and
otherwise a normal AP should be used instead, the TAP-B cable
should be installed additionally and the normal a/b-cable should not
be removed.
The cables should be installed in the following order:
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Obtain the TAP- cable and identify the slot position for the TAP10x
as stated in the work order.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Stamp or mark the D-sub connector with the connector designation
(C1 or J106) and mark the 68-pin AP connector with the slot position
where the TAP10x has to be installed. Check the work order for the
correct marking.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
If a normal AP is installed already in the TAP10x slot position and the
a/b cable is connected, disconnect this a/b-cable and place the AP
connector of this AP in the cable trough below the already installed
a/b cabling for later reuse. Remove the AP and place the AP in an
ESD proof package.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-107
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
4
Insert the TAP10x. If the TAP10x is not available install a blank
faceplate.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Connect the D-sub connector of the TAP-B cable to the TAP
connector (C1 or J103) on the connector field of the shelf and secure
the connector housing.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Route the TAP-B cable with the 68-pin AP connector to the right
cable duct and there to the right opening of the same shelf.
............................................................................................................................................................
7
Pull the cable from the right cable duct through the opening and route
the cable to TAP10x position. If the TAP10x is installed already
connect the AP connector to the faceplate connector of the TAP10x. If
the blank faceplate is installed snap in the AP connector.
............................................................................................................................................................
8
Carefully place the cable in the cable trough so that all a/b-cables will
fit in the trough and allow the application packs to be removed.
............................................................................................................................................................
9
Push the cable to the back of the duct, and attach it via cable tie to
the a/b cables.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-108
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
Test installation procedure using the remote test head (RTU) Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Required equipment
This procedure describes the cabling for remote subscriber line testing
via one external test equipment per shelf.
For the cabling of this remote line testing the following components
are required:
•
Remote test head (RTU)
•
Cable for the test path (TAP-B cable from the TAP connector to
the remote test head).
•
Serial cable from the RTU connector for controlling the NB
subsystem via the external test head.
•
Cables for controlling the external test head from the test system
controller (a/b cables towards the MDF, vendor specific cable
between MDF and remote test head).
Important! The NB subsystem can also be controlled via DCN.
For this case the serial connection from the remote test head to
the shelf is not required.
TAP connectors
TAP-B cable
Table 5-25
Shelf
Tap-B connector
Pinning described
in
ETSI V5 Shelf
C1
“TAP connector
(C1)” (4-41)
LAG 1900 Shelf
J103
“TAP connector
(J103)” (4-62)
In all cases the 4-wire metallic test path cabling from the NB
subsystem, the TAP connector to the remote test head must be wired
as shown as an example in Figure 5-40, “Cabling for remote testing
(example for the ETSI V5 Shelf)” (5-112)
Table 5-26
TAP-B connections
Shelf
Destination 1
Destination 2
Cable
ETSI V5 Shelf
C1
Test path on
remote test
head
ED7C818-36,
Group 1x1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-109
Test installation procedure using the remote
test head (RTU) - Overview
Table 5-26
Cabling procedures
TAP-B connections
(continued)
Shelf
Destination 1
Destination 2
Cable
LAG 1900
Shelf
J103
Test path
connector on
remote test
head
ED7C874-31
Group 2
Notes:
1.
system which consists of gastube type arrestors on all outside plant
telecommunications circuits (primary protection). The TAP-B cable
will be connected to a TAP10x cable (a/b cable) which is already
protected on the MDF. Therefore no additional protection is required.
RTU connectors
Controller cable
Table 5-27
Shelf
TAP-B connector
Pinning described
in
ETSI V5 Shelf
H2
“RTU connector
(H2)” (4-45)
LAG 1900 Shelf
J106
“RTU connector
(J106)” (4-68)
If the NB subsystem is controlled directly from the RTU a serial
RS-232C control link between the remote test head and the NB
subsystem must be wired to the RTU connector (J106 for the LAG
1900 Shelf, H2 for the ETSI V5 Shelf).
Table 5-28
Serial RTU cable for remote test access
Shelf
Description
Code
Lenght
ETSI V5 Shelf
Serial RTU
cable
ED7C867–31
G7
8ft ( 2.5 m)
ED7C874–31
G4
8 ft (2.5 m)
LAG 1900
Shelf
Important! Controlling the remote test head can be done via
normal management interface or via dial-up modem connection
alternatively. Normally the dial-up modem connection is used if
the remote test head also controls the NB subsystem.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-110
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
If the control is not performed directly from the remote test head, any
management interface of the system (via DCN) can be used and the
test system controller (TSC) must have two connections to the system
site:
Test system controller
Talk and monitor channel
•
One control for the NB subsystem
•
One control for the remote test head.
The remote test head is connected to the TSC which coordinates and
controls the tests carried out by the test head. The type of this
connection is vendor-specific and depends on the capabilities of the
remote test head and the location of the system. Possible connections
are via a modem dial-up connection, serial link, LAN, and so on.
A talk and monitor channel can be used to talk with or listen to a
subscriber under test. A remote test head which supports a talk and
monitor channel has an additional a/b connection (call back line),
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-111
Cabling procedures
which must be connected to a reserved Z-port via MDF as specified
in the engineering work order.
Figure 5-40 Cabling for remote testing (example for the ETSI V5
Shelf)
4
TAP-B cable
ETSI V5 shelf
C
TAP
C1
RTU
Serial
Internal test link on shelf backplane
MDF
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
Reserved Z ports
COMDAC
CIU
COMDAC
RS-232C link on shelf backplane
CHAN/
MON
1 2
15 16
01 02 03 04
DROP
Internal GPB on shelf backplane
a/b
POTS
a/b
to TSC via DCN
Control*
Talk + Monitor*
Dial-up Modem*
Remote Test Head
Test Access*
Craft Port*
* RTU vendor-specific
Note: The example shows the wiring of the test access path for aETSI V5 shelf . For a LAG1900
shelf the wiring is similar, but the TAP connector is J106.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-112
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
Installing the physical connection between the RTU and the NB
subsystem.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Installing the physical
connection to the RTU
1
The procedure describes the connections of the TAP path to the
external test equipment.
............................................................................................................................................................
Mate the TAP-B connector of the TAP-B cable with the TAP
connector C1 on the connector field of the shelf (C1 for ETSI V5
Shelf, J103 for LAG 1900 Shelf).
Orient the mating cable connector so that the cable exits the right
cable opening of the shelf directly. Carefully place the cable in the
cable opening so that no cable will be damaged. Add cable ties as
needed.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Connect the 4-wire TAP-B cable to the test path connector (TEST
ACCESS) of the remote test head.
Important! AnyMedia specifies Equipment (EQ) as the
subscriber side and Facility (FAC) as the switching side (AP port
side). Remote test heads may declare these terms in reverse as
specified in GR202 and GR303. Therefore the test paths can be
cross-wired.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
If the NB subsystem is controlled directly from the remote test head,
connect the RTU connector (J106 for the LAG 1900 Shelf, H2 for
ETSI V5 Shelf) of the connector field on the shelf via a serial RTU
cable to the serial connector (CONTROL) of the remote test head.
Route the cable to the left cable duct and the upwards to the top of
the rack.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
4. If the remote testing is controlled via a TSC, connect the remote
test head to the TSC via DCN as specified in the engineering work
order.
Important! The connection between AP and MDF is done via an
a/b cable. The connection between MDF and remote test head is
vendor-specific and depends on the capabilities of the remote test
head and the location of the AnyMedia ® Access System. Possible
connections are via a dial-up modem, serial link, LAN, ...
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-113
Installing the physical connection between
the RTU and the NB subsystem.
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
5
If the remote test head is controlled via a dial-up modem connection
then connect the “Modem” channel of the remote test head as a
normal POTS subscriber to a reserved Z port via the MDF as
specified in the engineering work order.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
If the remote test head supports additional talk and monitor capability
then connect the “Talk + Monitor” channel of the remote test head as
a normal POTS subscriber to a reserved Z port via the MDF as
specified in the engineering work order.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-114
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
Connection
of the a/b cables to the MDF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Use this procedure to connect the a/b cables to the MDF and
terminate them.
system which consists of gastube arrestors on all outside plant
telecommunications circuits (primary protection). Local regulations or
regulations specified by the network provider have to be considered
for installing protector blocks. But the installation of protector blocks
is not part of the installation. It is the customer’s responsibility to
provide them.
Follow local regulations or regulations specified by the network
provider to install protector blocks.
Lucent Technologies delivers, for example, standard circuit 4C1E-W
(black) or special circuit 4C3E-W (red) protectors for the Lucent
MDF.
CAUTION
Destruction of components due to installed cables
without protection
All a/b-cables, E1-, E3/DS3, xDSL-cables and the alarming
cabling should not leave the building premises unless connected
to telecommunication devices providing primary protection (for
example protector blocks with gas discharge tubes) as applicable.
Connect to the MDF
1
............................................................................................................................................................
Terminate the a/b pairs at the MDF (preferably blocks of 32 pairs)
and check the labeling of the cables and connectors. Note the wire
color-coding sequence of the factory-prepared cable assemblies.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Test the connections to the MDF. The testing should be done
according to local regulations.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-115
Cabling procedures
Installing
-48 V power feeder cables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This procedure is used to install the cables from the external power
sources to the rack. It consists of preparing the power cables and
connecting them from the connecting terminals -48A and -48B on
both sides of the circuit breaker blocks to the customer’s external
power sources. These cables must be manufactured by the
customer/installer.
The external power voltage has to be connected to the clamp block
terminals on the right and left side of the power circuit breaker
blocks. Connect the external power cables first to the rack and then to
the external power source. The location of the block terminals and the
circuit breakers can be found in “Power cable connections” (4-5) for
the rack type J1C293B-1 and in “Power cable connections” (4-15) for
the rack type J1C301B-1. Do not use the flat pin plugs.
PFU(s)
In LAG 1900 Shelves two PFUs (PFU503) per shelf are mandatory.
For ETSI V5 Shelves one power filter unit (PFU501) is required.
Prerequisite: The PFU(s) have been inserted into the shelf already.
Requirements for external
power cables
Fuses
The two power cables for the DC input of the DC-powered racks
routing from customer’s DC source should be
•
2-wire cables
•
with double insulation
•
recommended wire cross-section of 16 mm2
•
strain relief as per EN60950 as applicable.
Power circuit breakers F1 to F10 are of the single-pole protected type.
Only the terminal for -48 V-potential (-48 V A/-48 V B) is protected,
the other terminal is permanently connected to the -48 V
RTN-potential (-48 V RTNA/-48 V RTNB). The table below shows
the fusing values for all circuit breakers F1 to F10, equipped or not.
Table 5-29
Circuit breaker
Fuse values for
J1C293B-1
Used for
F1
25 A
-48 V A for Shelf 1
F2
25 A
-48 V A for Shelf 2
F3
25 A
-48 V A for Shelf 3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-116
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
Table 5-29
(continued)
Circuit breaker
Fuse values for
J1C293B-1
Used for
F4
2A
-48 V A for fan units 1 to
3
F5
not equipped
for future use
F6
not equipped
for future use
F7
25 A
-48 V B for Shelf 1
F8
25 A
-48 V B for Shelf 2
F9
25 A
-48 V B for Shelf 3
F10
2A
-48 V B fan units 1 to 3
Circuit breaker
Fuse values for
J1C301B-1
Used for
F1
30 A
-48 V A for Shelf 1
F2
30 A
-48 V A for Shelf 2
F3
30 A
-48 V A for Shelf 3
F4
not equipped
F5
not equipped
F6
30 A
-48 V B for Shelf 1
F7
30 A
-48 V B for Shelf 2
F8
30 A
-48 V B for Shelf 3
CAUTION
high
DC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-117
Procedure
1
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
Verify that the customer’s power source delivers the voltage and as
indicated in the engineering work order. If required measure the
voltage on the customer’s power source.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Verify that the customer’s two power sources are switched to “OFF”
and secure the power sources against cutting or connecting in again.
Mark if required. Follow local regulations especially if the power
source is located in CO.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Measure the voltage on the customer’s ringing source and verify that
it is de-energized. Follow local regulations.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
Verify that all power circuit breakers on the RFCP (or on the RCP
respectively) are switched to “OFF”.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Route the two power cables from the customer’s power sources to the
rack. Do not connect.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Install the power cables from the top of the rack and route them to the
upper fixing fingers of the RFCP (or of the RCP respectively).
............................................................................................................................................................
7
Strip the two power cables to a length of 100 mm. Strip each of the
two wires per cable to a length of 8 mm.
............................................................................................................................................................
8
If using cables with flexible or stranded wires then press multicore
cable ends onto each stripped end of the cable wire.
............................................................................................................................................................
9
Mark the polarity on all wires on both sides.
............................................................................................................................................................
10
Attach the cables of the power feeders with cable ties to free fixing
fingers.
............................................................................................................................................................
11
Insert the -48 V return wires of both power feeders into the clamp
terminals ″N+″ of the -48 A-block and screw tight.
............................................................................................................................................................
12
Check that the wires are fixed in the terminal clamps.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-118
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
Important! The two -48 V return wires must be connected to
each other in the customer’s power supply source.
............................................................................................................................................................
13
Check that the 4 screws are tighten.
............................................................................................................................................................
14
If the installation will be finished soon connect the power cables to
the customer’s power supplies. Follow the local regulations. Otherwise
do not connect, and instead insulate the cable and mark for later
installation.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-119
Cabling procedures
Installing
ringing cables - J1C293B-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This procedure is applicable only if the work order specifies that
external ringing voltage will be used. The ETSI V5 Shelves only
support external ringing voltage.
Skip this procedure for J1C293B1 racks which are not intended to be
connected to external ringing sources.
For using external ringing voltage rack type J1C293B-1, L3 is
required, which is equipped with three Ringing Filter Units (RFUs)
and internal ringing cables.
This procedure consists of preparing the external ringing cable and
connecting it from the ringing clamps in the rack to the customer’s
external central ringing source.
The ringing clamps are factory connected to the Ringing Filter Units
which are located in the RFCP.
The external cable must be manufactured by the customer/installer.
Important! Always connect the external ringing cable first to the
AnyMedia ® Access System and then to the office supplies. The
ring return wire must be connected externally to the ″-48 V
Return″ of the customer’s ringing supply.
Ringing cables for
J1C293B-1
The following table lists the internal cables. These cables are included
in the optionally orderable kit.
Table 5-30
ringing cable
Ringing cables
Destination 1
Destination 2
Equipment code
RFU 3
J1, Shelf 3
ED7C818-35, Gr10C
RFU 2
J1, Shelf 2
ED7C818-35, Gr10D
RFU 1
J1, Shelf 1
ED7C818-35, Gr10E
The ringing cable connected to the two ringing clamps should be a
2-wire cable with double insulation, wire cross-section of 1.5 mm2
and strain relief as per EN 60950.
Note: The terminals of two ringing clamps allow wires to be
connected of cross-sections from 0.75 to 4 mm2 for solid wire. The
wires must have reinforced insulation.
Fusing values
The ringing filter units are equipped with front accessible glass-type
fuses (5x20) of a nominal value of 1 A for RFU 501 used for ETSI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-120
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
V5 Shelves. Only the output connector terminal for connecting the
ring potential (RRG) is protected.
WARNING
Dangerous Ringing Voltage.
The AnyMedia Access System is fed by ringing voltages of 57 V
DC maximum superimposed by 105 V AC maximum. Touching live
ringing cables will shock or cause serious injury or death. Take
care when servicing in this area. Follow all safety warnings and
local regulation practices.
Before you begin
Verify that the customer’s ringing source delivers the voltage and the
ringing frequency as indicated in the engineering work order. If
required measure the voltage on the customer’s ringing source.
Verify that the customer’s ringing source is de-energized. If required
short the deactivated mains to earth. Follow local regulations.
Installing the ringing
cables
The external ringing voltage has to be connected to the two ringing
clamps only as shown in the figures because the other terminals are
factory cross-wired to metalwork (FRMGND) of the RFUs and to the
line side of the ringing filter units, connector J11, see the following
figure.
Figure 5-41 Ringing cables for J1C293B-1 L3
Grounding wires
Fuse T1A
J11
Input
RFU1
J21
Output
Fuse T1A
J11
Input
RFU2
J21
Output
Fuse T1A
J11
Input
RFU3
J21
Output
RNG
Connected to
V5 Shelf 1, J1
Connected to
V5 Shelf 2, J1
Connected to
V5 Shelf 3, J1
ringing voltage
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-121
Procedure
1
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
Verify that all ringer output connectors J21 on the RFUs are
disconnected. If not already done disconnect the three connectors J21.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Route the ringing cable from the customer’s ringing source to the
rack. Do not connect.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Mark the polarity (TRG,RRG) on all wires on both cable sides.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
Install the ringing cable from the top of the rack and route it to the
upper fixing fingers of the RFCP directly.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Attach the cable with cable ties to the cable holder to a free fixing
finger near the ringing clamps. If the cable is of shielded-type remove
the insulation partly so that the screen makes metallic contact with the
grounding finger.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Strip the ringing cable to a length of 30 mm. Strip each of the two
wires to a length of 8 mm.
............................................................................................................................................................
7
If using a cable with flexible or stranded wire then press multicore
............................................................................................................................................................
8
Insert a solid screwdriver (flat, about 2.5 mm type) in the lower
opening of the right ringing clamp (⊥ marked), see figure above.
............................................................................................................................................................
9
Press down the inner clamp and insert the TRG wire of the ringing
cable from the front in the lower terminal.
............................................................................................................................................................
10
Remove the screwdriver and check that the TRG wire is firmly fixed
in the clamp.
............................................................................................................................................................
11
Insert a solid screwdriver (flat, about 2.5 mm type) in the lower
opening of the left ringing clamp (RRG marked), see figure above.
............................................................................................................................................................
12
Press down the inner clamp and insert the RRG wire of the ringing
cable from the front in the lower terminal.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-122
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
13
Remove the screwdriver and check that the RRG wire is firmly fixed
in the clamp.
Note: The ring return wire must be connected to the ″−48 V Return″
of the customer’s ringing supply.
............................................................................................................................................................
14
Reconnect the connectors J21 which have been disconnected
temporarily.
............................................................................................................................................................
15
If the installation will be finished soon connect the ringing cable to
the customer’s ringing supply. Follow local regulations. Otherwise do
not connect, and instead insulate the cable and mark for later
installation.
Figure 5-42 Ringing connectors on the RFU
Front view looking onto the RFU,
connectors J11 for ringing input
and
connectors J21 for ringing output
f
1
RNG_RTN for J11 and J21
2
RNG_IN for J11
RNG_OUT for J21
J11 or J21
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-123
Cabling procedures
Installing
ringing cables - J1C301B-1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This procedure is applicable for shelf type J1C301B-1 and only if the
work order specifies that external ringing voltage will be used. The
LAG 1900 Shelf supports external (centralized) or local ringing
voltage.
For local ringing supply two ringing generator units (RGUs) of the
same type have to be equipped in the upper row of the LAG 1900
Shelf. The RGUs may be battery-backed (RGU500) or earth-backed
(RGU510).
For using external ringing voltage the optional kit for external ringing
(849015888) is required, containing three ringing termination blocks,
jumpers and internal ringing cables.
Skip this procedure for LAG 1900 Shelves that have an RGU installed
and therefore do not use external ringing voltage.
This procedure consists of
•
mounting the ringing termination blocks
•
installing the jumpers between the ringing termination blocks
•
installing internal ringing cables
•
installing external cable.
The external cable must be manufactured by the customer/installer.
Important! Always connect the ringing cable first to the
AnyMedia ® Access System and then to the office supplies. The
ring return wire must be connected externally to the ″-48 V
Return″ of the customer’s ringing supply.
Ringing cables for
J1C301B-1
The following table lists the internal cables. These cables are included
in the optionally orderable kit.
Table 5-31
Ringing cables (LAG 1900)
Destination 1
Destination 2
Equipment code
right ringing
termination block
P113, Shelf 3
ED7C874-31, Gr9
middle ringing
termination block
P113, Shelf 2
ED7C874-31, Gr9A
1
left ringing
termination block
P113, Shelf 1
ED7C874-31, Gr9B
1
1
Notes:
1.
Cables are included in the kit for external ringing (849015888).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-124
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
ringing cable
Cabling procedures
The ringing cable connected to the two ringing clamps should be a
2-wire cable with double insulation, wire cross-section of 1.5 mm2
and strain relief as per EN 60950.
Note: The terminals of two ringing clamps allow wires to be
connected of cross-sections from 0.75 to 4 mm2 for solid wire. The
wires must have reinforced insulation.
If the length of the external unshielded ringing cable exceeds three
meters (shielded 10 m) a ringing filter unit (RFU503) has to be
installed in the LAG 1900 Shelf.
Fusing values
The ringing filter units are equipped with front accessible glass-type
fuses (5x20) of a nominal value of 2 A for RFU503 used within LAG
1900 Shelves. Only the output connector terminal for connecting the
ring potential (RRG) is protected.
WARNING
The AnyMedia ® Access System is fed by ringing voltages of 57 V
Before you begin
Verify that the customer’s ringing source delivers the voltage and the
ringing frequency as indicated in the engineering work order. If
required measure the voltage on the customer’s ringing source.
Verify that the ringing source is de-energized. If required short the
deactivated mains to earth. Follow local regulations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-125
Cabling procedures
The figure below shows the position of the ringing termination blocks
and all necessary cables for ringing. At delivery the three ringing
termination blocks are not equipped.
Figure 5-43 Ringing cables for J1C301B-1
(left)
(middle) (right)
to/from external
ringing source
jumpers
Ring
jumpers
Tip
to LAG shelf 1
connector P113
to LAG shelf 3
connector P113
to LAG shelf 2
connector P113
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-126
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
The ringing cables must be routed as shown in the figure below.
Figure 5-44 Routing of the ringing cables
to/from external ringing source
Mounting ringing
termination blocks
The following step has to be carried out for each of the three
ringing termination blocks.
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Insert the ringing termination block in horizontal position as shown in
Figure 5-43, “Ringing cables for J1C301B-1” (5-126) and tighten it
with the screw.
E
ND OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-127
Installing jumpers
Cabling procedures
Two jumper pairs have to be installed as shown in Figure 5-43,
“Ringing cables for J1C301B-1” (5-126) to interconnect the
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Important! Do not mix the polarity of the jumpers.
Lift the clamp of the ringing termination block and insert one end of
the jumper. Press down the clamp.
Check that the jumper is firmly fixed in the clamp.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Lift the clamp of the next ringing termination block and insert the
other end of the jumper. Press down the clamp.
Check that the jumper is firmly fixed in the clamp.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Proceed as described above for the other jumpers to interconnect the
E
ND OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................
Installing the external
cables
1
............................................................................................................................................................
Route the external ringing cable from the customer’s ringing source to
the rack. Do not connect.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Mark the polarity (TRG,RRG) on all wires on both cable sides.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Install the ringing cable from the top of the rack and route it to the
left ringing termination block as shown in Figure 5-44, “Routing of
the ringing cables” (5-127).
............................................................................................................................................................
4
Attach the cable with cable ties near the ringing termination block. If
the cable is of shielded-type remove the insulation partly so that the
screen makes metallic contact with the grounding finger.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Strip the ringing cable to a length of 30 mm. Strip each of the two
wires to a length of 8 mm.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-128
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
6
If using a cable with flexible or stranded wire then press multicore
............................................................................................................................................................
7
Lift the upper clamp and insert the TRG wire of the ringing cable.
Press down the upper clamp.
Check that the TRG wire is firmly fixed in the clamp.
............................................................................................................................................................
8
Lift the lower clamp and insert the RRG wire of the ringing cable.
Press down the lower clamp.
Check that the RRG wire is firmly fixed.
E
ND OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................
Installing the internal
cables
Install the internal ringing cables according to Table 5-31,
“Ringing cables (LAG 1900)” (5-124).
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Lift the clamps of the ringing termination block and insert the
appropriate ringing cable. Press down the clamps.
Check that the ringing cable is firmly fixed in the clamps.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Route the internal ringing cables according to the table below to the
right side of the RCP as shown in Figure 5-44, “Routing of the
ringing cables” (5-127) and then through the cable duct towards the
applicable shelf.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Feed the cables through the shelf opening and connect them to the
ringing connectors P113.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-129
Cabling procedures
Testing
the power and ringing feeding
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This procedure is used to verify the installed connections to the
customer’s power plant and ringing supply and the proper working of
the fan units in the rack..
For testing follow the local regulations or the regulations specified by
the network provider.
Power and ringing
connections
Figure 5-45 Power connection points on RFCP (rack type
J1C293B-1)
from central office
(feeder A)
from central office
(feeder B)
Pre-installed
internal cables
to V5 Shelf 1
(connector A1)
to V5 Shelf 1
(connector B1)
to V5 Shelf 2
(connector A1)
to V5 Shelf 3
(connector A1)
to V5 Shelf 2
(connector B1)
to V5 Shelf 3
(connector B1)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-130
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
Figure 5-46 Ringing connection points on RFCP (rack type
J1C293B-1 L3)
Grounding wires
Fuse T1A
J11
Input
RFU1
J21
Output
Fuse T1A
J11
Input
RFU2
J21
Output
Fuse T1A
J11
Input
RFU3
J21
Output
RNG
Connected to
V5 Shelf 1, J1
Connected to
V5 Shelf 2, J1
Connected to
V5 Shelf 3, J1
ringing voltage
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-131
Cabling procedures
Figure 5-47 Power connection points on RCP (rack type
J1C301B-1)
from central office
(feeder B)
from central office
(feeder A)
+
Pre-installed
internal
cables
+
to LAG shelf 1
(connector J111)
to LAG shelf 2
(connector J111)
to LAG shelf 3
(connector J111)
to LAG shelf 3
(connector J112)
to LAG shelf 2
(connector J112)
to LAG shelf 1
(connector J112)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-132
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
Figure 5-48 Ringing connection points on RCP (rack type
J1C301B-1)
(left)
(middle) (right)
to/from external
ringing source
jumpers
Ring
jumpers
Tip
to LAG shelf 1
connector P113
to LAG shelf 3
connector P113
to LAG shelf 2
connector P113
Status LEDs on the fan
units
Table 5-32
Status LEDs on fan units
For Shelf Type
LED on Fan Unit
ETSI V5 Shelf
Active (green)
LAG 1900 Shelf
Fault (red)
Active/Fault (green or red)
WARNING
The AnyMedia Access System is fed by ringing voltages of 57 V
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-133
Cabling procedures
CAUTION
high
DC.
Procedure
1
............................................................................................................................................................
Verify continuity of all installed connections to the customer’s power
plant and ringing supply.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Verify absence of any shorts between the RTN terminals and the -48V
or ringing terminals of the power feeders.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Verify that all circuit breakers (F1 to F10 on the RFCP, or F1 to F8
on the RFP) are switched to ″OFF″..
............................................................................................................................................................
4
If external ringing voltage is used, temporarily disconnected the
internal ringing distribution (disconnect J21 on the RFUs on the RFCP
or disconnect the internal ringing connections to the LAG Shelves as
shown in Figure 4-4, “Ringing distribution” (4-7).
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Turn on customer’s power and ringing source.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Measure the -48V and the ringing voltage and check for correct
polarity at first at the customers source and then on the line side of
the two block terminals for the -48 V and on the ringing clamps for
the ringing voltage.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-134
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cabling procedures
............................................................................................................................................................
7
Turn on circuit breakers (F1 to F10 on the RFCP, or F1 to F8 on the
RFP). and reconnect the three ringer output connectors ( J21 on the
RFUs on the RFCP or the internal ringing connections to the LAG
Shelves) and power up the associate ringing supplies of the customer
temporarily.
............................................................................................................................................................
8
Verify the presence of -48 V DC at the shelves.
Requirement: -40.5 ... -57 V DC
............................................................................................................................................................
9
Check the status indication on the faceplate of the fan units.
Result: The Active LED should be green. The Fault LED (which is
the same LED as the Active LED on the fan units in the LAG 1900
Shelves) should not be red.
............................................................................................................................................................
10
If applicable, verify the presence of ringing voltage at the shelves.
Requirement: 75 V... 105 V AC.
............................................................................................................................................................
11
Turn off the circuit breakers and disconnect the customer’s ringing
and power supply sources.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
5-135
Cabling procedures
Final
installation activities
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This procedure is used to finalize the installation that means to mount
components that have been removed during installation.
Procedure
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Mount the cover plates that have been removed temporarily on front
of the connector fields of the LAG 1900 Shelves and fasten them with
the two screws..
............................................................................................................................................................
2
If applicable, attach the side panels to the rack.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Hang in the front doors and close them.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-136
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
6
Maintenance
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
After the installation of the DC-powered rack has been completed, no
actions are required for maintenance purposes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
6-1
Appendix A: Supplemental
Information
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This section describes the technical support available for
•
AnyMedia ® Access System applications
•
AnyMedia Element Manager (Navis AnyMedia Element
Manager).
AnyMedia service is complemented by a full range of services
available to support planning, maintaining and operating your system.
Applications testing, network integration, and upgrade conversion
support is available.
Technical support groups
Lucent Technologies service personnel will troubleshoot field
problems 24 h a day over the phone and on site (if necessary) based
on Lucent Technologies service contracts by
•
Local/Regional Customer Support (LCS/RCS)
•
Remote Technical Support (RTS)
•
For Europe call the International Customer Management Center
(ICMC): +353 1692 4579 or call the toll free number: 00 800 00
58 2368
•
For Asia Pacific, Caribbean and Latin America Region, Saudi
Arabia, Middle East and Africa call the local Lucent
Technologies Customer Technical Support Team.
Contents
A-3
A-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
A-1
Overview
Connector types
A-9
A-13
Cross-connection between AP connector - EC
connectors
A-15
A-16
Installation sequence module container with 32-pair
cable
A-17
A-22
A-25
A-28
Converting a subscriber loop from NB only to ADSL+
NB
A-33
OAM&P connections
A-34
A-36
A-37
A-40
A-41
Using the BB ATM Operations Channel to transport
narrowband OAM&P information
A-43
A-46
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-2
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Color-Coding
for cables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Color coding abbreviations
This section explains the abbreviations used for the color coding of
cables in several tables within this document. Moreover, standard wire
color coding for the factory assembled a/b cables is shown. Use of the
color coding will facilitate both terminating operations at the
customer’s cross-connecting points and troubleshooting routines.
The following color-coding abbreviations are used for identification
on the cables.
Table A-1
Color-coding abbreviations
Abbreviation
Identification Colors
BK
black
BR
brown
BL
blue
Clear
colorless
LTG
light green
G
green
DKG
dark green
O
orange
R
red
S
slate
V
violet/purple
W
white
Y
yellow
Note: The indication of two colors separated by a hyphen per wire
means that the wire has a basic color marked with an additional
second color, e.g. white-blue means a white wire marked with blue
rings. The indication of two colors separated by a slash means (two)
twisted wires, e.g. white/blue-blue/white are twisted wires where the
first wire is white with blue rings and the second wire is blue with
white rings.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
A-3
Color coding for a/b cables
The table below shows the color-coding for the 1×32-pair a/b cables
and the two tables after that show it for the 2×32-pair a/b cables.
Table A-2
Conductor Connector Binder Identification
pair no. terminals color colors (Tip/Ring)
Color coding
1
12, 13
blue
white-blue/bluewhite
W-BL/BL-W
2
14, 15
blue
white-orange/
orange-white
W-O/O-W
3
16, 17
blue
white-green/greenwhite
W-G/G-W
4
18, 19
blue
white-brown/brownwhite
W-BR/BR-W
5
20, 21
blue
white-slate/slatewhite
W-S/S-W
6
22, 23
blue
red-blue/blue-red
R-BL/BL-R
7
24, 25
blue
red-orange/orangered
R-O/O-R
8
26, 27
blue
red-green/green-red
R-G/G-R
9
28, 29
blue
red-brown/brownred
R-BR/BR-R
10
30, 31
blue
red-slate/slate-red
R-S/S-R
11
32, 33
blue
black-blue/blueblack
BK-BL/
BL-BK
12
34, 35
blue
black-orange/
orange-black
BK-O/O-BK
13
36, 37
blue
black-green/greenblack
BK-G/G-BK
14
38, 39
blue
black-brown/brownblack
BK-BR/
BR-BK
15
40, 41
blue
black-slate/slateblack
BK-S/S-BK
16
42, 43
blue
yellow-blue/blueyellow
Y-BL/BL-Y
17
44, 45
orange
white-blue/bluewhite
W-BL/BL-W
18
46, 47
orange
white-orange/
orange-white
W-O/O-W
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-4
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Table A-2
(continued)
Conductor Connector Binder Identification
pair no. terminals color colors (Tip/Ring)
Color coding
19
48, 49
orange
white-green/greenwhite
W-G/G-W
20
50, 51
orange
white-brown/brownwhite
W-BR/BR-W
21
52, 53
orange
white-slate/slatewhite
W-S/S-W
22
54, 55
orange
red-blue/blue-red
R-BL/BL-R
23
56, 57
orange
red-orange/orangered
R-O/O-R
24
58, 59
orange
red-green/green-red
R-G/G-R
25
60, 61
orange
red-brown/brownred
R-BR/BR-R
26
62, 63
orange
red-slate/slate-red
R-S/S-R
27
64, 65
orange
black-blue/blueblack
BK-BL/
BL-BK
28
66, 67
orange
black-orange/
orange-black
BK-O/O-BK
29
68, 69
orange
black-green/greenblack
BK-G/G-BK
30
70, 71
orange
black-brown/brownblack
BK-BR/
BR-BK
31
72, 73
orange
black-slate/slateblack
BK-S/S-BK
32
74, 75
orange
yellow-blue/blueyellow
Y-BL/BL-Y
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
A-5
Figure A-1 2×32 pairs a/b cable
P1
P2
Table A-3
Color coding for the P1 connector 2×32 pair a/b
cable Tip/Ring 1-32
Connector
terminals
on P1
Binder
color
Color coding
Tip/Ring
33, 1
blue
W-BL/BL-W
Tip1/Ring1
34, 2
blue
W-O/O-W
Tip2/Ring2
35, 3
blue
W-G/G-W
Tip3/Ring3
36, 4
blue
W-BR/BR-W
Tip4/Ring4
37, 5
blue
W-S/S-W
Tip5/Ring5
38, 6
blue
R-BL/BL-R
Tip6/Ring6
39, 7
blue
R-O/O-R
Tip7/Ring7
40, 8
blue
R-G/G-R
Tip8/Ring8
41, 9
blue
R-BR/BR-R
Tip9/Ring9
42, 10
blue
R-S/S-R
Tip10/Ring10
43, 11
blue
BK-BL/BL-BK
Tip11/Ring11
44, 12
blue
BK-O/O-BK
Tip12/Ring12
45, 13
blue
BK-G/G-BK
Tip13/Ring13
46, 14
blue
BK-BR/BR-BK
Tip14/Ring14
47, 15
blue
BK-S/S-BK
Tip15/Ring15
48, 16
blue
Y-BL/BL-Y
Tip16/Ring16
49, 17
orange
W-BL/BL-W
Tip17/Ring17
50, 18
orange
W-O/O-W
Tip18/Ring18
51, 19
orange
W-G/G-W
Tip19/Ring19
52, 20
orange
W-BR/BR-W
Tip20/Ring20
53, 21
orange
W-S/S-W
Tip21/Ring21
54, 22
orange
R-BL/BL-R
Tip22/Ring22
55, 23
orange
R-O/O-R
Tip23/Ring23
56, 24
orange
R-G/G-R
Tip24/Ring24
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-6
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Table A-3
cable Tip/Ring 1-32 (continued)
Connector
terminals
on P1
Binder
color
Color coding
Tip/Ring
57, 25
orange
R-BR/BR-R
Tip25/Ring25
58, 26
orange
R-S/S-R
Tip26/Ring26
59, 27
orange
BK-BL/BL-BK
Tip27/Ring27
60, 28
orange
R-O/O-R
Tip28/Ring28
61, 29
orange
BK-G/G-BK
Tip29/Ring29
62, 30
orange
BK-BR/BR-BK
Tip30/Ring30
63, 31
orange
BK-S/S-BK
Tip31/Ring31
64, 32
orange
Y-BL/BL-Y
Tip32/Ring32
Table A-4
cable Tip/Ring 33-64
Connector
terminals
on P2
Binder
color
Color coding
Tip/Ring
33, 1
green
W-BL/BL-W
Tip33/Ring33
34, 2
green
W-O/O-W
Tip34/Ring34
35, 3
green
W-G/G-W
Tip35/Ring35
36, 4
green
W-BR/BR-W
Tip36/Ring36
37, 5
green
W-S/S-W
Tip37/Ring37
38, 6
green
R-BL/BL-R
Tip38/Ring38
39, 7
green
R-O/O-R
Tip39/Ring39
40, 8
green
R-G/G-R
Tip40/Ring40
41, 9
green
R-BR/BR-R
Tip41/Ring41
42, 10
green
R-S/S-R
Tip42/Ring42
43, 11
green
BK-BL/BL-BK
Tip43/Ring43
44, 12
green
BK-O/O-BK
Tip44/Ring44
45, 13
green
BK-G/G-BK
Tip45/Ring45
46, 14
green
BK-BR/BR-BK
Tip46/Ring46
47, 15
green
BK-S/S-BK
Tip47/Ring47
48, 16
green
Y-BL/BL-Y
Tip48/Ring48
49, 17
brown
W-BL/BL-W
Tip49/Ring49
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
A-7
Table A-4
cable Tip/Ring 33-64 (continued)
Connector
terminals
on P2
Binder
color
Color coding
Tip/Ring
50, 18
brown
W-O/O-W
Tip50/Ring50
51, 19
brown
W-G/G-W
Tip51/Ring51
52, 20
brown
W-BR/BR-W
Tip52/Ring52
53, 21
brown
W-S/S-W
Tip53/Ring53
54, 22
brown
R-BL/BL-R
Tip54/Ring54
55, 23
brown
R-O/O-R
Tip55/Ring55
56, 24
brown
R-G/G-R
Tip56/Ring56
57, 25
brown
R-BR/BR-R
Tip57/Ring57
58, 26
brown
R-S/S-R
Tip58/Ring58
59, 27
brown
BK-BL/BL-BK
Tip59/Ring59
60, 28
brown
R-O/O-R
Tip60/Ring60
61, 29
brown
BK-G/G-BK
Tip61/Ring61
62, 30
brown
BK-BR/BR-BK
Tip62/Ring62
63, 31
brown
BK-S/S-BK
Tip63/Ring63
64, 32
brown
Y-BL/BL-Y
Tip64/Ring64
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-8
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Connector
types
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Application pack
connectors
The connector types employed in the system are the following:
•
Application pack 68-pin connectors with ejector, used for
POTS/ADSL/ISDN interface connections
•
Application pack 2 x 32 pin connectors with ejector, used for
POTS interface connections
•
Application pack connectors with screws (for VoIP APs)
•
AMP 8-position power linking terminals used for DC power
connectors and ringing
•
Molex connectors with 2-pin and 4-pin and 6-pin arrangement
used for connecting the the external ringing voltage to the
•
Molex connectors with 4-pin arrangement used for connecting the
external -48 V power to the PFUs
•
AMP connectors with 6-pin arrangement for the internal power
connection to the PFUs
•
AMP Faston connectors used to connect the -48 V to the
AnyMedia Shelves (AMP and Faston are registered trademarks of
AMP, Inc.).
•
D-subminiature DB pin arrangements used to connect the -48 V
to the Shelves
•
D-subminiature DB9, DB15, DB25, DB37 pin arrangements used
for digital signal transmission (E1), clock and alarming
•
BNC and mini coaxial connectors for E3/DS3
•
RJ45 connectors for LAN
•
SC-type connectors for fibers from/to the optical packs
Application pack connectors as furnished on factory equipment
(shelves and intershelf cable assemblies) are of the insulation
displacement (ID) type.
Note: If the connectors furnished for use by installers are also of the
ID type then the use of special tools for wire insertion or replacement
is required.
Each plug/jack connector combination has an associated covering
(hood) which must be installed over the connector to complete the
assembly.
Each plug and jack connector has terminal numbers embossed on the
pin and wiring sides of the assembly, but these numbers are only
visible if the hood is removed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
A-9
Connector types
The figure below shows how to insert or to remove an application
pack connector with ejector.
Figure A-2 Insertion and removal of an application pack
connector with ejector
1
1
2
2
Connector insertion
Connector removal
1. Lift ejector
1. Push down on ejector
2. Insert connector
2. Remove connector
The pinning of the application pack connectors for the different
application packs can be found in “Circuit pack and application pack
connectors” (4-79).
Note: Four pins on this 68-pin connector are shorted so that the
AnyMedia ® Access System can verify whether an application pack
cable is connected or not.
D-Type connectors
D-type connectors are provided in the system with DB9, DB15, DB25
and DB37 pin arrangements. While all D-type connectors on the LAG
Shelf are female, most of the D-type connectors on the ETSI V5 Shelf
are male (exceptions are J2 for LAN interface, H2 for RTU link and
F2 for miscellaneous alarm inputs).
Each D-type plug/jack connector combination has an associated
covering (hood) which must be installed over the connector to
complete the assembly. The figure below depicts the D-type
connectors and the hood/hardware assemblies for mating the
connectors together.
Terminal numbers are embossed on the pin side of the assembly.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-10
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Connector types
Note: The connector’s locking screws must have a thread of UNC
4-40.
Figure A-3 D-Type connectors
Locking screw UNC 4-40
Molex and AMP connectors
Molex connectors are provided in various housings with pins for
crimping requiring only standard crimping tools. Each Molex
connector is keyed to fit with its mating connector
Figure A-4 Molex Connectors
1
1 Press to unlock
2 Push/Pull to engage/remove
2
1
2
2
3
Front view of contacts
SC type fiber connectors,
attenuators and
cross-couple connectors
For the fiber cabling of the GbE uplinks on the IPFM and to the
optical AFM (AFMO) SC-type connectors are used.
On the AFMO two optical ports with one Receive fiber (RX) and one
Transmit fiber (TX) per port are supported for daisy-chaining (see the
following figure).
Each optical port of the AFMO supports two single SC-type
connectors or one duplex SC-type connector. If optical attenuation is
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
A-11
Connector types
required and the Lucent lightguide buildouts are used two single
SC-type connectors must be used.
TX-1
10BASE
Figure A-5 Optical ports of the AFMO
From the optical STM-1/OC-3c
ATM feeder interface
or from previous shelf
in the optical daisy-chain
TX-2
RX-1
Port 1
RX-2
Port 2
Towards the next shelf
in the daisy-chain
For calculation of fiber attenuation required and the selection of the
correct attenuators, refer to the Applications and Planning Guide
(363–211–585).
For the duplex operation of two AFMOs a small connector is required
which connects the two female cross couple ports on the faceplate of
both AFMOs. The cross couple 995A is installed together with the
AFMOs. The cross couple connector 995A (Comcode 108765587) is a
small device with two male keyed 40-pin connectors, see the figure
below.
Figure A-6 995A cross-couple connector
995A
TOP
LUCENT
BNC connectors on the
AFME3/AFMDS3 packs
The AFME3/DS3 contains 4 BNC connectors on the faceplate for
connecting the E3/DS3-cables. Connectors TX1, RX1 are used for
upstream, connecting via coaxial cables to/from the ATM backbone.
Connectors TX2, RX2 are used for downstream, connecting via
coaxial cables to/from the next daisy-chained shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-12
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
The new installation concept (NIC) makes use of small module
containers (see next Figure) which are mounted on the MDF instead
of disconnect terminal blocks. The height of a module corresponds to
that of conventional disconnect terminal blocks.
Module container
The module containers are equipped with compact application-specific
modules. Four of them are connected via a 32-pair a/b cable to one
AP in the AnyMedia ® Access System. Depending on the service
either connect-through modules or highly advanced splitter modules
can be used without changing the system cabling. Therefore there is
no need to install external splitter shelves in case of BB service. One
module container can be equipped with up to 4 modules and can
support 32 subscribers. The modules are designed to support 8
subscribers each. Each module is connected on the rear side with
eight pairs of the application pack cable of the AnyMedia ® Access
System. The NB service is fed to the left side on the front of each
module. The combined ADSL signal of these eight subscribers is
available on the right side on the front of each module.
Connect-through modules directly connect the system cabling to the
subscriber lines while splitter modules combine ADSL and NB
services on the subscriber line. For NB services, only connect-through
modules are used.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
A-13
Overview
Important! The NIC using connect-through modules may be
replaced by common disconnect terminal blocks. In this case the
flexibility of the new cabling concept is lost.
Figure A-7 Small module containers
Contents
Cross-connection between AP connector - EC
connectors
A-15
A-16
Installation sequence module container with 32-pair
cable
A-17
A-22
A-25
A-28
Converting a subscriber loop from NB only to ADSL+
NB
A-33
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-14
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Cross-connection
between AP connector - EC connectors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Pin assignment of EC
connectors
The following table shows the connector assignment of the EC
connectors (1 - 4) on the rear side of the module container to a
32-pair AP cable. The AP cable is available in different lengths (see
the Ordering Guide (363-211-144)).
Figure A-8 Pin assignment of EC connectors (32-pair) rear side
EC connector
Binder
color
EC Pin
no.
orange
S
AP connector
Port
no.
Color a
AP Pin
no.
68
8b
AP Pin
no.
Shortcut
Colorcoding
b
Ring
33
BL-Y
66
a
Tip
32
Y-BL
7b
S-BK
65
b
Ring
31
S-BK
BK-S
64
a
Tip
30
BK-S
63
b
Ring
29
BR-BK
62
a
Tip
28
BK-BR
Port 31
BR-BK
Port 30 BK-BR
5b
G-BK
61
b
Ring
27
G-BK
5a
Port 29 BK-G
60
a
Tip
26
BK-G
4b
O-BK
59
b
Ring
25
O-BK
4a
Port 28 BK-O
58
a
Tip
24
BK-O
BL-BK
57
b
Ring
23
BL-BK
BK-BL
56
a
Tip
22
BK-BL
2b
S-R
55
b
Ring
21
S-R
2a
Port 26 R-S
54
a
Tip
20
R-S
3b
3a
Port 27
1b
BR-R
53
b
Ring
19
BR-R
1a
Port 25 R-BR
52
a
Tip
18
R-BR
S
51
b
Ring
17
G-R
8a
Port 24 R-G
50
a
Tip
16
R-G
7b
O-R
49
b
Ring
15
O-R
R-O
48
a
Tip
14
R-O
6b
BL-R
47
b
Ring
13
BL-R
6a
Port 22 R-BL
46
a
Tip
12
R-BL
S-W
45
b
Ring
11
S-W
W-S
44
a
Tip
10
W-S
BR-W
43
b
Ring
9
BR-W
W-BR
42
a
Tip
8
W-BR
G-W
41
b
Ring
7
G-W
W-G
40
a
Tip
6
W-G
2b
O-W
39
b
Ring
5
O-W
2a
Port 18 W-O
38
a
Tip
4
W-O
BL-W
37
b
Ring
3
BL-W
W-BL
36
a
Tip
2
W-BL
35
Shortcut
Port 23
5b
5a
Port 21
4b
4a
Port 20
3b
3a
Port 19
1b
1a
Port 17
8a
7b
Port 15
7a
6b
Port 14
6a
5b
Port 13
5a
4b
Port 12
4a
3b
Port 11
3a
2b
Port 10
2a
1b
Port 9
1a
S
G-R
blue
8b
Port 16
Shielding
8b
7a
Binder
color
orange
S
67
6a
EC Pin
no.
34
BL-Y
Port 32 Y-BL
6b
Port
no.
Shielding
8a
7a
orange
EC connector
blue
8b
Port 8
8a
7b
Port 7
7a
6b
Port 6
6a
5b
Port 5
5a
4b
Port 4
4a
3b
Port 3
3a
2b
Port 2
2a
1b
Port 1
1a
1
a) For color-coding abbreviations, see Table A-1, “Color-coding
abbreviations” (A-3).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
A-15
Installation
and wiring of the module container
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
For installation and wiring the following procedures have to be
applied:
•
“Installation sequence module container with 32-pair cable”
(A-17).
•
“Replacement of the modules” (A-22).
•
“Replacement of the module container” (A-25).
•
“a/b Wiring for module container on subscriber side” (A-28).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-16
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Installation
sequence module container with 32-pair cable
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This procedure is used to install module container with 32-pair cables.
Procedure
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Determine the length of the system cable, cut the cable to the needed
length, strip the insulation (minimum 500 mm), and group the tip/ring
pairs according to the cable coding, see Figure A-8, “Pin assignment
of EC connectors (32-pair) rear side” (A-15).
Figure A-9 Insulation of system cable
ca. 500 mm
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Swing out the rear side of the module container vertical to the front
and position and fasten the stripped cable with cable ties to the
module container.
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Position each single wire in the contact guide slot of the upper EC
connector according to the cable coding, see Figure A-8, “Pin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
A-17
Installation sequence module container with
32-pair cable
assignment of EC connectors (32-pair) rear side” (A-15). Connect the
wires by means of the LSA-PLUS insertion tool.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
When the wiring is finished, swing the module container back, place
the excess length of the cables in the cabling area and mount the
module container to the MDF.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Perform checks and measurements of the system cabling (continuity
test optional with the aid of the LSA Edge Adapter cable or the LSA
Edge Connect cable).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-18
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
32-pair cable
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Insert the appropriate modules into the module container while
observing the mechanical guidance and push the module backwards
into the rear EC connector.
............................................................................................................................................................
7
Press firmly until the module clicks into the module container. An
audible click confirms that the insertion has been completed
successfully. Position the module downwards for interlocking so that
the front edge is inside of the module container.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
A-19
32-pair cable
............................................................................................................................................................
8
Bolt the front brackets on both sides alternately and check the correct
position of the two EC connectors by pushing gently with your hand.
............................................................................................................................................................
9
Connection areas on the front side of the module container.
............................................................................................................................................................
10
Determine the length of the patch cable, cut the cable and strip the
insulation to the needed length, pass the cable sidewise through the
loop until the cable sheath reaches the EC connector. Position each
single wire in the contact guide slot of the EC connector according to
the relevant module pin assignment, see “a/b Wiring for module
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-20
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
32-pair cable
container on subscriber side” (A-28). Connect the wires by means of
the LSA-PLUS insertion tool.
1
a
1
b
2
a
2
b
3
a
3
b
4
a
4
b
5
a
5
b
6
a
6
b
7
a
7
b
8
a
8
b
1
a
1
b
w bl w or w
bk
bk
bk
s
w br w bl w or w
bk
bk
bk
bk
s
w br
bk
w
bk
bl
2
a
2
b
3
a
3
b
4
a
4
b
5
a
5
b
w or w
bk
bk
s
w br w bl
bk
bk
6
a
6
b
7
a
7
b
8
a
8
b
w or w
bk
bk
s
w br
bk
............................................................................................................................................................
11
Optional, if requested: Place the label holder (consisting of label area
and transparent cover) on the front of the module container and
anchor it in the snap-in points.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
A-21
Replacement
of the modules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This procedure is used to replace modules.
Procedure
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Remove the label holder by pressing down the mechanical interlock in
the center with the LSA-PLUS insertion tool so that it unlocks.
Afterwards move the label holder forward.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Before removing the wired front bracket, mark their positions to avoid
a later mix-up.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-22
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Untighten the screws on both sides of the front bracket alternately and
remove the front bracket together with both EC connectors by pulling
forward.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
Place the retractable blade of the LSA-PLUS insertion tool in the
notch in the middle of the module and lift slightly upward so that it
unlocks.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Check unlocked position (left and right) and pull out the module in
the unlocked position uniformly.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
A-23
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Remove the module completely from the module container and store
it in a safe place.
............................................................................................................................................................
7
Insert the new module, for example a splitter module, in the reverse
sequence, as described in “Installation sequence module container
with 32-pair cable” (A-17).
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-24
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Replacement
of the module container
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Procedure
1
This procedure is used to replace the module container.
............................................................................................................................................................
Remove the label holder. Before removing the wired front bracket,
mark off their position to avoid a later mix-up, see the figure for an
example.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Untighten the screws on both sides of the front bracket alternately and
remove the front bracket together with both EC connectors by pulling
forward.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
A-25
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Place the screwdriver in the bore hole, press back and move the
screwdriver sideways as a lever towards the center of the module
container. Release the mechanical interlock and swing the module
container forward sideways. Note: For module container type A the
steps 3 and 4 are not applicable.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
Remove the other side with the same procedure above.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-26
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Release the module container. For new insertion, see procedure in
Chapter “Installation sequence module container with 32-pair cable”
(A-17).
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
A-27
a/b
Wiring for module container on subscriber side
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Background
This procedure describes how the new installation concept (NIC)
applies for example to the ADSL32 packs LPA432 (POTS over
ADSL) and LPA434 (ADSL over ISDN); for further examples refer to
the Applications and Planning Guide Narrowband and ATM xDSL
services (363-211-586).
The APs are cabled to service-independent module containers instead
of disconnect terminal blocks. When the service requirements change,
the modules can be easily upgraded while the system cabling remains
the same.
Figure A-10 Wiring diagram
POTS over ADSL via LPA432
ADSL over ISDN via LPA434
Splitter module
ADSL
LPA432
32 ports
S
No splitters on board
Any
POTS
AP
POTS + ADSL
Subscriber line
POTS
POTS
MDF
Applicable for LPA43 2 combined with any POTS pack
Assumptions
Splitter module
ADSL
LPA434 32 ports
S
No splitters on board
Any
ISDN
AP
ISDN + ADSL
Subscriber line
ISDN
ISDN
MDF
Applicable for LPA434
The subscriber loops for the ADSL and NB services are fully
identified. If not, contact the originator of the work order.
All ADSL ports of the ADSL32p packs LPA432 or of the ADSL32i
packs LPA434 will be connected via splitter modules.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-28
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
a/b Wiring for module container on
subscriber side
Module pin assignment
The module container consists of the module carrier completely
equipped with modules, EC connectors, and front brackets equipped
with two EC connectors each (see figure below).
Figure A-11 Module container
The figure below shows the Module pin assignment for POTS APs
LPZ1XY: All POTS APs with 32 subscriber ports may be connected
via connect-through modules to the MDF.
Figure A-12 Module pin assignment for POTS APs LPZ1XY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
A-29
subscriber side
The figure below shows the Module pin assignment for ISDN AP
LPU112 (2B1Q): All ISDN APs may be connected via
connect-through modules to the MDF.
Figure A-13 Module pin assignment for ISDN AP LPU112 (2B1Q)
The figure below shows the Module pin assignment for SHDSL AP
LPS510: The LPS510 may be connected via connect-through modules
to the MDF.
Figure A-14 Module pin assignment for SHDSL AP LPS510
The figure below shows the Module pin assignment for HDSL AP
LPS503/LPS504 (2B1Q): The LPS503/LPS504 may be connected via
Figure A-15 Module pin assignment for HDSL AP LPS503/LPS504
(2B1Q)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-30
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
subscriber side
The figure below shows the Module pin assignment for ISDN AP
LPU112 (2B1Q): All ISDN APs may be connected via
Figure A-16 Module pin assignment for ADSL AP LPA416
The figure below shows the Module pin assignment for ADSL AP
LPA417: The LPA417 may be connected via connect-through modules
to the MDF. Cport x means the combination of the ports ADSL x and
ISDN x.
Figure A-17 Module pin assignment for ADSL AP LPA417
Figure A-20 shows the Module pin assignment for LPA432 (ADSL lite): For ADSL-lite the LPA432 may be connected via
Figure A-18 Module pin assignment for LPA432 (ADSL - lite)
Figure A-21 shows the Module pin assignment for LPA432:
Country-dependent splitter modules may be used. In this case the
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
A-31
subscriber side
LPA432 may be combined with any POTS AP. Cport x means the
combination of the ports ADSL x and POTS x.
Figure A-19 Module pin assignment for LPA432
The figure below shows the Module pin assignment for LPA434:
Country-dependent splitter modules may be used. Each LPA434 may
be combined with two LPU430 or external ISDN sources.
Cport x means the combination of the ports ADSL x and ISDN x. For
example, Cport 1 is ADSL 1 combined with ISDN 1, Cport 17 is
ADSL 17 combined with ISDN 17, where ISDN 1 to ISDN 16 belong
to one LPU430, ISDN 17 to ISDN 32 belong to the other LPU430.
Figure A-20 Module pin assignment for LPA434
The figure below shows the Module pin assignment for SHDSL16 AP
LPS702: The LPS702 may be connected via connect-through modules
to the MDF.
Figure A-21 Module pin assignment for SHDSL16 AP LPS702
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-32
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Converting
a subscriber loop from NB only to ADSL+ NB
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
1
............................................................................................................................................................
If the subscriber loop is being converted from NB to ADSL + NB,
disconnect the frame jumper (or cross-connections) for the subscriber
loop before going to step 2. For a new subscriber loop start with step
2.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Connect the NB output of the NB AP to the rear side (AP connection
area) of the designated module (connect-through module) as shown in
the module pin assignment figures Figure A-12, “Module pin
assignment for POTS APs LPZ1XY” (A-29).
............................................................................................................................................................
3
Connect the ADSL output of the ADSL AP to the rear side (AP
connection area) of the designated module (splitter module) as shown
in the module pin assignment figures Figure A-12, “Module pin
assignment for POTS APs LPZ1XY” (A-29).
............................................................................................................................................................
4
Connect the front sides of both modules as shown in the wiring
diagram Figure A-10, “Wiring diagram” (A-28). This means, the right
front side of the connect-through module has to be connected to the
left front side of the splitter module.
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Repeat step 1. through step 4. for all subscriber loops on the pack.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Verify that all wiring performed contains no open or shorted wires or
a/b reversals.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
A-33
OAM&P connections
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
The following solutions are most commonly used for OAM&P
connections:
•
Serial local connection from a PC running the narrowband GSI to
the CIT connector on the CIU, refer to “Serial local connection
for narrowband applications” (A-36).
•
LAN connection from a PC running the narrowband GSI only to
the LAN connector on the shelf. The installation procedure for
this solution is provided in “LAN connection for narrowband
applications” (A-37).
•
Remote operations channel (ROC) within an E1 feeder This
OAM&P connection type has to be provisioned during system
turnup. It does not require any installation activity and therefore
is not considered in this document.
•
Serial connection from a PC running the broadband GSI only to
the CONSOLE connector on the AFM, refer to “Serial local
connection for ATM xDSL applications” (A-40).
•
LAN connection from a PC running the ATM xDSL GSI only to
the 10BASE-T connector on the AFM, refer to “LAN connection
for ATM xDSL applications” (A-41).
•
ATM Operations Channel within an ATM feeder
This OAM&P connection type has to be provisioned during
system turnup. It does not require any installation activity and
therefore is not considered in this document.
•
OAM&P information, refer to “Using the BB ATM Operations
Channel to transport narrowband OAM&P information” (A-43).
•
LAN connection from a PC running the IP GSI to the 10BASE-T
connector, refer to “LAN connection for IP applications” (A-46).
•
Inband management channel via IPFM uplinks.
This OAM&P connection type has to be provisioned during
system turnup. It does not require any installation activity and
therefore is not considered in this document.
Contents
A-36
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-34
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
OAM&P connections
Overview
A-37
A-40
A-41
Using the BB ATM Operations Channel to transport
narrowband OAM&P information
A-43
A-46
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
A-35
OAM&P connections
Serial
local connection for narrowband applications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Serial connection from GSI
to the CIU interface
The serial local connection from a PC running the narrowband GSI
may be connected to the CIT connector on the CIU.
Figure A-22 Serial connection of the GSI-NB
Serial connection directly
AnyMe-
GSI-NB
RS-232C
COM1/
CIU/CIT
For the connection a normal 1:1 RS-232C cable as shown in the table
below must be used (single NE mode without PPP).
Internal cable connections
Table A-5
The internal cable connections for connecting the PC GSI locally to
the CIU are:
RS-232C cable: AnyMedia, connector CIT on CIU to PC GSI, COM1/COM2
Male conn. CIT (DCE mode),
AnyMedia signal for
(from female CIT on CIU)
RS-232C
Female conn. COM1/COM2 (DTE mode) 1
Wire
9-pin
(from male COM1/2 on PC GSI)
9-pin
25-pin
1 (internally not used)
DCD / CD (in)
1
8
2
RxD / RD (out)
2
3
3
TxD / TD (in)
3
2
4
DTR (in)
4
20
5
Signal Ground
5
7
6
DSR (out)
6
6
7
RTS (in)
7
4
8
CTS (out)
8
5
9
not used (RI)
22 not used
Notes:
1.
Before making the cable the type of connector used must be checked (9-/25-pin, male/female). Depending
on the PC used the connector type can differ from the type stated above. When using PPP or ″Multiple NE
mode″ the bridge DCD-DSR may be required depending on the PC used.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-36
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
OAM&P connections
LAN
connection for narrowband applications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
LAN connectors
Cables
This procedure is optional. It consists of manufacturing LAN cables
(required for ETSI V5 Shelves) and installing the external LAN cables
(for the narrowband subsystems) which will provide connections from
the LAN connectors on the connector fields of the shelves to the
customer’s external 10BaseT LAN equipment (e.g. hub).
Table A-6
LAN connector designation
Shelf
LAN connector
Pinning described
in
ETSI V5 Shelves
J2
“LAN connector
(J2)” (4-44)
LAG 1900 Shelves
J104
“LAN connector
(J104)” (4-66)
Table A-7
LAN cables
Code, length
Description
Destination 1
Destination 2
ED7C874–31
G3, 8 ft (2.44
m)
LAN
HUB
LAG 1900
shelves P104
Manufacturing
required
ETSI V5
shelves J2
Important! For connecting consider if straight-through wiring (to
hub) or crossover wiring is required (point-to-point connection to
a PC directly). For the point-to-point connection a crossover of
Tx with Rx for in and out is required. Use of shielded cable is
recommended.
Requirements for
manufacturing LAN cables
for ETSI V5 Shelves
The following parts are required for manufacturing the LAN cable for
one ETSI V5 Shelf.
Table A-8
Part
Description
9-pin D-sub, male, soldering
Connector hood with straight
cable outlet
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
A-37
OAM&P connections
LAN connection for narrowband
applications
Table A-8
(continued)
Part
Description
S-09YS(St)CY 2x2x0.6 (AWG24)
Cable 4x2 shielded, length
according to customer’s needs
Western RJ45 8-pin
8-pin RJ45 connector, male
Hood for RJ45
Note: For connecting consider if straight-through wiring (to mini hub)
or crossover wiring is required (point-to-point connection to a PC
directly). For the point-topoint connection a crossover of Tx with Rx
for in and out is required. Use of shielded cable is recommended.
Installing LAN cables
The LAN cables should be installed in the following order:
............................................................................................................................................................
1
Locate the first LAN cable for the rack and verify that the customer’s
cable side is equipped with the correct connector matching the
customer’s 10BaseT LAN equipment.
............................................................................................................................................................
2
Label the 9-pin connector with ″P104″ or ″J2″ and mark the RJ45
connector as required.
Figure A-23 LAN connectors on the shelves
ETSI V5
shelves
LAG 1900
shelves
J2
J104
J2
P104
To LAN
To LAN
............................................................................................................................................................
3
First take the LAN cable for shelf 1 and feed the end with the 9-pin
connector on the right side into the cable duct.
............................................................................................................................................................
4
In height of the connector field on top of the shelf push the connector
through the opening at the left side. Carefully place the cable in the
cable opening so that no cable will be damaged.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-38
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
OAM&P connections
LAN connection for narrowband
applications
............................................................................................................................................................
5
Mate the 9-pin connector with connector J104 (or J2 for the ETSI V5
shelf) on the connector field of the shelf and secure. Add cable ties as
needed.
............................................................................................................................................................
6
Attach the LAN cable with cable ties to the recently installed E1
cables.
............................................................................................................................................................
7
Connect the other end of the LAN cables to customer’s LAN
equipment.
END OF STEPS
..............................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
A-39
OAM&P connections
Serial
local connection for ATM xDSL applications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Serial connection from GSI
to the serial AFM interface
The serial local connection from a PC running the ATM xDSL GSI
may be connected to the CONSOLE connector on the AFM faceplate.
For the connection a 1:1 RS-232C cable as shown in the previous
table must be used. The use of shielded cable is recommended.
Internal cable connections
Table A-9
Internal cable connections for connecting the PC GSI directly to the
AFM packs are:
RS-232C cable: Connector CONSOLE on AFM packs to PC GSI, COM1/COM2
Male conn. CONSOLE (DCE
AnyMedia signal for
mode), (from female CONSOLE on
RS-232C
Female conn. COM1/COM2 (DTE mode) 1
(from male COM1/2 on PC GSI for ATM xDSL
applications)
AFM pack)
9-pin
Wire
9-pin
25-pin
1
not used
1
8 not used
2
RxD / RD (out)
2
3
3
TxD / TD (in)
3
2
4
DTR (in)
4
20
5
Signal Ground
5
7
6
DSR (out)
6
6
7
RTS (in)
7
4
8
CTS (out)
8
5
9
not used (RI)
22 not used
Notes:
1.
Before making the cable the type of connector used must be checked (9-/25-pin, male/female).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-40
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
OAM&P connections
LAN
connection for ATM xDSL applications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LAN connection from GSI
to the 10BASE-T connector
on AFM
The connector 10BASE-T on the AFM faceplate is used for
connecting the Ethernet interface of the PC card to the Ethernet
interface on the AFM packs. It is assumed that the PC GSI is running
the GSI BB software for ATM xDSL applications.
Cabling
This external cable has to be manufactured on site by the installer.
The cable has to be routed from the AFM pack, connector 10BASE-T
to the PC-GSI for ATM xDSL applications directly or via the
customer’s 10BaseT Ethernet equipment (e.g. mini hub/PC).
For connecting consider if straight-through wiring (to mini hub) or
crossover wiring is required (to PC GSI point-to-point directly). Use
of shielded cable is recommended for long distances.
Important! On Hubs there is often a switch/button near a
marked RJ45 connector to change the connectivity from
straight-through to crossover and vice versa.
Crossover wiring for LAN
point-topoint
Table A-10
For example, the crossover cable connections for the LAN
point-to-point connection with an RJ45 connector are:
External Ethernet cable: 10BASE-T on AFM pack to PC GSI directly (crossover
wiring for LAN point-to-point connection)
Male conn. 8-pin RJ45,
AnyMedia signal
Wire 1
Male conn. 8-pin RJ45 (from
(from female 10BASE-T on
PC GSI signal
female RJ45 connector of
AFM pack)
LAN card, PC GSI)
1
Transmit Data + (out)
3
Receive Data + (in)
2
Transmit Data - (out)
6
Receive Data - (in)
3
Receive Data + (in)
1
Receive Data - (in)
2
4
5
6
7
8
Notes:
1.
Dependent on cable used.
Straight-through wiring
For example, the straight-through cable connections via the customer’s
10BaseT Ethernet equipment (e.g. mini hub) for the LAN
point-to-point connection to an RJ45 connector are:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
A-41
OAM&P connections
LAN connection for ATM xDSL
applications
Table A-11
External Ethernet cable: 10BASE-T on AFM pack to customer’s 10BaseT LAN
equipment (straight-through)
Male conn. 8-pin RJ45,
AnyMedia signal
(from female 10BASE-T on
Wire 1
Male conn. 8-pin RJ45 (from
Signal of customer’s
female RJ45 connector of LAN
10BaseT equipment
AFM pack)
card, PC GSI)
1
1
2
2
3
Receive Data + (in)
3
Receive Data + (in)
Receive Data - (in)
6
Receive Data - (in)
4
5
6
7
8
Notes:
1.
Dependent on cable used.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-42
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
OAM&P connections
OAM&P
information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
OAM&P narrowband information may be transported via the BB ATM
Operations Channel. Using the BB ATM Operations Channel as a
communications link provides an alternative to a LAN connection.
There are a number of requirements for the BB ATM Operations
Channel:
•
IP address assignment for the PC running the GSI
•
IP assignment for the PC Gateway
•
IP assignment for the BB ATM Operations Channel on the AFM
circuit pack
•
A LAN crossover cable or Ethernet hub to connect from the
AFM circuit pack 10BASE-T jack to the LAN connector on the
shelf as shown in the next table.
The figure below illustrates an example for the BB ATM Operations
Channel configuration.
Figure A-24 Physical connection for the BB ATM Operations
Channel (example)
LAN
COMDAC
OAM&P information for
narrowband passes
through backplane
10BaseT port
Rx and Tx port
for feeder cable
BB ATM Operations Channel carries OAM&P information for narrowband
management and ATM
xDSL management
Cabling
The 10BASE-T connector (LAN port) of the AFM pack has to be
connected to the LAN port of the same shelf. The table below shows
the required connections, depending on the shelf type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
A-43
OAM&P connections
Using the BB ATM Operations Channel to
transport narrowband OAM&P information
Table A-12
Required connections
1
Shelf type
Destination 1
Destination 2
Crossover cable
ETSI V5
Shelf
Female LAN connector J2
on ETSI V5 Shelf
10BASE-T connector on AFM
ED7C829-32 Gr6
LAG 1900
Shelf
Female LAN connector
J107 on LAG Shelf
10BASE-T connector on AFM
(4 feet, ≈ 1.2 m) or
ED7C829-32 Gr6A
(7 feet, ≈ 2.1 m)
Notes:
1.
When two AFMs are installed, special duplex cabling is required as described below.
Cabling for duplex mode
Special duplex cabling is required when two AFMs are installed.
For establishing a connection between the 10BaseT ports on both
AFMs in duplex AFM mode and the LAN port on the shelf construct
a special Y assembly as described below:
•
Obtain a commercially available ″straight-through″ wired RJ45
3-fold coupler (e.g. TA315-4 from ARP Datacon).
•
Connect 2 commercially available ″straight through″ 10BaseT
cables (Pin 1 to Pin 1, Pin 2 to Pin 2, and so on, male DB-9
connector on one end, female DB-9 connector on the other end)
to two of the split-out jacks of the RJ45 3-fold coupler.
•
Connect the orderable LAN cable ED7C829-32 Gr6 or
ED7C829-32 Gr6A with the RJ45 plug to the third split-out jack
of the RJ45 3-fold coupler.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-44
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
OAM&P connections
Using the BB ATM Operations Channel to
transport narrowband OAM&P information
The figure below shows how to construct this special Y-assembly.
Figure A-25 Y-assembly for cabling in duplex mode
The signals and pins of this Y-assembly with RJ-45 plug connectors
on all three ends and wired “cross over” is shown in table below.
Table A-13
Pin assignment of Y-assembly
End A (AFM 1)
End B (AFM 2)
End C (Shelf/ CIU/ COMDAC)
RJ-45 Pin
Signal
RJ-45 Pin
Signal
LAN
connector
J2 or J107
Signal
1
Transmit Data +
1
Transmit Data +
1
Receive Data +
2
Transmit Data -
2
Transmit Data -
6
Receive Data -
3
Receive Data +
3
Receive Data +
2
Transmit Data +
6
Receive Data -
6
Receive Data -
7
Transmit Data -
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
A-45
OAM&P connections
LAN
connection for IP applications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The LAN connection for IP applications to the 10BASE-T connector
on the IPFM is done exactly in the same way as the LAN connection
to the 10BASE-T connector on the AFM and the same cable types are
used. Therefor refer to “LAN connection for ATM xDSL applications”
(A-41) for a description.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-46
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Glossary
A
ACP
Alarm Connection Panel
ADSL
Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line
AFM
ATM Feeder Multiplexer
AFMDS3
ATM Feeder Multiplexer (45 Mbit/s)
AFME1
ATM Feeder Multiplexer for E1
AFME3
ATM Feeder Multiplexer (34 Mbit/s)
AFMO
Optical ATM Feeder Multiplexer
ALS
Automatic Laser Shutdown
AP
Application Pack
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
AWG
American Wire Gauge
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B
BER
Bit Error Rate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
G L O S S A R Y
G L - 1
BNC
Bayonet Navy Connector
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C
CDF
Clock Distribution Field
CIT
Craft Interface Terminal
CIU
Communication Interface Unit
COMDAC
Common Data and Control
CP
Circuit Pack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D
DDF
Digital Distribution Frame
DOTS
Digital Office Timing Supply
DSL
Digital Subscriber Line
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E
EMC
Electro-Magnetic Compatibility
ESD
Electrostatic Discharge
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F
FE
Fast Ethernet
FFCU
Fan Filter and Clock Distribution Unit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
G L O S S A R Y
G L - 2
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
G
GBIC
Gigabit Interface Converter
GPB
General Purpose Block
GSI
Graphical System Interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
H
HDSL
High bit rate Digital Subscriber Line
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
I
IP&T
Information Products and Training
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network
ITU
International Telecommunication Union
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
L
LAN
Local Area Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
M
MDF
Main Distribution Frame
Mesh-BN
Mesh Bonding Network
Mesh-IBN
Mesh Isolated Bonding Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N
NAM
Navis ® AnyMedia ® Element Management
NE
Network Element
NIC
New Installation Concept
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
G L O S S A R Y
G L - 3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
O
OAP
Optical Application Pack
OC
Optical Carrier
OCP
Optical Controller Pack
ONU
Optical Network Unit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
P
PCD
Passive Clock Distribution
POTS
Plain Old Telephone Service
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
R
RCP
RFCP
Subrack for Fuse Panel and Connection panel
RFP
Rack Fuse Panel
RGU
Ringing Generator Unit
ROC
Remote Operations Channel
RTU
Remote Test Unit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
S
SCP
SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SDSL
Symmetric Digital Subscriber Line
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
G L O S S A R Y
G L - 4
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
STM
Synchronous Transport Module
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T
TAP
Test Access Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
G L O S S A R Y
G L - 5
Index
A
a/b- cables
Installing, 5-42
5-42
ADSL-cables
Installing, 5-44
5-44, 5-49
5-49
(ACP520), 4-24
4-24
Alarm connectors (ETSI
V5)
Available cables, 4-48
4-48
Pin assignment, 4-47
4-47
Alarm connectors (LAG
1900)
4-72
Cable specification,
4-71
4-70
........................................................
C
Cabeling
Internal cables, 3-36
3-36
Cables
Alarm cables (ETSI
V5), 4-48
4-48
Alarm cables (LAG
1900), 4-71
4-71
Clock cables (LAG
1900), 4-74
4-74
E1 cables (ETSI V5),
4-38
E1 cables (LAG 1900),
4-60
LAG 1900 Shelf, 2-11
2-11
LAN cable (ETSI V5),
4-44
Clock cable
LAN cable (LAG 1900),
4-66
Installing, 5-87
5-87, 5-92
5-92
Clock connectors (LAG
1900)
Power cables (LAG
1900), 4-56
4-56
5-92
Ringing cables (LAG
1900), 4-77
4-77
4-74
RTU cable (ETSI V5),
4-45
RTU cable (LAG 1900),
4-68
TAP cables (ETSI V5),
4-42
TAP cables (LAG
1900), 4-64
4-64
4-73
Conventions, xxviii
xxviii
........................................................
D
DC power connections,
1-14
Documentation set, xxix
xxix
........................................................
Cabling
Alarm cables, 4-10
4-10,
4-24
(ACP), 4-24
4-24
E
E1 cables
Installing, 5-32
5-32, 5-35
5-35,
5-38
E1 connectors (ETSI V5)
ETSI V5 Shelf, 4-28
4-28
5-51
Power cables, 4-15
4-15
4-38
Power cables (RFCP),
4-5
for alarming, 4-10
4-10
Ringing distribution,
4-7
4-7, 4-18
4-18
Clock
ETSI V5 Shelf, 2-11
2-11
4-32
E1 connectors (LAG 1900)
4-60
4-58
E1 feeder cables
Installing, 5-51
5-51
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
I N D E X
I N - 1
Floor mounting
(Standard), 3-5
3-5
E1 jumper setting, 4-38
E3/DS3 cables
Floor mounting
earthquake 4, 3-8
3-8
Installing, 5-9
5-9
E3/DS3 feeder cables
Line-up rack adapter
kit, 3-17
3-17
Electrostatic discharge
considerations, 1-10
1-10
EMC-compliant
installation, 1-13
1-13
Optical cable duct, 3-25
3-25
Wall mounting, 3-11
3-11
........................................................
F
ESD, 1-10
1-10
Fan Filter and Clock
Distribution Unit (FFCU),
4-8
Alarm cables, 4-48
4-48
Alarm connectors, 4-47
4-47
FFCU
Clock, 2-11
2-11
Fan Filter and Clock
Distribution Unit, 4-8
4-8
E1 cables, 4-38
4-38
E1 connectors, 4-32
4-32
Fiber cables
LAN cable, 4-44
4-44
Installing, 5-54
5-54, 5-59
5-59,
5-64 5-69
5-64,
5-69, 5-74
5-74
LAN connector, 4-44
4-44
Mounting, 3-30
3-30
Testing procedure, 5-80
5-80
........................................................
G
Power connectors, 4-30
4-30
Ringing, 2-10
2-10
Ringing connector, 4-52
4-52
Station clock connector,
4-50
TAP cables, 4-42
4-42
Celing mounting, 3-14
3-14
Alarm connectors, 4-70
4-70
Clock, 2-11
2-11
Clock cables, 4-74
4-74
Clock connectors, 4-73
4-73
E1 cables, 4-60
4-60
E1 connectors, 4-58
4-58
Fan connector, 4-78
4-78
LAN cable, 4-66
4-66
LAN connector, 4-66
4-66
Layout, 2-9
2-9
Mandatory equipment,
2-9
Mounting, 3-33
3-33
Power cables, 4-56
4-56
Power connectors, 4-56
4-56
Ringing connector, 4-76
4-76
Ringing cables, 4-77
4-77
RTU cable, 4-68
4-68
RTU connector, 4-68
4-68
TAP cables, 4-64
4-64
TAP connector, 4-62
4-62
Timing, 2-11
2-11
Internal connections
4-133
RCP, 4-133
LAN cables
Installing, A-37
A-37
RFCP, 4-131
4-131
LAN connector (ETSI V5)
IPFM uplink feeders
4-44
Installing, 5-82
5-82
........................................................
4-44
ETSI-based rack
Back-to-Back rack
adapter kit, 3-21
3-21
Alarm cables, 4-71
4-71
General wiring warnings,
1-27
I
Timing, 2-11
2-11
LAG 1900 Shelf
Ringing, 2-10
2-10
RFCP, 4-6
........................................................
TAP connector, 4-41
4-41
L
General installation
warnings, 1-24
1-24
2-10 3-27
Grounding, 2-10,
3-27,
4-16
RTU cable, 4-45
4-45
RTU connector, 4-45
4-45
Fan connector (LAG 1900)
4-78
ETSI V5 Shelf
Mandatory equipment,
2-8
K
Kits, 2-3
2-3
........................................................
Grounding, 3-27
3-27
Installing, 5-12
5-12, 5-15
5-15,
5-19 5-24
5-19,
5-24
EMC, 1-13
1-13
Jumpers, 5-128
5-128
........................................................
J
4-38 4-76
Jumper, 4-38,
4-76
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
I N D E X
I N - 2
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
Ringing connector
(LAG 1900), 4-76
4-76
LAN connector (LAG
1900)
Available cable, 4-67
4-67
RTU connector (ETSI
V5), 4-45
4-45
4-66
RTU connector (LAG
1900), 4-68
4-68
4-66
Laser safety guidelines,
1-15
........................................................
M
Mandatory equipment
LAG 1900 Shelf, 2-9
2-9
P
Power connectors (LAG
1900)
4-56
Pin assignment
4-56
Alarm connectors (ETSI
V5), 4-47
4-47
4-56
Alarm connectors (LAG
1900), 4-70
4-70
Clock connectors (LAG
1900), 4-73
4-73
E1 connectors (ETSI
V5), 4-32
4-32
E1 connectors (LAG
1900), 4-58
4-58
Fan connector (LAG
1900), 4-78
4-78
LAN connector (ETSI
V5), 4-44
4-44
Power feeder cables
Installing, 5-116
5-116
Powering, 2-10
2-10
........................................................
R
Ringing cables
Installing (J1C301B-1),
5-124
5-124
Pre-installed cables,
4-30
Passive Clock Distribution
Panel (PCD520), 4-20
4-20
2-10
TAP connector (ETSI
V5), 4-41
4-41
4-30
O
Optional kits, 2-3
2-3
........................................................
Jumpers, 5-128
5-128
Installing (J1C293B-1),
5-120
5-120
Power connectors (ETSI
V5)
Metal radius clip, 5-83
5-83
........................................................
ETSI V5 Shelf, 2-10
2-10
(ETSI V5), 4-50
4-50
TAP connector (LAG
1900), 4-62
4-62
ETSI V5 Shelf, 2-8
2-8
Ringing
Rack
Ringing connector (ETSI
V5)
4-52
4-52
Ringing connector (LAG
1900)
4-77
4-77
4-76
Ringing jumper, 4-76
4-76
Ringing termination block,
5-127
5-127
Routing
Alarm cables, 4-25
4-25
Clock cables, 4-9
4-9, 4-21
4-21
CP and AP cables, 5-5
5-5
Kits, 2-3
2-3
ETSI V5 Shelf, 4-28
4-28
Layout, 2-3
2-3, 2-5
2-5
LAG 1900 cables, 4-54
4-54
Remove door, 3-3
3-3
Power cables, 4-5
4-5, 4-15
4-15
Standard delivery, 2-3
2-3
Ringing cables
(J1C301B-1), 5-128
5-128
Technical data, 2-12
2-12
RTU connector (ETSI V5)
LAN connector (LAG
1900), 4-66
4-66
(RCP), 4-14
4-14
Power connectors (ETSI
V5), 4-30
4-30
Rack connection panel for
alarming, 4-10
4-10
4-45
Power connectors (LAG
1900), 4-56
4-56
RFCP
4-45
Ringing connector
(ETSI V5), 4-52
4-52
4-46
Subrack for Fuse and
Connection Panel, 4-3
4-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005
I N D E X
I N - 3
RTU connector (LAG
1900)
4-69
........................................................
T
Installing, 5-100
5-100, 5-106
5-106
4-68
TAP connector (ETSI V5)
4-43
4-68
........................................................
S
4-42
Safety, 1-1
4-41
Appearance of the
safety instructions, 1-8
1-8
TAP connector (LAG 1900
Shelf)
DC power connections,
1-14
4-64
Electrostatic discharge
considerations, 1-10
1-10
TAP connector (LAG 1900)
4-64
EMC-compliant
installation, 1-13
1-13
4-62
General installation
warnings, 1-24
1-24
Technical data
ETSI V5 Shelf, 2-12
2-12
General safety
information, 1-4
1-4
2-12
Timing
General wiring
warnings, 1-27
1-27
ETSI V5 Shelf, 2-11
2-11
Laser safety guidelines,
1-15
Warnings for taking the
power supply into
operation, 1-32
1-32
Warnings for transport
and storage, 1-36
1-36
Shelves
ETSI V5 Shelf, 2-8
2-8
TAB-B cable
2-11
Tools, 2-13
2-13
........................................................
W
Warnings for taking the
power supply into
operation, 1-32
1-32
Warnings for transport and
storage, 1-36
1-36
LAG 1900 Shelf, 2-9
2-9
(ETSI V5)
4-50
4-50
Subrack for Fuse and
Connection Panel (RFCP),
4-3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
I N D E X
I N - 4
363-211-603
Issue 1, July 2005

AnyMedia® Access System (30 channel) Installation - Alcatel

Transcription

Similar documents

- Included with Park Millennium Cable TV Package

softail - Fuelpak

HOW IT WORKS:

600A / 900A 35 kV Class T-Body Deadbreak

How to make a saddle rack

Let SeNKO heLp yOu gO GREEN

TRUcore™ 300 Series

ITT Cannon Micro Wireless Access Point High

Dual k

AccuBoom™ Case IH SPX 4410 CAN Installation